CD 600 VFD

MW008
CD 600
Use and maintenance manual
MANUAL PART 00AMV13002.00

Revision: 07
Date of creation: 11/07/2006
Last revision: 12/11/2009
Validity S/N 06CF096
Copyright
All rights reserved. Reproducing, adapting or translating this manual without prior written authorization is
expressly forbidden, except for the cases envisaged by copyright laws.
CONTENTS C
CHAPTER - Foreword ................................................................................................................................................. 7
CHAPTER 1 - General information................................................................................................................................ 9

1.1 Using the manual ........................................................................................................................................................................ 9
1.2 Keeping the manual .................................................................................................................................................................... 9
1.2.1 Pictograms used in the manual.......................................................................................................................................... 10
1.2.2 Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.3 Receivers of the manual .................................................................................................................................................... 11
1.2.3.1 Machine identification data......................................................................................................................................... 13
1.2.3.2 Electrical board identification data.............................................................................................................................. 13
1.2.4 Information on the authorised service centres ................................................................................................................... 14
CHAPTER 2 - Description of the machine and technical data ................................................................................. 15

2.1 General description of Apparatus.............................................................................................................................................. 15
2.1.1 Description of the working cycle of the machine................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.1.1 The rotating assembly ................................................................................................................................................ 15
2.1.1.2 Fully variable speed Back Drive and Main Drive ........................................................................................................ 16
2.1.1.3 PLC control................................................................................................................................................................. 16
2.2 CENTRIFUGE COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION....................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.1 CONVEYOR ...................................................................................................................................................................... 18
2.2.2 BOWL ................................................................................................................................................................................ 20
2.2.3 GEAR BOX ....................................................................................................................................................................... 21
2.2.4 ACCELERATOR SUPPORT.............................................................................................................................................. 22
2.2.5 FRAME .............................................................................................................................................................................. 23
2.2.6 VESSEL ............................................................................................................................................................................. 24
2.2.7 SUPPLY PIPE.................................................................................................................................................................... 25
2.2.8 BELT GUARDS.................................................................................................................................................................. 25
2.3 BOWL AND CONVEYOR SPEED ............................................................................................................................................ 27
2.4 Electric package ........................................................................................................................................................................ 27
2.4.1 Main electric drive unit ....................................................................................................................................................... 27
2.4.2 Electric back motor drive unit............................................................................................................................................. 28
2.4.3 Mobile control panel........................................................................................................................................................... 29
2.4.4 Lubricating oil tank for bearings ......................................................................................................................................... 31
CHAPTER 3 - General safety information .................................................................................................................. 35

3.1 General information on safety ................................................................................................................................................... 35
3.2 Safety criteria ............................................................................................................................................................................ 35
3.2.1 Safety criteria recommended for handling ......................................................................................................................... 36
3.2.2 Safety criteria recommended for use ................................................................................................................................. 36
3.2.3 Safety criteria recommended for maintenance .................................................................................................................. 36
file: CD 600 NATOC.fm - ver. July 11, 2006 3:05 pm
3.3 Safety devices ........................................................................................................................................................................... 37

3.3.1 Safety standards adopted for the different units of the machine........................................................................................ 37
3.4 SAFETY COMPONENTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.4.1 Accelerometer.................................................................................................................................................................... 38
3.4.2 Centrifuge cover micro-switch............................................................................................................................................ 40
3.4.3 Main electric motor belt guards.......................................................................................................................................... 40
3.4.4 Back electric motor belt guards micro-switch..................................................................................................................... 41
3.4.5 Output shaft speed sensor (bowl) ...................................................................................................................................... 41
Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 3

C CONTENTS
3.4.6 Secondary shaft speed and rotation direction sensor (screw conveyor) ........................................................................... 42
3.4.7 Lubricating oil temperature sensor..................................................................................................................................... 42
3.4.8 Position of the fixed and moving guards ............................................................................................................................ 42
3.4.9 Centrifuge covers............................................................................................................................................................... 43
3.4.10 Main electric motor belt guard............................................................................................................................................ 43
3.4.11 Back drive guard ................................................................................................................................................................ 43
3.4.12 Residual risks..................................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.13 Solids outlet zone............................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.14 Liquid outlet zone............................................................................................................................................................... 44
3.4.15 Work zones ........................................................................................................................................................................ 44
3.4.16 Position of the safety decals on the machine..................................................................................................................... 45
CHAPTER 4 - Instruction for installation.................................................................................................................... 47

4.1 Instruction for installation........................................................................................................................................................... 47
4.2 LIFTING..................................................................................................................................................................................... 47
4.3 Transportation ........................................................................................................................................................................... 48
4.4 What to do at the machine delivery ........................................................................................................................................... 48
4.5 Positioning................................................................................................................................................................................. 48
4.5.1 Physical characteristics of the installation area ................................................................................................................. 48
4.6 Installation ................................................................................................................................................................................. 49
4.6.1 Choice of the installation site and anchoring to the floor ................................................................................................... 49
4.6.1.1 Map of the anchoring points on the floor .................................................................................................................... 49
4.6.2 Removing the safety supports used during transport ........................................................................................................ 50
4.6.2.1 Removing the safety support - reduction gear side.................................................................................................... 51
4.6.2.2 Removing the safety support - drive side ................................................................................................................... 54
4.6.3 Assembling the safety supports for transportation............................................................................................................. 58
4.6.3.1 Assembling the safety support - reduction gear side.................................................................................................. 58
4.6.3.2 Assembling the safety support - drive side................................................................................................................. 61
4.6.4 Assembling the feed pipe unit............................................................................................................................................ 65
4.6.5 Assembling the motors ...................................................................................................................................................... 65
4.6.6 Procedure to remove/fit transport support ......................................................................................................................... 66
4.6.7 Connections ....................................................................................................................................................................... 67
4.6.7.1 Electrical connections................................................................................................................................................. 67
CHAPTER 5 - Controls and devices............................................................................................................................ 69

5.1 Controls and devices................................................................................................................................................................. 69
CHAPTER 6 - Operations prior to use ........................................................................................................................ 71

6.1 Operations prior to use.............................................................................................................................................................. 71
6.1.1 Checks and operations before starting the machine.......................................................................................................... 71
6.2 Checking the protection devices ............................................................................................................................................... 71
CHAPTER 7 - Use of the machine ............................................................................................................................... 73

7.1 General warnings ...................................................................................................................................................................... 73
7.2 Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................................................................... 73
CHAPTER 8 - Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 75
4 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

CONTENTS C
8.1 Warnings for carrying out maintenance correctly ...................................................................................................................... 75
8.2 Preliminary maintenance operations ........................................................................................................................................ 76
8.3 Routine maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................ 76
8.4 Running-in maintenance ........................................................................................................................................................... 77
8.5 Daily jobs................................................................................................................................................................................... 77
8.6 Troubleshooting chart (see chapter 7) ...................................................................................................................................... 77
8.7 Belt tensioning........................................................................................................................................................................... 77
8.8 Extraordinary maintenance ....................................................................................................................................................... 78
8.9 Maintenance of the electrical system ........................................................................................................................................ 78
8.10 Lubrication................................................................................................................................................................................. 79
8.11 Lubricating the bearings ............................................................................................................................................................ 79
8.12 Bearings Grease Lubrication..................................................................................................................................................... 79
8.13 Oil Lubrication Bearings ............................................................................................................................................................ 80
8.14 Lubricating the reduction gear................................................................................................................................................... 81
8.15 Tightening torques..................................................................................................................................................................... 81
8.16 Recommended spares .............................................................................................................................................................. 81
8.17 .................................................................................................................................................................Instructions for repair 82
8.17.1 Removing the rotating assembly........................................................................................................................................ 82
CHAPTER - Annexes................................................................................................................................................. 83
Annex A
Electric wiring diagram
Annex B
Recommended MV
Spare Parts catalogue
Annex C
Compomac
Annex D
Sumitomo
Annex E
Mobile electrical panel
Annex F
Procedures
Annex G
Troubleshooting

C CONTENTS

FOREWORD F
Foreword
Congratulations for having chosen a Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. product.
Produced with the latest quality materials and the most advanced technology, the
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. machines have been designed to meet your
requirements.
To get the best performance out of the machine we recommend reading this use and
maintenance manual carefully.
NOTICE ON THE OWNERSHIP OF THE INFORMATION

• The configuration of the set-ups and of the devices in this user's manual may be
different to those with which the machines in the specific installation are equipped,
realised in accordance with special requirements or safety standards.
• In pursuing a policy of constant development and product updating, the company
reserves the right to make any modifications necessary to improve the fundamental
characteristics of the machines; without being obliged to inform the client of this or
being obliged in any other way. If this has no effect on the aspects of safety, the
company is not obliged to include this information in this document enclosed with
the machine.
• Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. also reserves the rights to the property of this printout
and any copying or reproduction or transferring to third parties is forbidden without
prior authorisation to do so.
METHOD OF REVISION
• New versions and/or revisions of the above-mentioned document are drawn up
only at the time when functional aspects of the machine are modified.
CERTIFICATE OF WARRANTY
• The manufacturer warrants that the correct operation and safety of the machine
described in this manual, have been tested before delivery.
• The warranty is valid for twelve (12) months and extends only to repair or
replacement of any defects arising from faulty materials or workmanship; electrical
motors are not covered by the warranty.
• The purchaser is responsible for the costs associated with dismantling and
returning the faulty parts.
• The warranty doesn't cover faults caused by falls, a wrong operation or a wrong or
neglected maintenance of the machine, as well as misuse or abuse.
• The warranty shall cease to have effect if the purchaser tampers with the product,
and especially the safety devices.
• No compensation will be due for the inactivity of the machine.
• The serial number printed on the machine is the main reference for the warranty,
file: Pr.fm - ver. July 5, 2006 3:48 pm
the use and maintenance manual and the identification of the product for any
needs.

F FOREWORD
WARNINGS
• The products are manufactured in accordance with the safety at work legislation in
force.
• Any “legal accident prevention test certificates” should be requested from the
competent bodies, under the responsibility and at the expense of the user.
• We recommend scrupulously observing the instructions in this manual to obtain the
maximum performance from the machine and avoid any problems that the non-
observance of the use and maintenance instructions could cause.
• To avoid contacting the manufacturer for problems that can easily be solved, we
recommend following the instructions in this manual.
• After having scrupulously observed the regulations dictated if you need assistance
from our technical service please provide sufficient technical information to identify
the possible nature of the fault and/or the malfunctioning parts or machine
members as this will help us provide the fastest assistance possible.
• Copies of the instruction manual can be obtained indicating the "serial number" of
the machine.
Note: for any other purpose or problem, please refer to the general sales conditions on
the invoice.
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.
file: Pr.fm - ver. July 5, 2006 3:48 pm

GENERAL INFORMATION 1
1 General information
1.1 Using the manual

This manual is an integral part of the line and provides all the information necessary for:
•the correct instruction of the operators on problems of safety;
•the correct installation of the machine;the in-depth knowledge of the machine

operation and limits;
•the correct use in safe conditions;performing maintenance jobs in a correct and safe
way;
•dismantling the machine in conditions of safety and in the respect of the regulations in
force on the health and safety of workers and the protection of the environment.
The instructions, drawings and documentation in the present manual are the property
of Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. and cannot be reproduced or copied in any way, neither
as a whole nor partially.
The client is also responsible for making sure that, if this document is modified by
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l., only the revised versions of the manual are effectively
present in the points of use.
The manual, drawn up by the manufacturer, is considered as an integral part of the
machine. Therefore it must be kept until the same is disposed of. In case of transfer of
title, this manual must be supplied to the new owner together with the machine.
The purchaser is responsible for transposing and implementing any local and national
safety regulations.
The machine supervisors must carefully read the contents of this and all other manuals
enclosed with the machine and make sure they are read also by transporters, installers,
users and service technicians in the parts of their competence.
Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra (FE) ITALY
Tel: +39 0532 831010
Fax: +39 0532 831650
WARNING
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability if the information in this manual is
not respected.
1.2 Keeping the manual

file: c1.fm - ver. July 5, 2006 3:53 pm
The manual must be kept in a safe place within reach so that it can be consulted by the
machine operators, installers or service technicians at any times.
The manual must be handled with care and with clean hands avoiding leaving it on dirty
surfaces.
It should also be kept away from sources of humidity and heat.
The parts must not be removed, ripped off or arbitrarily modified.

1 GENERAL INFORMATION
INFORMATION
The manual is considered as an integral part of the machine. Therefore it must be kept
until the same is disposed of.
1.2.1 Pictograms used in the manual

Different symbols and text styles have been used in this manual to draw the reader's
attention to situations that can endanger the safety of the operators and the machine,
and to important instructions, warnings, safety precautions etc.
WARNING
The machine operators and maintenance technicians must read and become
familiar with these symbols before continuing reading this manual and using and
servicing the machine.
The symbols in this manual are used to make safety and technical instructions clearer
and immediate. Pay maximum attention to them and, if in doubt on their meaning,
consult the following table.
The symbols used in this manual can be placed either beside a text or at the beginning
of a section.
WARNING
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information, instructions or
procedures which, if not properly complied with, may cause injury, death or long-
term health and environmental hazards
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information on subjects of particular
importance: failure to comply with this information makes the guarantee void.
The notices preceded by this symbol contain information or procedures recommended
by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. to keep the machine running to maximum efficiency.
GLOSSARY
In this paragraph you can find a list of the technical terms which may have a different
meaning with respect to common use, as well as the abbreviations used in the text.
DANGEROUS AREA
any zone within and/or around machinery in which an exposed person is subject to a
risk to his health or safety (Annex I, 1.1.1 - Directive 98/37/EC, EN12100/01-12100/02);
EXPOSED PERSON
any person wholly or partially in a danger zone (Annex I, 1.1.1 - Directive 98/37/ EC,
EN12100/01-12100/02);
MAN-MACHINERY INTERACTION
any situation during which an operator interacts with machinery, during a single
operation phase or the lifetime of the machine;

NUMBER OF OPERATORS
the number of operators needed for performing the operation described in the best way,
as a result of the detailed assessment done by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.; therefore
using fewer operators could make it impossible to obtain the expected results, or put
the personnel involved in danger;
STATE OF THE MACHINERY MEANS:

•the operating mode,
•the condition of the safety devices on the machine;
RESIDUAL HAZARD
a hazard which it has not been possible to eliminate or reduce sufficiently in the design,
against which the protection systems are not (or not wholly) effective. The manual
provides information on the existence of these hazards and the instructions and steps
to be taken to overcome them (see 6.4 of European standards EN 12100/1 and EN
12100/2 respectively);
SAFETY COMPONENTS
all those parts used to protect the machine operator, the failure or malfunctioning of
which can endanger the safety and health of exposed persons (e.g. hoisting
equipment, fixed guards, mobile guards, adjustable guards etc., electric, electronic,
optical, pneumatic or hydraulic devices that serve or interlock a guard etc.).
1.2.2 Abbreviations
Abbreviation Meaning
Chap. Chapter
Par. Paragraph
Pg. Page
Tab. Table
Fig. Figure
Min. Minimum
Max. Maximum
RH Right
LH Left
Ref. Reference
1.2.3 Receivers of the manual

Operator
The person who is technically qualified and suitably trained to correctly use the
machine.
The operators are only authorised to use the controls and instruments on the control
panels and boards.
The operators are not allowed to do any interventions on electrical appliances.

In particular, they are not allowed to:
open the electrical cabinets and access to the appliances/devices installed in such
cabinets;
remove the guards of live components installed on the machine such as:
1.covers of terminal boards

2.covers of terminal boards of junction boxes etc.
3.covers of valves, solenoid valves, local EEx combi panel etc.
4.covers of terminal boards of various instruments.
All these operations are the competence of the electrical maintenance technicians.
Mechanical installer / maintenance technician
The persons with an electrical, mechanical and electronic technical qualification and a
level of training on safety that authorises them to carry out maintenance operations in a
way that does not create risks to persons or things and the machine itself.
Electrical installer / maintenance technician
The persons who are technically qualified and suitably trained to service the electrical
system. They are also the responsible of the key to access to live parts.
The electrical maintenance technician is given the task of resetting devices and guards
and of repairing the system within the limits and in accordance with the instructions in
this manual.
Typical jobs within the competence of the electrical service technician are:
the replacement of fuses;

the resetting after tripping of thermal magnetic switches;
the replacement of defective parts.
Pos. Description
A Rotating serial number
B Part number
C Machine serial number
D Asset serial number
Carrier
The persons with a professional qualification and a level of training on safety that
authorises them to handle the machine in a way that does not create risks to persons or
things and the machine itself.
The personnel given the task of operating the machine must only perform the tasks
within the limits of their competence. DO NOT, at any times, attempt to do jobs or
operations for which a higher qualification is required. Not obeying this precaution may
result in serious injury and damage to the machine.
Manufacturer’s data
Name: Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

Address: Via Bellaria, 228 - 44033 Berra (FE) - Italy
Tel. +39 0532 831010
Fax. +39 0532 831650

1.2.3.1 Machine identification data
The machine is identified by a fixed metal plate installed on the same machine and
containing the following data:
Fig. 1.1 - Position of the machine data plate
WARNING
Do not tamper with, alter or remove the data plate. The data plate must never be
covered and must always be well visible.
Keep the data plate clean and remove any grease or dirt.Do not tamper with, alter
or remove the data plate. The data plate must never be covered and must always
be well visible.
Keep the data plate clean and remove any grease or dirt.
INFORMATION
Should the data plate be removed from the machine, get damaged accidentally or
become even partially unreadable, inform the manufacturer immediately
1.2.3.2 Electrical board identification data

The electrical board “EEx combi panel” is identified by a fixed metal plate installed on
the same board and containing the following main data:
Pos. Description
A Type/Cert.
B Max Voltage
C Max heat dissipation
D Volume Panel
E Min purge gas flow
F Min Pre pressure / over pressure
G Min/Max overpressure

Pos. Description
H Pro ID - Pro data
Fig. 1.2 - Position of the electrical board data plate
WARNING
Do not tamper with, alter or remove the data plate. The data plate must never be
covered and must always be well visible.
Keep the data plate clean and remove any grease or dirt.
INFORMATION
Should the data plate be removed from the machine, get damaged accidentally or
become even partially unreadable, inform the manufacturer immediately.
1.2.4 Information on the authorised service centres
WARNING
Any modification of the machine carried out without prior written permission
from the manufacturer makes the warranty void and relieves Mantovani &
Vicentini S.r.l. of any an all responsibility for damage to persons or things.
The use of non-original spare parts or of parts not expressly indicated in this
manual or in the spare parts catalogue relieves Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. of any
an all responsibility for damage to persons or things.
We also recommend contacting your nearest customer service centre if you are
unsure about the use of the machine.

Via Bellaria, 228, 44033 Berra (FE) ITALY
Tel: +39 0532 831010 - Fax:+39 0532 831650

DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE AND TECHNICAL DATA 2
2 Description of the machine and technical data
2.1 General description of Apparatus

On line mud treatment. Mud dewatering.
The Mantovani &Vicentini electric centrifuge CD600 is known as a decanting type
separator. A decanter is a centrifugal separator with a horizontal axis of rotation. A
process liquid or slurry is supplied to the rotating bowl where the solids are separated
from the liquid phase. The solids are forded to the inner wall of the bowl while the liquid
forms a ring inside the solids. A screw type conveyor transports the solids toward the
tapered end of a conical bowl. The liquid flows in a spiral path, established by the
conveyor flights, to the discharge ports at the large end of the bowl.
The separation of solids and liquids takes place within a cylindrical/truncated cone-
shaped rotating drum, upon the periphery of which the heavier, solid phase collects and
is continually removed by the internal scroll.
2.1.1 Description of the working cycle of the machine.

The centrifuge must be mounted above the ground to facilitate solids removal. The
solids outlet should be located above the disposal area or where the solids may be
easily moved to the proper disposal location. A slide attached from the solids outlet
may be necessary to route solids to a disposal area. The slide should be set at a steep
angle to prevent a solids buildup.
The centrifuge unit must be set level and on adequate supports. It may be necessary to
attach it to the support by tack welding.
INFORMATION
The discharged products must be disposed of according to any local and national
regulations.
Centrifuge decanter for solids control built for oilfield, industrial and environmental
applications. Maximum volume 92 cubic meter per hour. The CD 600 is fully variable
and controlled by PLC (Programmable Logic Control). It has the control flexibility to
deliver effective liquid/solid separation for the varying conditions encountered
throughout most drilling programs. Infinitely adjustable main bowl and conveyors
speeds, coupled with the ability to increase or decrease conveyor differential, provide a
complete range centrifuging capability with a single unit.
The rotating assembly has hardfacing protection and tungsten carbide coating in the
feed zone and in the conveyor flights while the discharge ports have only a tungsten
carbide coating.
"Bowl speed can vary to increase particle separation (cut-point) for improved solids
removal or cleaner effluent
"Differential speed can be regulated to improve solids conveying capacity, obtain dryer
discard or eliminate potential decanter plugging

"Main bowl and conveyors speeds are infinitely controllable within specified operating
ranges
"The liquid radius in the decanter can be changed to obtain either a dry/wet solids
discard (for maximum solids removal) or cleaner effluent
"Feed rate can be modified to improve solids removal efficiency.

2 DESCRIPTION OF THE MACHINE AND TECHNICAL DATA
Benefits:
"Provides precise control over the separation process to accommodate varying solids
loading and material sizes
"Reliable liquid/solid separation
"Reduces solids pack-off
2.1.1.1 Fully variable speed Back Drive and Main Drive

Main Drive is driven by a 93,25Kw electric motor controlled by an inverter.
The setting allows low amperage startups and assures infinite variable speed
adjustment to bowl.
Back Drive is driven by a 29,84 Kw electric motor controlled by an inverter.
The setting allows low amperage startups and assures infinite variable speed
adjustment to screw conveyor.
Bowl speed can be adjusted from 1200 rpm to 2800 rpm, screw conveyor speed can be
adjusted from 500 rpm to 1200 rpm and the differential speed can be adjusted from 1
rpm to 65 rpm (positive or negative).
2.1.1.2 PLC control

The centrifuge CD600 is controlled and monitored by a PLC (Programmed Logic
Controller). It ensures less pack off of solids, cleaner effluents, reduced personnel, and
automatic adjustment for different operating conditions. Speed adjustments are
performed and monitored through the touch screen fitted on the electric console. The
PLC directs a hydraulic servo-controlled valve to adjust motor speed. RPM readouts of
the conveyor and bowl are displayed on the touch screen.
The manual control panel for the centrifuge gives the option to operate the centrifuge
manually or automatically. The centrifuge can be operated manually when the handle is
pulled up, and automatically when the handle is pushed down. Speed can be adjusted
for main drive through the options provided by the program installed in touch screen
when the centrifuge is running manually.
Touch screen shows the possibility to start and to stop the centrifuge, the screw
conveyor, the main motor centrifuge, and the feed pump: naturally the control panel
could replace the touch screen in case of breaks. There are also four lights on the
panel. The corresponding light will be turned on when centrifuge, screw conveyor, main
motor and feed pump is on.
In the PLC control box the big red button is the emergency stop button.
Digital display panel displays several operating information by exploring the menu
using the PAGE button on the box.

MAIN UNITS OF THE MACHINE
Pos. Description
1 Mobile Electrical panel
2 Lubricating oil pump
3 Frame
4 Skid
5 Main electric motor
6 Back drive motor
7 Vessel assembly
8 Rotating
Fig. 2.1 - Mobile electric panel


Fig. 2.2 -
2.2 CENTRIFUGE COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION
2.2.1 CONVEYOR
The conveyor is suspended inside the bowl on bearings and rotates in the same
direction as the bowl, only slightly slower. The separated solids are forced to the inside
wall of the bowl by centrifugal force and conveyed to the solids discharge ports in the
bowl. The pitch (P) of the conveyor flights is the distance in millimeters between the
flights measured parallel to the axis of the conveyor.
Technical data single left screw conveyor ass’y:
•Weight: 487.83 Kg
•Length:1980mm
•Type: one lead/pitch screw 150
•Material Body: Duplex A890 (4A) spin casting
•Flight material: AISI 304 Stainless steel
•Material Hardfacing: Tungsten Carbide (hard facing/HRC 67) .Side Tungsten Carbide
hard-facing applied on cylindrical side-before the starting of the conical section welded
on the external edge of the flights conveyor carbon tungsten tiles. Deflector plates anti-
wear were be welded only in front of the buttonholes. The pictures below show the
peculiarity of the manufacturing.

Fig. 2.3 -
Fig. 2.4 -

Fig. 2.5 -
Fig. 2.6 -
2.2.2 BOWL
The centrifuge rotating assembly consists of the bowl, the conveyor and the planetary
gear box.
The centrifuge bowl is the outer member of the rotating assembly and is composed of
two cylindrical drums (respectively one cylindrical muds side and one cylindrical water
side), a conical intermediate drum and a conical drum. The end component fitted to the
muds side (the conical drum) has twelve bushing housing of muds discharge through
which the semy-dry solid flows out. At the opposite side there are six “half moon”
(flanges of water discharge level) through the aperture of which the separated liquid is
discharged. The hollow shaft at each end of the bowl is suspended in a pillow block
bearing to allow rotation of the bowl. On the bowl assembled are fitted flanges of 170

mm of bending radius: at the delivery the machine is equipped with 160mm-180mm
flanges as kit. The bowl is anchored to the basement by two supports mounted on a
roller bearing (on gearbox end) and on a spherical roller bearing (on feed end). This
configuration performs the best axial load resistance. If the centrifuge has to rotate at
the maximum speed for a long period, we recommend to choose even on the mud side
the roller bearing configuration (part number 00A33C303.600), even if this
configuration reduces axial load resistance.
Fig. 2.7 -
Technical/physical data rotating assembly:
Length: 2911 mm
Lambda ratio (bowl length/bowl inside diameter): 3.42
Weight: 959.27 Kg
Cylindrical Section:
•Diameter: 600mm
•Length: 1323mm
•Material: Duplex A890 (4A) obtained by spin casting
Conical section:
•Diameter large end: 690mm
•Length: 606 mm
•Cone angle: 7°
•Material conical section: Duplex A890 (4A)
•Material of the muds unloading bushes: Tungsten carbide (hard facing/ HRC 67)
file: 13002 c2.fm - ver. September 16, 2008 10:00 am
2.2.3 GEAR BOX

The Cyclo SUMITOMO gear box, is fitted on the hollow shaft at the cylindrical end of
the bowl. It drives the conveyor by means of a shaft going through the hollow shaft of
the bowl. On the end of the gear box opposite the bowl, is a small shaft. This is the
small sunwheel shaft of the planetary gear box. The speed and direction of the small
sunwheel determines the differential speed, or the relative speed of the bowl and the
conveyor. Reduction rate 1:87
Fig. 2.8 -
Fig. 2.9 -
Technical data:
•Type: one step ZSPN621-190-87 (Cyclo Drive) rotating shaft
•Gear ratio:87:1
•Maximum Torque: 11269 Nm
•Gear speed: 3000 rpm maximum
•Weight: 90Kg
•Recommended oil: Mantovani & Vicentini strongly recommends using “BLASIA 100”
for low temperatures and “BLASIA 320” for higher temperatures.
•Recommended oil changing: first changing after 500 working hours-every six month
until 12hours/day- every 2500 hours from 12 to 24 hours/day- every 1-2 month in
extreme environmental condition of temperature and humidity;
(For more details see Annex G).
Overload Protection:
•Primary-Electrical
•Secondary-Re-settable back drive of the torque limiter
•Differential speed: variable 1-65 rpm-maximum.
2.2.4 ACCELERATOR SUPPORT

Fig. 2.10 -
The accelerator support is composed by a bottom plate connected to the disk for cage
through the four union pins made by AISI 304. The main part is composed by four
accelerating supports and each one sustains respectively one flat small and one flat
great wear resistance made with widia (carbon tungsten). The main function of the two
different type of flats is the setting of the muds direction in motion. The internal central
deflector especially the protection cone made with widia protects the disk at the top. A
bottom protection made in resin is fitted between the accelerating support and the disk
for cage to amortize any vibration or crash.
2.2.5 FRAME
The frame is the tubular steel member on which the bowl pillow block bearings, back
drive hydraulic motor bracket, hydraulic package, main drive hydraulic motor bracket
and the vessel are mounted. The structure of the frame is shown below.
Technical data:
•The frame/skid is 4150 mm long , 2210 mm wide and 350 mm high.
•Frame approved to DNV 2.7-1 and EN 12079.
Fig. 2.11 -

2.2.6 VESSEL
he vessel is a stainless steel case mounted on the frame that completely encloses the
bowl. It is divided into compartments that divert the liquid and solids discharge to their
respective outlets. The semi-circular cover is hinged to allow easy access to the bowl
for inspection and maintenance.
LIQUID DISCHARGE
The line feeding mud to the centrifuge should terminate with a male 8.6" fitting to mate
with the feed tube. This line should be supported so it's weight will not be on the feed
tube.
The line connecting to this fitting can be steel hard piping, flexible hose of PVC pipe. It
should be sized to accommodate the liquid discharge rate. Because the liquid
discharge is gravity flow, consideration should be given to the fall and length of this line
to avoid plugging from solids settling.
SOLID DISCHARGE
The outlet for solids discharge is 40" (1020mm) x 18 1/2" (474mm).

If the centrifuge cannot be located over the proper disposal area a slide may be
attached to the solids outlet to route solids to a disposal area. Since these solids will be
sticky, the slide must be set at a steep angle to prevent a solids build-up.
•Closing cover (V1): at the top of the unit there is a cover that protects the rotating
members of the centrifuge
•Liquid outlet (V2): 219.1mm outlet diameter (tube made of inox AISI 304- thickness of
6 mm)- dimension base 1020x327mm) is used to discharge the separated liquid (
picture below shows the 3 off liquid outlets employed to avoid possible overflowing).
•Solid outlet (V3): this outlet (dimension1020x474mm- high of 505mm) is used to
discharge the separated solids. The operator must avoid that the discharged product
piles up underneath the machine.
•Clamps (V4): opening the cover let you visually check the internal parts of the
centrifuge. During the operation these cover must be closed and held in the blocked
position by 12 clamps.
The picture below shows how the vessel is assembled.
Fig. 2.12 -

V2: 3 off liquid outlets (219.1mm as outlet diameter) are used to discharge liquid and
avoid overflowing.
Fig. 2.13 -
2.2.7 SUPPLY PIPE

Mud is introduced into the centrifuge through the feed tube. This is a stainless steel
tube (AISI 304) approximately 2"1/2 as outlet diameter and 62" long (1573mm). It
extends into the bowl and conveyor through the hollow shaft on the conical end of the
bowl. Mud is pumped into the tube by the feed pump. The mud leaves the feed tube
and enters the bowl through a slot in the conveyor.
This slot in the conveyor extends approximately the length if the conical section: the
picture shows the assembled structure.
Fig. 2.14 -
2.2.8 BELT GUARDS

The belt guards on the CD600NA centrifuge are made to limiting the access to belts,
torque limiting coupling, secondary engine and feeding side.
The guards may be completely removed for repairs.
Fig. 2.15 - Carter of secondary engine
Fig. 2.16 -
Fig. 2.17 - Pulley Carter

Fig. 2.18 - Secondary motorization carter
2.3 BOWL AND CONVEYOR SPEED

The CD 600 Centrifuge is operated between 0 and 2800 RPM depending on the
application. The conveyor rotates at less speed than the bowl in the same direction.
The 600 Centrifuge operates at all times with the bowl and conveyor turning in the
same direction and the conveyor turning slower than the bowl. The main drive motor
should be wired so that the bowl always turns ANTI-clockwise when viewed from the
feed tube end.
The small sunwheel in the gear box is used to vary the differential speed between the
bowl and conveyor. If the sunwheel is "fixed", that is, not rotated by the back drive
motor, the differential will equal the bowl RPM divided by the gear box ratio (87:1). If it
turns in the same direction as the bowl, the differential will be less than when it is fixed.
If it turns in the opposite direction as the bowl, the differential will be greater than when
it's fixed.
WARNING
LIMITS. THIS COULD CAUSE THE MACHINE TO DESTROY ITSELF POSSIBLY
CAUSING INJURY DO NOT ATTEMPT TO OPERATE CD 600 CENTRIFUGE AT
BOWL SPEEDS ABOVE 2800 RPM'S. SPEEDS ABOVE 2800 RPM'S WILL EXCEED
THE DESIGN SAFETY
2.4 Electric package

2.4.1 Main electric drive unit

The main drive unit transmits the motion to the bowl.
The motion to the rotating parts of the machine is transmitted by special V-belts XPB
3200
supplied with the machine.
The three-phase electric motor is not part of the supply. It’s up to the installer to

equip the machine with a motor with a maximum power of 95 kW.

MAIN DRIVE TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRIC MOTOR
POWER:93,25Kw/125//100 H.P.
VOLTS: 460//380
AMPS: 143//138
Rpm: 1780/1475 Rpm

Frequency: 60Hz CLASS B
Frame: 444T
TRANSMISSION RATIO / 1 to 43
Driving pulley diameter mm 400
Driven pulley diameter mm 280
Fig. 2.19 - Main electric motor
2.4.2 Electric back motor drive unit

The back drive unit transmits the motion to the auger of the machine.
The motion to the rotating parts of the machine is transmitted by special belt HTD 14M
2590 055.
The three-phase electric motor is not part of the supply. It’s up to the installer to
equip the machine with a motor with a maximum power of 30 kW.
The machine comes standard with two different types of driving pulleys so the user can
change the transmission ratio.
BACK DRIVE MOTOR TECHNICAL DATA
ELECTRIC MOTOR
POWER:29,84Kw/40//30 H.P.
VOLTS: 230//460
AMPS: 94/47//86/43
Rpm: 1775//1475 Rpm

Frequency: 60Hz CLASS B
Frame 324T
TRANSMISSION RATIO / 1 to 2.23

Driving pulley diameter mm 160
Driven pulley diameter mm 356
Fig. 2.20 - Electric back motor drive unit
2.4.3 Mobile control panel
Fig. 2.21 - Technical data label position

As the picture above shows, the mobile electric panel holds a label on which all
technical data are written.
TECHNICAL DATA
EEx Combi Panel-TYPE 07-3702-CE0032- Ex-protection Type II2G EEX PII T4
Max Voltage: 690 V
Max Heat Dissipation: 1000W
Volume of Panel:164 litres

Min Purge gas flow: 14000Litre/h

Min pre pressure: 2 bar overpressure
Min purge time: 48min 00secs
Min overpressure: 1mbar
Max overpressure: 15 mbar
Max leakage flow: 10 Litre/min
Prod date/Prod id
Max Sorrounding: Temp -20°C up to +40°C
Selector Data
CCF16G-MOD KU1
Amax:630 A
Voltage: 440 Vmax
Fig. 2.22 -
Inv 13 controls electric main motor which transmits motion to the bowl: bowl speed can
be adjusted from 1200 rpm to 2800 rpm.
TECHNICAL DATA INV 13
VOLTAGE:400V
POWER:110 Kw
MODEL: C IMR-F7Z4 110-SPEC 41100B
Inv 15 controls electric back motor which transmits motion to the screw conveyor:
conveyor speed can be adjusted from 500 rpm to 1200 rpm.
VOLTAGE:400V
POWER:30 Kw
MODEL: C IMR-F7Z4 030-SPEC 40300A
Inv 17 controls MONO PUMP.

VOLTAGE:400V
POWER:15 Kw
MODEL: C IMR-F7Z4 015-SPEC 40151B

2.4.4 Lubricating oil tank for bearings
Fig. 2.23 - Lubricating oil tank

Oil tank can contain 40 liters for the bearing lubricating oil: a independent hydraulic
circuit allows the oil to move around from the lubricating oil tank through a pump to both
bearings and from the discharge-line of the bearings to come back to the reservoir. As
shown in the picture the inlet-circuit is provided sequentially by a pressure gauge, a oil
filter and a flow-meter.
A level gauge is fitted on the oil lubrication tank to visualize the oil level.
A hydraulic circuit allows the oil to move through a coil, positioned below the tank top,
which enables lubrication oil heating. A temperature sensors, fitted on each housing
bearings brackets, has been set in a working range -30°C +200°C: Temperature above
100°C is signaled by an alarm connected to the PLC.
Material: Stainless steel.

Technical Data for “EUROMOTORI” lubricating oil tank motor:
Type ASA 71B-4
CESI 02 ATEX 059
A: 1,9/1,1°
Power: 0,37kW
Voltage: 254//440 V
Rpm: 1680
Technical Data CD600 /Report on design of trasmission belt on primary

engine:
Nominal power of the ELECTRIC ENGINE Pn: 125CV=91,91 kW
Reduction gear:SUMITOMO ZSPN 621-190-87
Reducer reduction ratio:87 : 1
Pitch diameter of engine pulley D: 400mm

Transmission Ratio RT: 1,43
Pitch diameter of bowl pulley d: 280mm
RPM of engine shaft n1: 1780rpm (60 Hz)
Environmental operating conditions

The machine is designed to be installed and work under the following conditions:
•Pressure range- (altitude) sea level.- below 1000 m on the sea level;
•Temperature range - -20°C to + 55°C (operating range) Electrical and mechanical
equipment should be rated to operated under these conditions. For cold climates, the
oil tank have to be provided by a heating system for increase the oil temperature, this
oil could be utilized for increase temperature of the bearings and the touch screen.
WARNING
If the temperature drops below 0 °C and the machine is stopped, the processed
product could solidify rapidly and block the rotating parts of the machine. With
temperatures below 0°C, we recommend using the machine without stops.
•Noise Level- Noise level must not exceed 85dBA, and the max exposure time at 85
dBA is 8 hours.
•Weather Conditions- Unit may be run in all weather conditions, In case of high
temperature the oil tank reservoirs should be protected from direct rays sun.
•Corrosion- all the part in contact with the mud are in stainless still, need to be avoid to
wash the machine by sea water. The cables and hoses must be oil resistant. The parts
not protected by paint must be in stainless still AISI 316.
•in the absence of internal pressure or vacuum.
•Vibration – Minimum vibration must be obtained with very accurate balancing of the
bowl and conveyor shock adsorbed have to utilized from the frame’s centrifuge and the
support.
•Type of labour or person who will use the centrifuge- The unit will be operated by
fully trained personnel and can be operated by one man per shift during normal
operation. The machine must be provided by sensors and software for self control and
operate without a continuous supervision. Times of maintenance and cleaning may
require increased personnel, including qualified electrician.
Limitations on the intended operating environment:
The installation of the equipment is not allowed in dangerous zones classed as “Zone
0” according to EN 50014.
Screw conveyors (valid only for group II) can be installed in areas corresponding to
following classification: zone 1 / category 2, zone 2 / category 3;
Atmosphere: G (explosive atmosphere due to the presence of gases).
WARNING
Before operating the machine, the user must verify that the plant of which the
machine is part, has been equipped suitably to avoid the risk of explosions.
Before putting the machine into operation, fill in the “document on the protection
against explosions” as required by ATEX 94/9/EC Directive.
The machine must be installed so it does not interfere with any other fixed or moving
machinery.
Additionally, it must be installed leaving an adequate space all around for assembling,
dismantling, servicing and calibrating the machine as well as any equipment nearby.
Lighting
The workplaces must be well lit.

The illumination must allow for the safe execution of the installation and maintenance
operations envisaged in this manual.
If the use of portable lamps or equivalent lighting devices is necessary for carrying out
some operations, these auxiliary devices must not be a source of risk.
Envisaged use
The machine is designed and manufactured for handling oil-based drilling mud at
ambient temperature according to the provisions of Directive ATEX 94/9/EC.
We indicate below the characteristics of the product that can be handled.
Type of treated product Oil-based drilling mud

Specific weight kg/m3 < 2200
Max temperature of the treated product °C 95 °C
pH >4 ; <12
The machine has been designed to work with the frame in the horizontal position as
shown in the picture below.
Fig. 2.24 - View of the machine in working position
Improper use
The machine must not be used to treat foodstuffs.

The machine must not be used to treat explosive products.
The machine must not be used to treat products with other characteristics than those
indicated in the sheet above.


ENERAL SAFET INFORMATION 3
3 General safety information
3.1 General information on safety

The operator must have all the suitable requisites for transporting, installing, using and
servicing this machine.
Not observing these safety precautions can result in injury, damage to the equipment or
a low efficiency of the same.
The Mv-Swaco CD600 Centrifuge is designed and manufactured to work safely
under the conditions described in this manual. This large high speed rotating machine
requires care and understanding for maximum safety. Unsafe practices in maintenance
and operation will cause conditions which are hazardous to both maintenance and
operation will cause conditions which are hazardous to both personnel and property.
The following general precautions should be strictly followed to avoid damage to
property and/or injury or death to personnel.
•Do not allow personnel to maintain, install or operate the Mv-Swaco CD 600
Centrifuge until they have read this manual and understood safety requirements.
•Do not operate the centrifuge until it is properly mounted.
•Do not operate the centrifuge if the machine is not completely and correctly
assembled.
•Do not inactivate the centrifuge for any extended period of time without inactivating the
electrical circuit to the motors.
•Be sure wiring is connected according to wiring plate on motors.
•Do not operate the machine unless the cover is closed and the clamping devices are
tightened.
•Do not use inlet connections as supports for feed hoses.
•Do not operate the centrifuge if unusual noise or vibration exists.
•Do not attempt to repair the centrifuge until the switch box is locked in the OFF position
or has had the breakers locked open.
•Do not attempt to assemble or dissemble the centrifuge if the bowl is rotating.
•Do not operate the CD600 Centrifuge until start-up and shut-down procedures are
understood.
•Do not switch off the main breaker when shutting down the centrifuge.
3.2 Safety criteria

3 ENERAL SAFET INFORMATION
3.2.1 Safety criteria recommended for handling

The operations of handling are the sole competence of the personnel trained to do this
job.
Strictly obey the instructions provided and avoid operations that may result in damage
to the machine.
Before handling the machine, make sure that nobody is in the range of action of the
manoeuvre.
Use only the lifting and transportation equipment indicated in this manual.
Avoid abrupt movements when the machine is raised; use the anchoring points
recommended for handling and transportation.
3.2.2 Safety criteria recommended for use
The machine is supplied by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. for the conditions of use and the
operation envisaged.
However, during work, we recommend adopting a safe, alert and responsible conduct,
for the highest standards of safety of the machine.
To work in the full respect of the safety regulations operators should wear regulation
protective clothing (safety shoes, protective goggles, gloves and a helmet), and check
that this equipment is always in an efficient working order.
Do not put your weight or rest on the machine, climb on the machine and rest objects
on the machine.
Do not wear clothes that could get caught (ties, bracelets, necklaces).
Do not use the machine while taking medicines or after having drunk alcoholic drinks
which can slow down your reaction times.
Before starting the machine, check the safety systems every time.
The operator must have all the suitable requisites for transporting, installing, using and
servicing this machine.
The operator must never be distracted or disturbed during the operating cycle of the
machine.
The fixed or mobile guards of the machine must always be installed and kept in efficient
working order.
The user must always verify the perfect functioning of the emergency controls
activating the same before starting the production cycle.
Do not put your hands or other parts of your body near or inside moving parts of the
machine, live parts or inside the control panel.
Do not alter the controller program parameters, attempting to obtain a performance
from the machine different from that envisaged by design and testing.
Arrange the material to be used rationally so that it doesn't get in the way during the
work cycle.
The workplace must be well lit and kept constantly clean.
The machine can be installed in places where there may be a saturation of gases from
other machinery..
At the end of any work cycle, the main switch shall be turned to 0 (zero) OFF and
locked.
3.2.3 Safety criteria recommended for maintenance
Before starting any maintenance job on the machine, disconnect the machine from the
main electrical power supply operating the main switch on the electrical cabinet and the
main switch of the building, and close the valve of the pneumatic supply.

Only professional qualified personnel can do interventions on the electrical system.
3.3 Safety devices
WARNING
Deactivating or tampering with the safety devices installed on the machine is
absolutely forbidden.
Mantovani Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability for damage to persons animals or
things caused by the deactivation or tampering with the safety devices of the
machine.
WARNING
It is the user s responsibility to keep the safety devices in efficient working order.
3.3.1 Safety standards adopted for the different units of the machine.
Applicable Standards or Documents to

Component Design Re uirements
meet Design Re uirements
Machinery Directive EN ISO 12100

98/37/EC UNI EN 294
FRAME
UNI EN 1127.1
EN 13463-5 2001 UNI EN 1050/96
EN 50014/97
Machinery Directive 98/
MAIN DRIVE EN 50018/00
37/EC Directive
Electrical MOTOR EN 50019/00
Directive 94/9/CE (Atex)
EN 50281-1-1/98
EN 50014/97
Machinery Directive 98/
BACK DRIVE EN 50018/00
37/EC Directive
Electrical MOTOR EN 50019/00
Directive 94/9/CE (Atex)
EN 50281-1-1/98

Applicable Standards or Documents to

Component Design Re uirements
meet Design Re uirements
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
Machiney Directive UNI EN 1127.1
VESSEL assembly 98/37/EC UNI EN 1050/96
EN 13463-5 2001 UNI EN 9531
UNI EN 12547/99
EN 1088
EN ISO 12100
UNI EN 294
Machiney Directive UNI EN 1127.1
ROTATING assembly 98/37/EC UNI EN 1050/96
EN 13463-5 2001 UNI EN 349
UNI EN 953
UNI EN 12547/99
The centrifuge rotating assembly consist of the bowl, the conveyor and the cyclo gear
box. All these parts are described above.
INFORMATION
The activation of the safety devices doesn t cause the immediate stop of the moving
parts of the machine.
INFORMATION
If a safety device activates find and eliminate the relevant cause before restarting the
machine.
INFORMATION
Use the emergency devices only if a real hazard exists! For the normal stop of the
machine, follow the standard instructions.
3.4 SAFETY COMPONENTS
3.4.1 Accelerometer
Accelerometer in fixed on the frame containing the rotating group as shown in the
picture below:
(for more information on accelerometer settings see PLC section).

Fig. 3.1 - Accelerometer

During normal operation the torque limiter (Compomac 45 size) transmits the motion
from the shaft gear box to the screw conveyor shaft. In case of overload, when the
torque demand exceeds the preset value (350 Nm), the torque limiter activates
mechanically, and the internal rotor and the main rotor start rotating at the same speed.
To avoid a “idle” running of the drive unit after the activation of the torque limiter, there’s
also a micro switch to stop the machine.
To restore normal operation after the activation of the torque limiter, the device must be
reset mechanically (for more information, consult the relevant manual enclosed).
Fig. 3.2 - Tor ue limiter - Compomac

Fig. 3.3 - Tor ue limiter - Microswitch
3.4.2 Centrifuge cover micro switch

A Micro-switch is installed at the back of the two side covers.
This micro-switch prevents the machine from starting if the covers are open or
dismantled.
Fig. 3.4 - Cover - Micro switch
3.4.3 Main electric motor belt guards

Main electric motor belt guards is equipped with a micro-switch.
The signal transmitted from this micro-switch must avoid any machine start-up if the
guard is removed or the door is open.

Fig. 3.5 - Main electric motor belt guards Micro-Switch
3.4.4 Back electric motor belt guards micro switch

Under the back drive support there is a micro-switch.
The signal transmitted from this micro-switch must avoid any machine start-up if the
guard is removed or the door is open.
If the cover of the rotating assembly or the back electric motor assembly guard is
opened, it will active the switches and begins the emergency stop of the main electric
motor.
Fig. 3.6 - Back electric motor belt guards Micro-Switch

3.4.5 Output shaft speed sensor bowl

The speed sensor of the output shaft detects the speed of the bowl.

WARNING
The speed of the moving gears of the machine must be below 2800 revs/min.
3.4.6 Secondary shaft speed and rotation direction sensor screw conveyor
The shaft sensors detect the speed and the rotation direction of the screw conveyor
WARNING
The speed of the moving gears of the machine must be below 2800 revs/min.
3.4.7 Lubricating oil temperature sensor

A Lubricating Temperature Oil sensor is fitted on each housing bearings bracket and
connected to the heater coil positioned below lubricating oil tank cover. The sensor has
been set in a Temperature range from -30°C to 200°C. An alarm signals maximum
Temperature value allowed at 100°C: the achievement of this limit value stop the
machine. (For details see PLC section).
Fig. 3.7 - Lubricating il Temperature Sensor

Lubricating Oil Temperature sensor cuts off the running heater when oil Temperature
rises up; opposite, when Lubricating Oil Temperature decreases, the sensor enables
the resistance ignition and stops the working device.
3.4.8 Position of the fi ed and moving guards

The moving gears inside the machine are protected from accidental contacts by a
number of bolted guards which can only be removed with a spanner.

WARNING
Don t operate the machine with the fixed guards removed, damaged or partially
mounted. The use of the machine without fixed guards relieves the manufacturer
from any and all responsibility for damage to persons or property.
3.4. Centrifuge covers

At the top of the machine, there is a cover that protect the rotating parts of the
centrifuge.
At the back, the side covers have a micro-switch.
Opening the cover lets you visually check the external parts of the centrifuge.
WARNING
During operation, this cover must be closed and held in the blocked position by
the proper bolts.
Fig. 3.8 - il temperature sensor
3.4.10 Main electric motor belt guard

Guard is installed to avoid any voluntary or accidental contacts of objects or parts of the
body with the moving gears of the main drive.
This cover has hinges at the front top and is blocked with screws at the back.
A micro-switch is located on this guard.
During operation, the cover must remain closed
3.4.11 Back drive guard

Guard is installed to avoid any voluntary or accidental contacts of objects or parts of the
body with the moving gears of the auxiliary drive.

This cover is bolted to the frame. During operation the cover and the door must remain
closed
3.4.12 Residual risks

For design and operation reasons, some zones of the machine could not be fitted with
guards to avoid damage.
If the products are dangerous, harmful by inhalation or in case of contact, flammable,
explosive or harmful to the health because of their bacteriological or viral charge, the
designer or the installer must equip the machine with suitable safety devices
3.4.13 Solids outlet one
WARNING
Do not put ob ects or parts of your body in the vicinity of the solids outlet
WARNING
It is the installer s responsibility to place suitable guards at the product outlet to
avoid any voluntary or accidental introduction of ob ects or parts of the body.
WARNING
The operator must avoid that the discharged product piles up underneath the
machine.
3.4.14 Li uid outlet one
WARNING
The liquid outlet port must be connected to the liquid recovery system with a
pipe. Do not switch on the machine if this connection hasn t been made.
3.4.15 Work ones

We list below the areas in which the authorised operators and technicians can perform
their task in accordance with the instructions and information provided by the
manufacturer.
Work and control zone
It is the area, near the mobile electrical panel, where the operator can operate the
machine and check its operation.
Dangerous one:
A dangerous zone is a zone inside or near the machine where the presence of a person
constitutes a risk for the safety and health of the same person.
Danger zones are the product inlet and outlet.

WARNING
Nobody can enter a dangerous zone during the machine operation. Service technicians
can work around or inside the machine only after having placed the line and the
machine in “Maintenance status”.
We recommend fixing yellow adhesive strips on the floor, around the perimeter zone of
the machine so that the dangerous zone is clearly identified.
The operator must remain outside this delimited area.
3.4.16 Position of the safety decals on the machine
A
B A
A
A
D
A
E A
A
E
A
B
A
B
A
E
A
A
D
A
A
E
A
C A
E A
D
WARNING:
before start remove yellow wedges
protecting bearing during transport


INSTR CTION FOR INSTALLATION 4
4 Instruction for installation
4.1 Instruction for installation

Mantovani & Vicentini has field service engineers who can supervise and assist the
user during the machine installation and commissioning. For more information, contact
Mantovani & Vicentini.
WARNING
Hoist, handle and move the machine keeping the safety supports envisaged by
the manufacturer installed for the removal of the acking bolts, please refer to .
Before operating the machine, take out the acking bolts used during transport.
4.2 LIFTING
WARNING
Lifting and moving the machine using devices which aren t adequate for
supporting its weight with a wide margin of safety is expressly forbidden.
Lifting operations must be carried out by specialised personnel using the lifting points
envisaged by the manufacturer and indicated by the relevant plate.
•Before proceeding with lifting, check that no one and nothing is in the range of action
of the manoeuvre.
•Never use chains connected together with bolts.
•Never use damaged ropes.
•The safety stop of the hook must always return to the initial position with the ropes in it.
•Make sure that the ropes are always in an excellent state of repair.
•Do not work near electric lines.
•Avoid abrupt stops in the movements with a hanging load, especially when lowering
the load. Do not drag the machine on the ground.
•The angle between the ropes must be less than 60°
WARNING
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. is not responsible for any damage to persons or
things caused by the non-observance of the above conditions.
WARNING
Before lifting and moving the different parts, ALWA S make sure the parts are
stable and the position of the anchoring points is not wrong. For this check, raise
the load some centimetres above the ground and check its stability on the lifting
equipment.

INSTRUCTION FOR INSTALLATION 4
Correct lifting (left) - Wrong lifting (right)
WARNING
The lifting points envisaged on the machine are designed to lift ONLY the
CENTRIFUGE ASSEMBLY (left). It’s strictly forbidden to carry out lifting
operation with any other skid or connections installed (right) on the
CENTRIFUGE
file: lifting warning.fm - ver. November 12, 2009 3:51 pm47
Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 47A

4 INSTR CTION FOR INSTALLATION
WARNING
Ad ust, if necessary, the position of the anchoring points.
4.3 Transportation
The carrier must be clearly informed on the type of machine to transport and therefore
on all of its characteristics of weight and mass; furthermore the carrier must carefully
read this chapter.
During transportation, machines with or without packaging must be protected from
atmospheric agents; they must not be overturned or inclined, but must always remain in
a horizontal position.
Furthermore they must be protected from any knocks.
WARNING
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. accepts no liability for damage to persons or property
during the transportation of the machine.
4.4 What to do at the machine delivery

Check that the contents of the package correspond to the packing list.
If there are any differences, please contact the Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. customer
service quoting the number of the Packing list and indicating any missing items within
one week of the date of delivery.
If the machine has been damaged in any way during transportation, contact the
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. customer service quoting the number of the Packing list and
indicating the damage noticed within one week of the date of delivery. Also take some
detailed photos of the damage and send them to the manufacturer.
4.5 Positioning
4.5.1 Physical characteristics of the installation area

Please read CHAPTER 2 “Enviromental operating conditions”
WARNING
The machine should be positioned by Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. or by personnel
authorised to do so by the same.

Space re uired
After having considered the overall dimensions of the machine, make sure that the
space around the machine is sufficient to meet the regulations, so that the qualified
personnel can work in safe conditions.

The machine must be positioned and assembled in an area reserved for the machine;
this area must be off-limits to non-authorised personnel.
WARNING
Carefully check that the one where the machine will be installed meets the
conditions described, to avoid dangerous situations.
4.6 Installation
Do not operate the machine before the line of which it is part has been declared
conform to the provisions of the Machinery Directive (94/9/EC and following
amendments). It is the installer’s responsibility to prepare and install any devices and
guards necessary to avoid damage to persons or things in the case of breakages and
subsequent falls of parts of the machine. The machine should be assembled by
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. or by personnel authorised to do so by the same.
4.6.1 Choice of the installation site and anchoring to the floor

The centrifuge is shipped pre-assembled and ready for installation. We recommend
installing the machine on a flat, solid floor adequate to withstand the static and dynamic
loads of the machine, as well as the static and dynamic loads of the fed material. The
installation on an inadequate floor or the wrong anchoring of the machine to the same
may affect operation and cause dangers. Check the site with attention before
installation and position the machine leaving an adequate space to the four sides to
make it easier to access to the machine for maintenance. Although the centrifuge
requires very little space, adequate working space should be provided all around for
carrying out maintenance operations. The CD 600 must be mounted above the
ground to facilitate solid removal. The solids outlet should be located above the
disposal area or where the solids may be easily moved to the proper disposal location.
A slide attached from the solid outlet may be necessary to route solids to a disposal
area. The slide should be set at a steep angle to prevent a solid buildup.
In the normal configuration the centrifuge has an electrical auger to route the solids as
a slide.
4.6.1.1 Map of the anchoring points on the floor


Fig. 4.1 - Map of anchoring points
4.6.2 Removing the safety supports used during transport

For transportation the manufacturer puts normally some supports for the bearings to
avoid the same are loaded by the static weight of the machine during transportation.
These bolts can only be taken out when the machine has been secured to the floor of
the installation site.

4.6.2.1 Removing the safety support reduction gear side
To remove the safety support from the reduction gear side, follow the instructions
below:
• Remove the reduction gear and torque limiter guard (G).
MW008404
Fig. 4.2 - emoving the safety support - reduction gear side
• Loosen and drive out the spring preload nut (A).
A
MW008405

• Loosen and drive out the preload nut (A), washer (B) and spring (C).

A
MW008406

• Remove wedge (D).
MW008407
• Drive out the tie-rod complete with wedge (E).

MW008408

• Remove the supporting plate (F).
MW008409
• Refit the reduction gear and torque limiter guard (G).


MW008410
4.6.2.2 Removing the safety support drive side

• Open the main drive guard (G).
MW008411
Fig. 4.9 - emoving the safety support - drive side
• Loosen and drive out the spring preload nut (A).


A
MW008412

• Loosen and drive out the preload nut (A), and remove washer (B) and spring (C).
MW008413
• Remove wedge (D).


MW008414

• Drive out the tie-rod complete with wedge (E).
MW008415
• Undo the screws (H) that fix flange (F) of the pulley support.

MW008416

• Screw down 2 screws with an adequate diameter on the holes (L).
• Remove the supporting flange (F).
MW008417
• Close the main drive guard (G).


MW008418
4.6.3 Assembling the safety supports for transportation

The pillow block bearings are subject to damage from shock and vibration during
transportation and handling. To prevent this, the pillow block bearing should be
preloaded using the wedge blocks.
4.6.3.1 Assembling the safety support reduction gear side

• Remove the reduction gear and torque limiter guard (G).
MW008419
Fig. 4.17 - Assembling the safety support - reduction gear side
• Install the supporting plate (F).

MW008420

• Place the tie-rod complete with wedge (E) on the supporting plate.
MW008421

• Install the second wedge (D) and place it as shown.

MW008422

• Insert spring (C), washer (B) and the preload (A) in the tie-rod.
A
MW008423
• Tighten down the preload nut (A).

MW008424

• Refit the reduction gear and torque limiter guard (G).
MW008425

4.6.3.2 Assembling the safety support drive side

• Open the main drive guard (G).

MW008426
Fig. 4.24 - Assembling the safety support - drive side

• Install the supporting flange (F).
MW008427
• Screw down the screws (H) that fix the flange (F) of the pulley support.

MW008428

• Place the tie-rod complete with wedge (E) under the flange.
MW008429
• Install the second wedge (D) placing it as shown.


MW008430

• Insert spring (C), washer (B) and the preload nut (A) in the tie-rod.
MW008431
• Tighten down the preload nut (A).


A
MW008432

• Close the main drive protection cover (G).
MW008433
4.6.4 Assembling the feed pipe unit

The feed pipe must be assembled by positioning the support between the square stops
envisaged by the manufacturer.
The feed pipe must be fixed to the supporting frame with 6 hexagonal socket set
screws (M10 X 35 mm) supplied with the machine.
The pipe connected to the feeding flange (6”) must be of flexible type. If a rigid pipe is
used, a special elastic joint must be placed between the feeding flange and the pipe to
damp vibrations.
4.6.5 Assembling the motors

The motors must be placed on the special supporting plates.

Once they have been installed, the installer should check the correct parallelism
between input shaft and secondary shaft.
4.6.6 Procedure to remove/fit transport support
Fig. 4.32 -
Fig. 4.33 -
Pictures above show respectively the location of the lower and upper yellow transport
supports.
The lower support transport in fixed to the lower casing with M14x40; another screw
joints the two support.

Fig. 4.34 -
Fig. 4.35 -
Screw a third screw as shown above. Two supports are used to reduce vibrations and
bending during transport.
4.6.7 Connections
4.6.7.1 Electrical connections

The electrical connections must be done in accordance with the provisions of standards
CEI-EN60204-1 and 392/89 and following modifications (Directive Machine 98/37).
The machine conforms standard ATEX 94/9/EC; the optional electrical board conforms
standard ATEX 94/9/EC. If the machine - electrical board assembly must comply with
this standard, the electrical connections must be done in accordance with the
provisions if the same.
The machine should be connected to the electrical power supply by a specialised and
expert industrial electrician.
Do not carry out any interventions that can alter circuits, settings, components etc.
Failure to comply with this condition is regarded as a tampering with the supplied items.
WARNING
Check the earth connections of the machine, the electrical board and the
supporting skid.
Also check that the earth leads connecting the different members of the machine
are properly connected and haven t suffered from damage during handling.
WARNING
The connection of the earth line of the machine is compulsory.
After installation, check that the rotation direction matches the one indicated in the data
plates installed on the machine.

CONTROLS AND DEVICES 5
5 Controls and devices
5.1 Controls and devices
WARNING
The electrical installer charged with the installation of the electrical board must
take into account the output signals transmitted by the sensors installed on the
machine.
Fig. 5.1 - Bowl rotating vs. tension fre uency

Motors poles 4 diameter of the driving pulley: 160 mm
diameter of the driven pulley: 356 mm

5 CONTROLS AND DEVICES
Fig. 5.2 - ifferential speed vs. primary and secondary rotation speed
bowl rotation speed

H ratio DPMP/DPP GMP rpm
rpm
60 1.43 1750 2503
Motors poles 4 diameter of the pulley primary motor: 400 mm

bowl: 280 mm

OPERATIONS PRIOR TO SE 6
6 Operations prior to use
6.1 Operations prior to use

Before starting the production cycle, check that the machine has been installed
correctly in accordance with the indications in this manual.
Before starting the machine, make sure there are no foreign matters or solid product
inside.
The machine must always be started without any load. It should run for about 20
minutes to reach the recommended working speed before starting feeding the material.
After operation, we recommend running the machine without load for some fifteen
minutes to be sure that any residual material is discharged.
If a washing pipe is fitted, we recommend pouring an adequate washing fluid inside the
centrifuge to speed up the cleaning of the internal rotors.
Before restarting the machine, always check that there is no residual product inside the
same.
Starting the machine under load or in presence of solid matters can result in serious
damage to the machine and risks for the user.
6.1.1 Checks and operations before starting the machine

Before attempting to start the machine, even without load, have the machine checked
by the MANTOVANI & VICENTINI engineer for proper installation.
Every MANTOVANI & VICENTINI centrifuge is tested before shipment. However, we
recommend taking some precautionary measures to avoid damage or dangers due to a
wrong installation.
Before placing the machine into service:
Check the rotation direction.

Check that the moving gears rotate freely: the motor pulleys must run freely if hand-
operated.Let the machine run for about 20 minutes and do the preliminary checks
mentioned above, then, with the machine running at max speed, proceed with filling.
6.2 Checking the protection devices

Check that the operation of the emergency stop buttons, located on the machine and
the electrical board, brings the machine to a stop.
Check that the fixed and mobile guards of the machine are placed correctly.

6 OPERATIONS PRIOR TO SE

SE OF THE MACHINE 7
7 Use of the machine
7.1 General warnings

The machine, after being installed by qualified technicians (in accordance with the
indications in the previous chapters), can now start the normal production cycle under
the supervision of the personnel responsible for production with precise knowledge of
the way to run the machine and with the protective covers closed and in efficient
working order.
The machine must be run by trained operators who have carefully read and fully
understood the present instructions.
The operators must also be aware of the safety measures that apply to the machine
and the residual risks present.
If, once started, the machine produces excess noise or vibrations, stop it immediately
and address to your nearest Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. service centre.
WARNING
In case of unknown or serious anomalies, stop the machine immediately and
contact your qualified technicians or your nearest Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.
service centre.
WARNING
Before starting the machine, make sure that the preliminary checks and
operations have been carried out.
7.2 Troubleshooting
For detailed information see annex G “troubleshooting”

7 SE OF THE MACHINE

MAINTENANCE 8
8 Maintenance
8.1 Warnings for carrying out maintenance correctly

The safety of the machine and the operators also depends on the maintenance carried
out regularly in accordance with the indications of the manufacturer.
The correct preventive maintenance requires constant attention and the continuous
surveillance of the machine. Verify the cause of any anomalies such as excessive
noise, overheating and leaking fluids, etc. in good time and find the solution for the
problem.
The routine and maintenance must only be done by expert personnel, in other words
qualified technicians, on the basis of the criteria indicated in the introduction of the
manual.
If external operators work on the machine, these must guarantee the same
performance as the qualified technicians of the factory and must be put in conditions to
operate safely.
The maintenance technicians must:
1) Respect the limits of their competence (mechanical, electrical, etc.).

2) Within their competence, respect the procedures in the manual and the relevant
warnings.
3) Respect the times and the frequencies indicated in the manual.
4) Only use original spare parts, tools suitable for the job and in good conditions.
5) Respect the schedule of the interventions indicated in the manual for preventive and
periodic maintenance; the period (indicated in time or in work cycles) between one
intervention and the next should be understood as the maximum period which shouldn't
be exceeded. If necessary this period can be reduced.
6) If in doubt, ask the manufacturer
To carry out the maintenance in the right way, refer to the documents supplied also as
enclosures.
WARNING
After any dismantling check that the earth leads that connect the different parts
of the machine are correctly connected and in good condition.
INFORMATION
o not disperse lubricant oils in the environment Contact firms specialized in the
disposal of these oils. All the maintenance obs must only be carried out with the
machine turned off and with the electrical and pneumatic power supplies deactivated.
Mantovani Vicentini S.r.l. is not responsible for damage of any kind caused by the
lack of maintenance or irrational maintenance done of the machine.
WARNING
Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l. is not responsible for damage of any kind caused by
not replacing worn parts or by replacing parts with non-original spare parts.
Replacing worn parts with non-original spare parts makes any kind of guarantee
on the machine void.

8 MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Note the following general warnings: RIS OF ELECTROC TION due to direct
contact with the power terminals of the machine and in the unction boxes of the
electrical system the danger is indicated by signs with the relevant triangle on a
yellow background .
WARNING
Do not open boards, terminal boards and unction boxes when the plant is
supplied with power.
WARNING
DON T do any maintenance or lubrication work on moving parts of the machine.
WARNING
IF O HAVE TO WOR on heated parts always wait for them to cool to avoid
burns or scalding.
WARNING
AFTER EVER MAINTENANCE INTERVENTION always reassemble and reactivate
any protection covers and systems that were removed or deactivated during the
ob.
8.2 Preliminary maintenance operations

Some maintenance jobs have to be performed with the machine connected to the
electrical and pneumatic power supplies. In these cases, the service technician must
warn the plant personnel of the ongoing operation.
8.3 Routine maintenance

All rotating parts of the machine are dynamically balanced at factory to keep the
machine running to maximum efficiency.
Maintaining this dynamic balance is vital for a long service life of the machine and to
reduce operating costs. This is even more important in those machines with parts
rotating at high speeds and subjected to wear by the product being processed as no-
one knows how much regular wear will affect the pre-set dynamic balance.
All bolts, nuts and screws on rotating parts should be kept in good condition and in
place. Unbalance can be due to missing parts as well as worn parts.

If a part becomes dynamically unbalanced, this must be re-balanced with the specific
balancing equipment. Static balancing cannot be used as a substitute for dynamic
balancing.

MAINTENANCE 8
8.4 Running in maintenance
The machine is factory-tested before delivery. However, we recommend not operating
the machine to maximum performance during the first time of use.
During the first period of use of the machine, the different parts can settle down.
As a result, the maintenance technician must check that all adjustments done during
the installation phase do not suffer from alteration.
INFORMATION
Provide the maintenance technician with the necessary personal protective e uipment
(mask gloves goggles etc.).
8.5 Daily obs

A complete and regular cleaning of the machine, the accessory parts and the
workplace is advisable to keep the machine safe and working to maximum efficiency.
Regular cleaning and maintenance are fundamental for a proper operation and a long
lifetime of the machine.
After every work shift or daily, do the following operations:
Check that cables, power plugs and the relevant insulation are not damaged.
Check that there is no residual product inside the machine.
Check the current absorption.
Keep the machine clean.
Check and eliminate any leakage/spillage.
JOB INTERVAL WHAT TO DO

Check the belts tension Re-adjust tension
Check the belts for wear Renew
Gearbox Change oil
Re-tighten to recommended
Check bolts for tightening Monthly
tightening torque
Bearing grease 24 hours Put grease anyway
Check hoses leaking Tighten in case of leak
Check blocking marker on
Filter
the filter
Check the auger flights for wear Overhaul the screw conveyor
8.6 Troubleshooting chart see chapter 7

8.7 Belt tensioning

Belt tension should be checked routinely when lubricating bearings. The following
procedure for belt tensioning should be used starting when a new Centrifuge CD 600
is put into service or anytime belts are replaced. It is important that the belts are

8 MAINTENANCE
correctly tensioned. A belt that slips on its pulley is exposed to abnormal wear. If on the
other hand the belts are too tight, this will cause wear on the bearings. Proceed as
follows to get the correct tension:
Collect the belt slack on the upper side. Adjust the pulley center distance by moving the
motor until the belts have a light tension. Rotate the drive parts a few turns by hand.
Adjust the center distance so that all belts are lying well. Start the motor and run for
approximately 10 minutes so that the belts can adapt themselves to the grooves.
Stop the motor and adjust the center distance until all belts are lying evenly and are
properly tightened. (A stretch of 1/2 - 1% of the belt length will not damage the belts.)
New belts should be re-tensioned every two hours during the first day of running. After
this, further tightening may be unnecessary, as the length of the belts remains
practically constant. When changing belts, never force them over the side of the pulley.
Always loosen the motor mount to install them. Over tensioning of belts may cause
premature failure. When one or more of the belts is worn out, put on a COMPLETE set
of new belts. A good way to check belt tension is to strike the belts with a clenched fist.
A slack belt will feel dead under this test, whereas a properly tensioned belt will vibrate
and feel alive. Check the belt tension from time to time.
WARNING
NEVER R N NIT WITH BELT ARD REMOVED AND NEVER CHEC BELT
TENSION WHILE NIT IS R NNIN . S CH NSAFE PRACTICES CAN RES LT IN
INJ R OR DEATH.
The working life and proper functioning of the belts depend to a high degree on how
they are cared for. Oil and grease will soon ruin them. Oily or greasy belts can be
cleaned with a good solvent.
8.8 E traordinary maintenance

Extraordinary maintenance consists in carrying out a series of non-periodic
interventions, which should only be performed when necessary. It also consists in
replacing parts or components of the machines that are excessively worn, in order to
prevent breakage that would cause machine stoppages and as a consequence, also
stoppages of the line.
Extraordinary maintenance is required in case of excess noise or vibration. Should this
be the case, stop the machine immediately and contact the Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.
customer service centre.
INFORMATION
Any e traordinary maintenance must only be done by Mantovani Vicentini S.r.l. or by
personnel authorized by the same.
The manufacturer is not responsible for damage of any kind caused by the lack of
maintenance or irrational maintenance done of the machine.
8. Maintenance of the electrical system

MAINTENANCE 8
INFORMATION
Any maintenance done on the electrical system must be done respecting the
competence described.
The manufacturer declines any responsibility if these instructions are not observed.
WARNING
New components used to replace faulty components, must have the same
technical characteristics and the same performance if these are safety
components they must be certified and belong to the same class as the original
that is being replaced.
Any adjustment of replaced components (for example: calibrating the thermal-magnetic
switches, etc.) must be done using the same values used for the component that is
being replaced.
WARNING
The maintenance technician must not:
--- modify the electrical connections in the boards and on-board the machine
--- modify the wiring in the various points of the machine.
Any modifications made to the machine and complicated repairs must be done in
agreement with the qualified technicians of the manufacturer, who will bring the
relevant documentation up-to-date and send a copy to the user.
8.10 Lubrication
For any further information on the compatibility of the different oils, please refer to the
manuals of the single components. The quantities indicated in this manual, are given
as a mere reference; please refer to tables on the single parts and the instructions in
every manual. Do not mix mineral oils with synthetic oils. Using lubricating oils other
than those recommended affects the operation and lifetime of the components.
8.11 Lubricating the bearings

All bearings installed in the machine are the rolling type with grease forced lubrication.
8.12 Bearings Grease Lubrication
On the machine there are 2 greasing points through which you can lubricate the
machine bearings.

8 MAINTENANCE
All bearings installed in the machine are the rolling type, two of which require grease
forced lubrication: recommended grease LITHOPLEX NILS.
Pos. Description Quantity gr Refilling interval h

A Screw bearings mud side 100 150
B Screw bearings water side 100 150
The pictures below show the lubrication grease points
Fig 8.1 - Position A

Screw Bearings Muds Side: two lubrication points
F
S
Fig 8.1a Gear Box Plug Fig 8.1 - Position B
Screw Bearings Water Side: two lubrication points
WARNING
Before screw bearings water side lubricating is needed to unscrew
gear box plug (refer figure 8.1a)
.
8.13 Oil Lubrication Bearings

Mantovani & Vicentini recommends using oil ATF Dextron III new for main bowl
bearings muds/water side.

MAINTENANCE 8
Strictly obey the change interval of 8000 hours in Temperature working range 50-60°C.
The change interval decreases to 6000 hours for working Temperature higher- above
the average range.
Oil Description:
Aspect Clear liquid

Colour Red
Viscousity at 40 DIN 51562 mm2/s 35.0
Viscousity at 100 DIN 51562 mm2/s 7.6
Viscousity inde 185
Pour point ISO 3016 °C -45
8.14 Lubricating the reduction gear

Regularly check the oil level of the reduction gear.
Consult the instructions provided by the relevant manufacturer (see Annex G).Strictly
obey the change intervals indicated by the manufacturer of the reduction gear.
Mantovani&Vicentini strongly recommends using "Blasia 100" lubricating oil for low
Temperature and "Blasia 320" for higher Temperature.
8.15 Tightening tor ues

Unless otherwise stated, use the tightening torques indicated in the following table.
Table - Tightening torque for screws A2/70
Screw size Tightening torque (Nm)

M6 7
M8 15
M10 35
M12 60
M14 95
M16 150
M18 200
M20 290
M22 400
M24 500
8.16 Recommended spares

For the yearly maintenance of the machine, we recommend keeping at home the spare
parts listed in the relevant section of the spare parts catalogue.

8 MAINTENANCE
8.17 Instructions for repair
8.17.1 Removing the rotating assembly

The following procedure is for the removal of the rotating assembly. Remember the
bearing housings are aligned for each centrifuge frame and should never be
interchanged.
Open the vessel cover.

Remove the following parts:
1) Bolts from bearing housing
2) Belt guards, belts and feed pipe
PROCEDURE
Bowl assembly/disassembly
Screw conveyor assembly water side
Screw conveyor assembly mud side
Screw conveyor disassembly water side
Screw conveyor disassembly mud side

ANNEXES A
Anne es
Anne A
Electric wiring diagram

ANNEXES B
Anne B
Recommended MV
Spare Parts catalogue

DWG DESCRIPTION CODE Q.t
7501 RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST 00R66FCD600
7519 FEED PROTECTING PIPE CD 600 10A55F7519.00 1
7556 SUPPLY PIPE 10A43F7556.00 1
6551 KNIFE CLEANING MUDS SMALL 10A53F6551.00 3
6550 KNIFE CLEANING MUDS 10A53F6550.00 6
ROLLER BEARINGS NU2230C3 (150/270X73) 00A06C007.254 1
ROLLER BEARINGS NUP230 ECJ (150/270X73) 00A06C007.255 1
O-RING 4875 (221.8x3.53) 00A07C002.029 2
O-RING (266.7x2.5) 00A07C002.028 4
O-RING NBR Di=208.9 d=5.34 00A07C007.025 2
O-RING OR 41000 (253.6x3.53) 00A07C007.027 1
O-RING ORM 1700-30 (170x3) 00A07C007.026 6
LIP SEAL 170/200/12 VITON 00A07C001.194 4
BEARING NU226 ECJ 00A06C007.253 2
AXLE ROLLER BEARINGS 29324 (120X210X54) 00A06C007.256 1
O-RING 208 (130.2x5) 00A07C002.030 1
TOOTHED BELT HTD 14M 55 2590 00A04C008.C55 1
BELT XPB 3150 00A04C005.315 8
BEARING TYPE NK 65/35 00A06C025.404 1
7581 TORQUE LIMITER COMPOMAC C45/SPRINGS "L" 10A33C7581.00 1
ELASTIC STOP RING KMA6 M30x1.5 00A06C037.006 1
O-RING OR 3700-167 (177.47x2.62) 00A07C002.046 2
SECURITY RING FOR SHAFT D=180 00A07C502.180 1
P. GAUGE DM63 0-2,5BAR 0/2 RAD. THR SS 00AOL.3400022 1
RESISTANCE FOR HEATER 00A15C099.053 1
ELASTIC RING D.125 00A07C502.134 1
SAFETY SWITCH LS5115 00A16C001.310 2
FILTER CARTIGE FOR MSH050BAG1A10 00A18C012.C10 1
FEY RING ASD 210/8/2.4 00A07C006.001 4
POS DRW.N° DESCRIPTION CODE Q.t
7500_A MACHINERY ASS'Y 00F99F7500.A0
6 7597 MAIN MOTOR GROUP 00A07C502.138 1
5 7568_A SECONDARY MOTORIZAZION GROUP 10A55F7568.0A 1
4 7570_A SECONDARY MOTOR GROUP 00A47C048.100 1
3 7501 CENTRIFUGE ASS'Y 00A47C082.400 1
2 7539 CASINGS GROUP 10A55F570.01 1
1 7508_A FRAME AND COVER GROUP 00A35F7598.A0 1
1
6 7597 MAI
1 5 7568_A SECONDAR
4 7570_A SECON
3 7501 CE
2 7539 C
1 7598_A FRAME
POS DRW. N°
4
6 7597 GRUPP
1 5 7568_A GRUPPO
5
4 6
3

! ""#
$
%
% $
$ & & '
' (
(
&
))% & ) (
* (()

$'( +
$'(+ ,

$'(+ ,
),)%%- ,
,-% $.,/( & !#.
'$ $( . .0) & 0 12
)%%-%/ ,
,$)%%-$')+
,$)%%-$')+(3 (3 ,
$( ,

+ ,
,
)%$&.
$ !! #

"

(()
00%$(+- ,
$) ,
$) , %%%,%$ ,
,,')) , ,

! #
! #
! #
,
,

!
!
#
#

! #

$'(+ ,
$'(+ ,
+ $
$ !4
!4 & #
#-%
-% ( %
%%
%
5
+ $ !4 & #
+/ ,
$'(+ ( ,
( $,%$ ,
,%$ ,
,%$6+ ,
),)) , 5

, ,
%) $( / ,
%)) ,
))%-) )7- ,
$%%,'-7- , ,
%(,%$" ( ,
% $ ,
,%$ ,
+ $ ! #
+ $' ,
$
$

$ $
%(,%$"( ( ,
) $ ,
+ $! #
) ,
) )
)
,%$
,%$ ,
+%7- ,
58912:;<98 =1>29?2:2:;19@@ A;>1 2:;3>12=BA;1C

20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
POS
19
22
37
62
62
65
72
26
25
57
48
68
73
20
43
9
36
49
3
56
8
4
38
6
50
71
71
53
2
39
5
48
68
67
44
27
37
57
68
67
70
69 67 68 66 54 54
55
20
POS DRAW DESCRIPTION CODE Q.t
7536 ACCELERATOR SUPPORT 10A51F7536.00
13 SCREW UNI5931 M8x15 INOX 00A01C032.005 4
12 7552 BOTTOM PLATE 10A51F.7552 1
11 7553 CENTRAL DISK 10A51F7553.00 1
10 7532 UNION PIN 10A55F7532.00 4
8 7536-1 MODIFIED SDREW 10A55F7536.01 8
6 6254 CENTERING PIN FINAL CONE-SMALL FLANGE 00A01F6254.00 1
5 O-RING 266,06x5 OR-61050 00A07C002.031 3
4 7538 DISCK FOR CAGE 10A48F7538.00 1
3 7533 CENTRAL DEFLECTOR 00A53F7533.0 1
2 7534 ACCELERATING SUPPORT 00A53F7534.0 4
1 7550 BOTTOM PROTECTION 00A53F7550.0 1
4
1
1
4
1
8
12
1
3
1
1
4
1
DE NOTE Q.t
6
5 11 7
7537 BOWL ASSEMBLY 00A51F.7537
18 SCREW UNI 5931 M10x20 INOX 00A01C030.026 8
15 6551 SMALL KNIFE 10A53F6551.00 3
14 7574 MUDS UNLOADING BUSH CD 600 10A53F7574.0 12
11 SCREW M16x70 INOX 00A01C036.070 48
9 6601 FLANGE OF WATER DISCHARGE LEVEL 10A51F6601.OB.FN 6
8 7535 CENTERING PIN CODE 00A01F7535.00 5
7 6550 KNIFE CLEANING MUDS 10A53F6550.00 9
6 7508 CONICAL DRUM 10A51F7508.01 1
5 7503 SMAL FLANGE WITH SHAFT 10A51F7503.01 1
4 7505 CONICAL INTERMEDIE DRUM 10A51F7505.01 1
3 7506 CILINDRICAL DRUM WATER SIDE 10A51F7506.01 1
2 7504 CILINDRICAL DRUM MUDS SIDE 10A51F7504.01 1
1 7502 MAIN FLANGE WITH SHAFT 10A51F7502.01 1
11
17
7
7539 CASINGS GROUP ASS'Y 10A40F7539.00
18 7539_11 GROMMET FOR PNEUMATIC PISTON 10A55F7539.11 2
17 SCREW UNI 5739 M12X35 INOX 00A01C005.012 16
16 WASHER 13X24 UNI 6592 INOX 00A01C034.003 16
15 7562 MUDS HOPPER 10A42F7562.00 1
13 7561 HOPPER WATER DISCHARGE 10A42F7561.00 1
12 9506_5 SCREW M12X25 INOX 10A55F9506.05 4
10 WASCHER 17X30 UNI 6592 INOX 00A01C034.005 24
9 NUT UNI 7473 M16 INOX 00A01C070.017 12
8 SCREW M16X90 INOX 00A01C036.071 12
7 WASHER UNI 1751-A 10.2 INOX 00AUNI1751-A10.2 38
6 WASHER UNI 6592 M10 INOX 00A01C034.004 38
4 SAFETY SWITCH 00A16C001.310 2
3 7539_1 PNEUMATIC PISTON "STABILUS LIFT-O-MAT"2051LN 10A10C105.003 2
2 8515 BLOCKING SISTEM 10A55F8515.00 12
1 7540 CASINGS 10A40F7540.00 1
7540 BOWL ASSEMBLY 10A40F7540.00
20 7559 PIN OF CENTRING 10A51F.7559 4
19 7540_1 NBR WASHER Th = 1 mm 10A40F7540.01 2
18 7593 PILLOW BLOCK PROTECTION 10A51F7593.00 2
17 FULL NUT M10 INOX 00A01C070.016 16
16 WASHER M10 FLAT INOX 00A01RON.LAR.10.304 16
15 SCREW M10x45 INOX 00A01C004.025 16
14 WASHER 13x24 UNI 6592 INOX 00A01C034.003 16
13 SCREW TE M12x30 INOX 00A01C005.011 16
11 WASHER UNI 1751-A 10.2 INOX 00A01C034.004 8
9 6332 HINGE 10A40F6332.00 4
8 WASHER 13x24 UNI 6592 INOX 00A01C034.003 12
6 7545 PLATE FOR PROTECTION 10A41F7545.00 1
5 7546 PLATE FOR PROTECTION 10A41F7546.00 2
4 7543 CASING ASS'Y - MUDS SIDE 10A40F7543.00 1
3 7542 UPPER CASING MIDDLE SIDE 10A40F7542.00 1
2 7541 CASYNGS ASS'Y - WATER SIDE 10A40F7541.00 1
1 7502 LOWER CASING 10A40F7544.00 1
14 10 13
16
11
12
15
6
9
17
7
5
5
DISEGNO
POS /DWG DESCRIPTION CODICE/CODE NOTE Q.t
7598_A FRAME AND COVER GROUP 00A35F7598.A0
48 7610 TANK AND FIXING BRACKET 10A55F7610.01 1
47 7567_26 GRATINGS 590X190X30 10A55F7567.26 2
46 7567_27 GRATINGS 985X545X30 10A55F7567.27 1
45 7567_28 GRATINGS 435X545X30 10A55F7567.28 1
44 7567_29 GRATINGS 435X250X30 10A55F7567.29 2
42 7598_06 ANGLE OF FIXING 10A55F7598.06 1
41 7598_05 ANGLE 40X40X5 L=110 10A55F7598.05 1
40 M6 NUT 01.39672.06 2
39 7598_04 SHEET Th=8 L=SEE DRW 10A55F7598.04 2
38 9507_10 BLOCCAGE INDICATOR PROTECTION 00A41F9507.10 1
37 SCREW M6X20 UNI 5739 00A01C002.010 14
36 WASHER M6 ISO 7089 INOX 10A07C.RON.69 20
35 7598_03 DRIVEN 10A55F7598.03 1
34 7598_08 DRIVEN 10A55F7598.08 1
33 MICROSWITC 10A15C501-011 1
32 7598_2A SUPPORT MICRON 10A55F7598.2A 1
31 AC003 KNURL BLOCKS HINGE 10A55FAC003.00 2
30 AC002 SAFETY PIN 10A40FAC002.00 2
28 WASHER UNI 1751-A FOR M8 INOX 00A07C502.137 4
24 WASHER UNI 6592 M10 INOX 00A01C034.004 17
22 7605 FILTER OIL - LOW FLOW SYSTEM SEE ASSEMBLY dwg-7605 1
21 7598_1 CARTER 10A41F7598.01 1
20 WASCER M8 UNI 6592 INOX 00A01C034.007 12
19 NUT UNI 5588 M8 INOX 00A01C075.008 2
17 SAFETY SWITCH 00A16C001.310 1
16 7622 PLATE FOR SAFETY SWITCH 00A55F7622.00 1
15 SCREW UNI 5931 M10X70 00A01C004.041 4
14 NUT UNI 7473 M14 INOX 00A01C004.042 48
13 WASHER UNI 6592 - 15X28 INOX 00A6592-15X28INOX 48
12 6571_A PLATE OF CLAMPING 10A35F6571-A 12
11 SCREW TE M20X80 00A01C009.016 12
10 WASHER UNI 6592 - 21X37 10A35F6571.A 12
9 6609 ANTIVIBRATIOS BLOCK 10A10F6609.00 12
8 39723 PROTECTION OF HEAT AXCHANGER 10A55F.39723 1
7 7589 OIL TANK FOR BEARING 00A18F7589.00 1
6 7591 FRAME FOR COVER 10A41F7591.00 1
5 7590 COVER 10A41F7590.00 1
4 7587 PULLEY CARTER ASS'Y 10A41F7587.00 1
3 7586_A CARTER OF SECONDARY MOTORIZATION 10A41F7586.A0 1
2 7560 CARTER OF SECONDARY ENGINE 10A41F7560.00 1
1 7567 FRAME 00F35F7567.00 1
18 4
24 2
17
28
25
20
44
3 31
23 6
30
48
44
45
35
38
47
34
46
33 42
32
47
27
11
1 26 24 7 22
14
1 7589 SERBATOIO OLIO PER CUSCINETTI 00A18F7689.00 1 OIL TANK FOR BEARING
POS DISEGNO DESCRIZIONE CODICE Q.t DESCRIPTION
8 CURVA 1/4" M/F A 90° INOX 10A02X.C90MFG 1 CURVE 1/4" M/F TO 90° INOX
7 7666_07 TUBO MANDATA POMPA 10A55F7666.07 1 PIPE DELIVERY PUMP
6 7666_06 RACCORDO DI ASPIRAZIONE 10A55F7666.06 1 CONNECTION OF ASPIRATION
5 VALVOLA A SFERA 1" INOX 00A02C316.001 1 BALL VALVE 1" INOX
4 TAPPO "FBO" 00A18C012.066 1 PLUG "FBO"
3 SPIA LIVELLO/TEMP 00A18C012.012 1 SPY GLASS OF LEVEL AND TEMPERATURE
2 POMPA GR71 B5 00A18C012.003 1 PUMP GR71 B5
4 8 7
2
3 5
7605 IMPIANTO FILTRO OLIO-FLUSSOSTATO OIL FILTER ASS'Y-DOUBLE FLOW SWITCH SYSTEM
15 MANOMETRO 1.5 bar 00A19C010.027 2 MANOMETER 1,5 bar
14 RONDELLA RAME 1/4 00A0L.R93404 12 WASHER COPPER 1/4
TUBO VERSO SUPPORTO LATO ACQUA - 1 CURVA
13 7605_07 90°+1 CURVA 45° RACCORDI F-F 1/4 SN1 PR S 10A20XSN.2560 1 HOSE
TUBO VERSO SUPPORTO LATO FANGO - 1 CURVA
12 7605_06 90+CURVA A 45° RACCORDI F-F 1/4 SN1 PR S 10A20XSN.2840 1 HOSE
TUBO FLUSSOSTATO LATO ACQUA - DUE CURVE
11 7605_02 90° E RACCORDO F-F 1/4 SN1 10A20XSN.410 1 HOSE
TUBO FLUSSOSTATO LATO FANGO - CURVA 90°-
10 7605_04 DRITTO E RACCORDO F-F 1/4 SN1 10A20XSN.190 1 HOSE
9 7605_05 TUBO FILTRO - SERBATOIO (2 CURVE 90° 10A20XSN.640 1 HOSE
8 NIPPLO 1_2 NPT-1_4 GAS 10A02X.310503 4 NIPPLE 1_2 NPT-1_4 GAS
7 NIPPLO 1_4-1_4 10A02X.310504 3 NIPPLE 1_4-1_4
6 MANOMETRO 00AOL.3400022 1 MONOMETER
5 NIPPLO 3/4-1/4 00A02C028.345 2 NIPPLO 3/4-1/4
4 RACCORDO A T 1/4 00A02C023.016 2 TEE JOINT 1/4
3 VGE1505 MORSETTO 20A55FVGE1505 2 CLIP
2 FLUSSOSTATO FLOTECT V6 00A16C900.016 2 LOW FLOW FLOTECT V6
1 FILTRO TIPO MSH050B1G1A10 00A18C012.A10 1 FILTER TYPE MSH050B1G1A10
15
12
8
14
14
4
14
7
2
13
15
3
14
4
6 AL SERBATOIO
14 TO THE TANK
7
5
9
14
7568_A SECOND ENGINE 10A55F7568.0A
14 WASHER COPPER De 23 Di 17 Tt=1.5 10A07C.RON.62 1
13 WASCHER OF SECURITY MB6 INOX 00A06C040.006 1
12 7568_1 PIN FOR WASHER 10A47F7568.01 1
11 ORM 0510-25 ( 51.0X2.5X56.0 ) 00A07C002.050 2
9 7633_10 BLOCKING SEAL RING DISC 10A43F7633.10 1
8 SEAL RINNG TYPE AS 75X95X10 00A07C001.111 1
6 BEARING SKF NK 75-25 00A06C025.093 1
5 7633_6 PIPE 10A43F7633.06 1
4 METAL RING ELASTIC STOP SKF KM6 M30X38X1.5 00A06C037.006 1
3 5045_06 WASHER 10A55F5045.06 1
2 5045_03 TORQUE LIMIT-SWITCH "COMPOMAC" 55 C 10A55F5045.03 1
1 5045_04 PULLEI POGGI HTD 56 14M55 - 10WF COD. 10A55F5045.04 1
7
1
6
14
5
11
11
POS DWG DESCRIZIONE CODE Q.t DESCRIPTION
7570_A GRUPPO MOTORE SECONDARIO 00F99F7600.A0 1 ELECTRIC ENGINE BALDOR 40 HP
8 CINGHIA HTD 14M 2450 055 00A04C008.C57 1 BELT HTD 14M 2450 055
7 ROSETTA 17x30 UNI 6592 INOX 00A01C034.055 4 WASHER 17x30 UNI 6592 INOX
6 ROSETTA ELASTICA UNI 1751 M16 INOX 00A07C502.138 4 ELASTIC WASHER M16 INOX
5 VITE INOX M16x60 00A01C033.159 4 SCREW INOX M 16x60
4 7570_2 PULEGGIA POGGI HTD 14M 55 PL36-4F 00A47C048.100 1 PULLEY POGGI HTD 14M 55 PL36-4F
3 7570_3 BARRA FILETTATA M20x280 INOX 00A47C082.400 2 THREAD BAR INOX M20x280
2 7570_1 SLITTA 10A55F570.01 1 FLOWING PLATE
1 MOTORE ELETTRICO BALDOR 40 HP 1 ELECTRIC ENGINE BALDOR 40 HP
1
2
7597 GRUPPO MOTORE PRIMARIO 10A30F7597.00 MAIN MOTOR GROUP
7 CINGHIA TRAPEZIODALE XPB 3150 00A04C005.315 8 V-BELT XPB 3150

6 VITE TE M20X50 00A01C009.015 4 SCREW TE M20X50
5 ROSETTA ELASTICA UNI 1751-A 20.2 00AUNI1751.A20.2 WASHER UNI 1751-A20.2
4 ROSETTA UNI 6592-21X37 00A6592-21X37R40C 4 WASHER UNI 6592-21X37
3 7569 PUL. POGGI 8 GOLE SPB-Dp400 COD.20B040008 00A47C082.400 1 PULLEY 8 GROOVES SPB Dp.400
2 MOTORE ELETTRICO BALDOR 125HP 1 ELECTRIC ENGINE BALDOR 125 HP
1 7558 SLITTA COMPLETA 10A55F7558.01 1 FLOWING PLATE COMPLETE
6
4
C ANNEXES
Anne C
Compomac

15.01.02b
via Bruno Buozzi, 6 - 40057 CADRIANO - Granarolo E. S.p.A.

(Bologna) Italy - tel. 051/765651 - fax 051/763120
E-Mail: info@compomac.it - Internet http://www.compomac.it
SAFEGUARD
SYNCHRON
SAFE LIFTING
ROTA FREE
LIMITATORI DI MECHANICAL
COPPIA TORQUE
MECCANICI LIMITERS
SAFEGUARD - SYNCHRON - SAFE LIFTING - ROTA FREE
IL VANTAGGIO DEL SISTEMA THE ADVANTAGES OF THE SYSTEM
- SICUREZZA DI PROTEZIONE ASSOLUTA. - COMPLETE OPERATING RELIABILITY.

- REGOLAZIONE FINE COPPIA. - VERY FINE DISENGAGEMENT TORQUE ADJUSTMENT.
- SGANCIO RAPIDO DELLA TRASMISSIONE. - QUICK DRIVE DISENGAGEMENTS.
- COMANDO AUTOMATICO ARRESTO MOTORE. - AUTOMATICAL MOTOR EMERGENCY STOP.
- POSSIBILITÀ DI INTERVENTI FREQUENTI. - POSSIBILITY OF FREQUENT DISENGAGEMENTS.
- GRANDE E RIPETITIVA PRECISIONE DI REINSERIMENTO. - HIGH RIPETITIVE DISENGAGEMENT AND RE-ENGAGEMENT ACCURACY.
- ROBUSTEZZA E DURATA NEL TEMPO. - LONG SERVICE LIFE.
- NESSUNA MANUTENZIONE RICHIESTA. - NO MAINTENANCE REQUIRED.
PRINCIPIO DI FUNZIONAMENTO HOW THEY WORK

Durante il servizio normale il giunto di sicurezza trasmette la coppia dalla parte mobile During normal operations the torque limiter transmits the torque from the moving part
(2) alla flangia (3) attraverso una corona di sfere (4a - SAFEGUARD) o di rulli (4b - (2) to the flange (3) through balls (4a - SAFEGUARD) or rollers (4b - SYNCHRON,
SYNCHRON, SAFE LIFTING, ROTA FREE), costretti dalla pressione delle molle a SAFE LIFTING, ROTA FREE) pressed by the disc springs (6) into the indentations
tazza (6) dentro sedi ricavate sulle due metà (2) e (3) del giunto. Quando la coppia on both halves (2) and (3).
richiesta supera il valore pretarato dalla coppia di intervento, le sfere o i rulli sono In case of overload, when the torque demand exceeds the preset value, both halves
spinti fuori dalle loro sedi. Le due metà (2) e (3) si sganciano per sovraccarico, (2) and (3) are disengaged and they transmit only a small residual torque.
trasmettendo una coppia residua molto bassa, e la parte mobile (2) spinge contro la The balls or rollers are pressed out of the indentations, thus pushing the moving part
forza delle molle a tazza (6), ad azionare l'interruttore (9) di comando dell'arresto di (2) axially against the force of the disc springs (6), and activating a switch (9) to begin
emergenza del motore. the emergency stop of the motor.
Il reinserimento è automatico al valore di coppia pretarato quando il sovraccarico The re-engagement is automatic at the pre-set torque when the torque demand drops.
cessa. Nella versione SYNCHRON il reinserimento (a velocità ridotta) avviene dopo The SYNCHRON type re-engages (at slow speed) once per revolutions at a reference
360° dal distacco, così da rispettare il sincronismo fra le due metà (2) e (3) del giunto. point and keep the two halves (2) and (3) of the torque limiter synchronised.
Nella versione SAFE LIFTING (impiegata per lo più per sollevamenti), i rulli (4b) non In the SAFE LIFTING type the rollers (4b) are not allowed to go out completely from
possono uscire completamente dalle sedi, la parte mobile (2) aziona l'interruttore, ma the indentations, so that the moving part (2) can activitate the switch, but the torque
la trasmissione di coppia fra le due metà (2) e (3) del giunto non viene interrotta. transmission within the two halves (2) and (3) is not interrupted.
Nella versione ROTA FREE adatta per alte velocità, in caso di sovraccarico le due In a high speed application, at the moment of overload, the ROTA FREE type will
parti (2) e (3) si sganciano completamente e la parte mobile (2) rallenta, folle, fino a disconnect driven from driver shaft by the complete disengagement of ring (2) from
fermarsi. Il reinserimento è manuale. part (3), while ring (2) will slow down idle. Re-engagement must be done manually.
REGOLAZIONE DELLA COPPIA DI INTERVENTO (pag. 11) TORQUE ADJUSTMENT (page 11)
Avvitare manualmente la ghiera (7) fino a toccare il pacco di molle (6). Inserire Manually tighten the nut (7) until contacts the disc springs (6). Insert wrench
la chiave (A) nelle sedi (B), oppure la chiave (C) nei fori (D), e serrare la ghiera (A) in to the seats (B) or the wrench (C) in to the holes (D) and tighten the nut
in senso orario per il numero di tacche (E), corrispondenti alla richiesta coppia clockwise for the number of indents (E) corresponding to the request
di intervento (vedi diagramma fornito con il limitatore). Avvitare la vite (8) o disengagement torque (according with the torque diagram supplied together
(8a) nel foro filettato (G) o (G1) della ghiera (7), in corrispondenza di un foro with the torque limiter). Tighten the screw (8) or (8a) in the threaded hole (G)
(H) sulla rondella di bloccaggio ghiera (L). or (G1) of the nut (7) in corrIspondence with one of the holes (H) on the locking
washer (L).
SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON SAFE LIFTING ROTA FREE

3 4a 2 33 4b 2 3 4b 2 3 4b 10 12 11 2
6
6 5 6 5 6 5
5
7 7 7 7
1 1 1 1
8 8 8 8
9 9 9 9
ato
Brevettted
Paten
MOLLE - DISC SPRINGS
SERIE TIPO GRANDEZZA
RANGE TYPE SIZE designazione grandezza disposizione
code size arrangement
STANDARD MINI STANDARD ROTA FREE MINI

A - B- C - D E-F-G A-B-C-D A-B-C-D E-F-G
S - sottili
SAFEGUARD A - Forma base E - Forma base MINI 20 light 20/65 6x1s 2x1s 5x1s
Basic type MINI Basic type 25
SYNCHRON 35
B - Con supporto rullini M - medie
medium 20/65 5x1m 2x1m 3x1m
45
With roller bearing flange
SAFE LIFTING* F - Per trasmissioni larghe
55*
For large transmissions
C - Con mozzo lungo 65* L - spesse 20 5x1m 2x1 3x1m
ROTA FREE* heavy
With extended hub 25/65 5x1 3x1
*Disponibile solo nella * Disponibile solo
forma A, B, C, D nella forma A, B, C, D
D - Con giunto elastico G - Con giunto elastico Available only in
Available only in the LL -spesse 20 4x1 3x1
form A, B, C, D With elastic coupling With elastic coupling the form A, B, C, D heavy 25/65 3x2 3x2
ESEMPIO DI ORDINE - HOW TO ORDER

SYNCHRON A 25 S
CARATTERISTICHE TECNICHE - TECNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Coppia di intervento Velocità massima - Maximum speed
Disengagement torque STANDARD A - B - C - D MINI E - F - G
Grand. SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON - SAFE LIFTING SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON SAFE LIFTING ROTA FREE SAFEGUARD SYNCHRON
ROTA FREE
Size Nm Nm n/1' n/1' n/1' n/1' MINI n/1' MINI n/1'
Tipo molle - Springs type Tipo molle - Springs type
S M L LL S M L S-M L-LL S-M L S-M L S-M-L S-M L-LL S-M L
20 2.5-5 5-10 10-20 20-40 5-10 10-20 20-40 3300 1800 1000 500 4000 3000 - 800 800 700 500
25 6-12 12-25 25-55 55-100 12-25 25-50 50-100 2900 1450 950 450 3900 2900 5000 800 700 700 450
35 12-25 25-50 50-120 120-200 25-50 50-100 100-200 2400 1200 800 400 3300 2400 4000 800 600 700 400
45 25-50 50-100 100-250 200-450 50-100 100-200 200-450 2000 1000 650 300 2800 2000 3500 800 500 650 300
55 50-100 100-200 200-500 500-1000 100-200 200-400 400-800 1600 850 550 250 2300 1600 3000 - - - -
65 85-250 230-600 300-1000 600-2000 170-450 350-900 600-1800 1400 700 400 150 1800 1400 2300 - - - -
Disponibilità a stock con alesaggio

H7 e chiavetta Js9 - DIN 6885/1 (mm)
Stock availability c/w bore H7 and
keyway Js9 - DIN 6885/1 (mm)
GRAND.
A
SIZE 20 25 35 45 55 65
ø MH7
19 X X
20 X X
C
24 X
G1 25 X X
D B 7
30 X
35 X X
40 X
45 X
8A 50 X
55 X
6
E H
L
60 X
G
B D 8 70* X
* Sede chiavetta DIN 6885/3

Keyway seat acc. to DIN 6885/3
STANDARD SAFEGUARD - SYNCHRON - SAFE LIFTING - ROTA FREE Tipo - Type
A-B-C-D
Tipo L Tipo
Type A E H K Type B L1
E H K
Z J
Z
øD
J
øD
øT
B
øT
øM
øG
øC
øS
øA
øF
N
øW
øM
øG
øC
øU
øS
øF
T2 X
T2
P Z T1
Y
R
V Z T1
Y
FORMA BASE. Per collegamento albero-elemento di trasmissione quale CON SUPPORTO A RULLINI. Con flangia di centraggio elemento
ingranaggio o puleggia. Supporto sull‘albero. di trasmissione montata su cuscinetto a rullini.
BASIC TYPE. For connection shaft-drive component such as gear or pulley, WITH ROLLER BEARING FLANGE. With drive centering flange
supported on the shaft. mounted on a roller bearing. Ready for mounting.
Tipo L2 Tipo
Type C V1 E H K Type D L3
L
H K
Z
J
øD
øD
J
øT
øT
ø W1
ø W2
øM
øG
øC
øU
øS
øF
ø M1
øM
øG
ø F1
ø F2
øS
ø F3
øF
X1
N
T2
T2
P Z T1 Z T1
R
Y
Y
W3
CON MOZZO PROLUNGATO. Può ricevere cuscinetti o boccole di supporto, CON GIUNTO ELASTICO. Per collegamento di due alberi coassiali.
é adatto per elementi di trasmissione di grandi dimensioni.
WITH EXTENDED HUB. Bearing or bronze bushes can be mounted on it, WITH ELASTIC COUPLING. For connecting two coaxial shafts
to support large drive components.
Dimensioni - Overal dimensions

Grand.
Size
AG7 B C D E F F1 F2 F3 G H K J L L1 L2 L3 M M1 N P R S T T1 T2 U V V1 Wh6 W1f7 W2k7 W3 X X1 Y
min. max. max.
20 41 4 48 6xM5 6.5 55 67 46 33 50 9 7.5 3 38.5 51.5 66 86 7 20 30 35 3.1 6 38.5 5 3 7 21 8 27.5 38 28 36 10 15 25.5 2
25 60 4 70 6xM5 8 82 112 79 50 72.5 9 11.5 6 52 70 83 137.5 10 25 50 48 3.1 6 54 6 3.5 8 26 10 33 50 38 45 14 20 35 2
35 78 5 89 6xM6 10 100 112 79 60 90.5 9 12 6 61 78 100 147 14 35 50 56 3.6 8 70 6 4 10 36 12 39 60 52 60 16 25 45 2
45 90.5 5 105 6xM8 12 120 128 90 70 112 10 21 8.5 78 96 125 176.5 18 45 60 72 4.1 10 84 6 4 10 46 12 47 80 65 72 21 30 59 2
55 105 6.5 125 6xM10 15 146 148 90 70 140 9 27 11 100 124.5 152.5 211.5 24 55 60 93.5 4.1 12 108 7 5.5 13 56 16 52.5 100 78 85 25 30 60 2
65 120.5 6.5 155 6xM12 17 176 177** 107** 90 170 9 33 12 113.5 140 171 242.5** 30 70* 70** 107 4.6 14 129 10 5.5 13 66 18 57.5 120 90 100 25 30 60 2
* Mmax = 70 mm con sede chiavetta DIN 6885/3 * Mmax = 70 mm with keyway seat according to DIN 6885/3
** Safeguard 65LL, Synchron 65L, Safelifting 65L, Rota free 65L: M1max = 90, F1 = 198, F2 = 140, L3 = 272 ** Safeguard 65LL, Synchron 65L, Safelifting 65L, Rota free 65L: M1max = 90, F1 = 198, F2 = 140, L3 = 272
INTERRUTTORE Tipo A - EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH Type A 29 16

220÷250 V.~ / 15A
24 V.– /6A
35
Z
Grand.
Size (1) (2) (3) (4) 7
mm mm mm mm
36 8
98
86
14
20 1.4 1.2 0.6 1.6 Z
0,1
8
M
25 2.3 1.8 0.8 2.3 3~
35 2.4 2 1.1 3
12 14 11
45 2.7 2.2 1.2 3.5
ø 4.4
15
55 3.7 2.5 1.2 3.8

PG 11 12,5
65 4.6 3 1.6 4.5 = =
64 36
(1) SAFEGUARD - (2) SYNCHRON - (3) SAFE LIFTING - (4) ROTA FREE
MINI Tipo - Type E-F-G
Per velocità fino a 900 giri/1 , bassi carichi radiali. I carichi assiali non sono ammessi.
Per interventi frequenti montare una boccola antifrizione.
SAFEGUARD For maximum speed 900 r.p.m., low radial forces. Axial forces are not admited.
SYNCHRON For frequent interventions a bushing should be mounted.
L L2
Tipo Tipo
Type E E F G Type F V1 E1
F
G
CH
P CH
Wh7 D
Bh8
Ah8
M
C
H
R
K
Bh8
Ah8
M
R
H
K
N
N
Z
Z
FORMA BASE MINI. Per collegamento albero-elemento di trasmissione MINI CON MOZZO PROLUNGATO. Può ricevere cuscinetti o boccole di
quale ingranaggio o puleggia. Supporto sull‘albero. supporto, é adatto per elementi di trasmissione di grandi dimensioni.
BASIC TYPE MINI. For connection shaft-drive component such as gear or MINI WITH EXTENDED HUB. Bearing or bronze bushes can be mounted
pulley, supported on the shaft. on it, to support large drive components.
Tipo
Type G L1
E F G
D
P
M1
H
R
K
U
T
S
V
Z
MINI CON GIUNTO ELASTICO. Per collegamento di due alberi coassiali.
MINI WITH ELASTIC COUPLING. For connecting two coaxial shafts
Dimensioni - Overal dimensions

Grand.
Size
A h8 B h8 C D E E1 F G H K L L1 L2 M M1 N P R S T U V V1 Wh7 CH
min. max. max.
20 36 55 46 6xM5 11.5 4.5 5.5 21.7 50.5 38.5 50 84.5 83.5 7 20 30 5 2.8 80 67 46 37 47.5 40.5 30 7
25 46 70 59 6xM5 16.5 5.5 7 23.2 70.5 54 57 98 94 10 25 35 6 3.5 100 82 53 48 59 48 35 8
35 64 90 80 6xM6 16.5 6.5 7 29 88 70 65 132 108 14 35 50 6 4 120 112 79 66 85.5 53 50 10
45 78 115 100 6xM6 22 8 8 34.5 110 84 81 155.5 127 18 45 60 6 4 150 128 90 79 98.5 60 65 10
INTERRUTTORE PER MINI - MINI EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH 22.9

ø21
220÷250 V.~ / 15A
24 V.– /6A ø10
Grand. Z
Size
M
5 Max
Taille (1) (2)

Größe mm mm 3~
20 1.4 1.2
43
25 1.4 1.2 12 14 11
Z
19
35 2.4 1.8 0.1 M 12x0.75

22
45 2.4 2
4
ø4
17.5 5
11.5 25.4
(1) SAFEGUARD MINI - (2) SYNCHRON MINI
ANNEXES D
Anne D
Sumitomo

ZS 600
Operating Manual
ZS 621 - 87
PB014129
Dec-05
Copyright 2003. All rights reserved.
Copying, even by way of excerpt, requires our explicit permission.
We have taken great care to check that the information in this maintenance manual is correct. Nevertheless,
we cannot assume liability for any incorrect or incomplete information.
Subject to technical changes.
Content:
1. General information 3
2. Safety advice 3
3. Transportation 3
4. Inspection upon delivery 4
4.1. To check the type designation 4
4.2. To check the lubrication 4
4.2.1. Grease lubricated centrifuge reducers 4
4.2.2. Oil lubricated centrifuge reducers 4
5. Storage 4
5.1. Short term storage 4
5.2. Long term storage 4
6. Installation 5
7. Lubrication 5
7.1. Grease lubrication 5
7.1.1. Re-greasing during start-up 5
7.1.2. Re-greasing during opertation 5
7.1.2.1. Completely sealed reducer 5
7.1.2.2. Reducer with grease outlet 6
7.2. Oil lubrication 6
7.2.1. Oil bath lubrication 6
7.2.1.1. Filling with lubricant 6
7.2.1.2. To check the oil level 6
7.2.1.3. Oil change 6
7.2.2. Oil circular lubrication 7
7.2.3. Oil once-through lubrication 7
8. Tables 7
8.1. Lubricating oil viscosity 7
8.2. Recommended lubricating oils 7
8.3. Oil change intervals 8
8.4. Flow volume with oil circular and oil once-through lubrication 8
8.5. Lead time of oilpump before machine start-up 8
8.6. Oil volume for oil bath lubrication 8
8.7. Grease recommendation 9
9. Special regulations 10
10. Assembly drawing 11
11. Parts list 12
2 Operating Manual ZS 600 Nr: ENG_PB014129

1. General information
Before working with the machine (installation, operation, maintenance, inspection, etc.), read this operating
manual carefully so you know exactly how to operate the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer and are familiar
with the safety requirements to be met and the warning signs to obey. Keep this manual in a convenient
place so you can refer to it at any time.
Imminent danger
Misapplication of the machine may be dangerous, risk of severe or fatal injury.
Dangerous situation
Risk of physical injury.
Damaging situation
Risk of machine damage.
Helpful information
Disposal
Please observe legal/environmental redulations.
2. Safety advice
Transportation, assembly, lubrication, operation, maintenance and inspection should only be done
by qualified personnel, so as to avoid personal injury or damage to property.
Do not touch moving mechanical components and make sure these parts are clear of obstructions.
Failure to follow these instructions may result in personal injury or damage to property.
Only operate the unit in the application it was intended. Misapplication may result in physical injury
or damage to machine.
If damage occurs, the equipment in question should be put out of operation and only used again
once it has been repaired properly.
Any tampering with or modification to the equipment will lead to loss of all guarantee claims and of
any rights ensuing from this.
The type plate must not be removed, nor the embossed type designation be made indecipherable.
Before dispatch, the reducer was provided with a sticker giving information on the lubricant it has
been filled with, or on the lubricant it should be filled with. This sticker must not be removed.
3. Transportation
The units must be checked for any transportation damage immediately upon receipt. Any damage
should be reported to the carrier without delay. If there is any evidence of damage which may put at
risk the function of the centrifuge reducer, do not install the unit.
Lifting harnesses of suitable and adequate size are to be used; these are to be hooked into the eye
bolts or laid round the flange connections. Eye bolts on the reducer are dimensioned for the weight
of the unit, no additional loads are allowed.
Caution: Do not use the central bores in the shaft ends for lifting the reducer with hooked bolts, etc.
This could result in damage to the bearings.
Nr: ENG_PB014129 Operating Manual ZS 600 3

4. Inspection upon delivery
Before removing the transport packaging ensure that the correct side of the reducer is at the top;
there could otherwise be a risk of injury.
Check whether you have actually received the reducer you ordered. Installing an unsuitable type
can lead to injury or damage.
On receipt of the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer check:

- that the information on the type plate or the embossed type designation corresponds with the
information on the order.
- that all parts are intact.
- that all screws and nuts have been tightened properly.
If you think that you have not received the correct reducer, please contact the nearest representa-
tive, dealer or the nearest service office.
4.1. To check the type designation

The type designation and the serial number of your reducer has been stamped onto the pin ring.
ZS1) 6172) – 253) (for example)
1) Type code for centrifuge reducer

2) Size designation
3) Transmission ratio
Check whether the serial number corresponds with the serial number given on the invoice.
If the customer wishes, additional information, e.g. the machine manufacturer's part numbers, can
also be stamped on the reducer. If this has been done, check carefully that these also correspond.
4.2. To check the lubrication

4.2.1. Grease lubricated centrifuge reducers
These reducers are delivered with grease filling. A sticker has been attached to these reducers with
the designation of the lubricant used. Check carefully whether the lubricant used corresponds with
the prescribed lubricant.
4.2.2. Oil lubricated centrifuge reducers

These reducers are delivered without lubricant filling. Make sure that it is filled with the correct lubri-
cant according to chapter 8 of is Operating Manual before start-up.
5. Storage
If the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer is to be put into storage for a long period before start-up,
please observe the following.
5.1. Short term storage

Keep the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer covered in a clean and dry environment.
Do not store the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer outside or in a damp environment.
5.2. Long term storage

The condition of the seals is impaired at high temperatures and under the effect of UV rays. For this
reason, after long periods of storage, check the seals and replace them if they are damaged or
cracked.
After start-up of the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer, check whether there are any unusual noises
or vibrations or whether the operating temperature becomes too high. If there are any irregularities,
contact the nearest representative, dealer or the nearest service office immediately.
From the day of delivery, operate the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer for several minutes every 2
to 3 months using the recommended lubricant. If this is not possible, please consult the nearest
representative, dealer or the nearest service office immediately.

6. Installation
To avoid risk to life, never stand or work under suspended loads.
To avoid injury, do not touch the rotating shaft ends or the rotating reducer.
If the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer is used for the production of food, a suitable device should
be fitted which will catch any lubricant escaping due to a faulty seal or lack of maintenance and will
prevent the food from being contaminated by the lubricant.
The screws used to assemble the CYCLO Drive centrifuge reducer must not be replaced with any
other screws, the quality of the balance set at works will otherwise not be guaranteed.
7. Lubrication
When carrying out maintenance work on the reducer always keep hands well clear of rotating parts.
Never touch rotating parts. If loose fitting clothing gets caught in rotating parts, there is a risk of
injury and/or to life.
The reducer gets hot during operation and due to a risk of burns must not be touched.
Do not change lubricant during operation or immediately after the equipment has been switched off.
Hot lubricant could cause burns.
On systems which are equipped with a separate lubricant pump, the pump motor should be operat-
ing before the drive motor is switched on. This is the only way of ensuring sufficient lubrication of
the reducer before the machine is starts. The reducer could otherwise be damaged.
Use a circulation switch and/or make a visual check to ensure that the lubricant is circulating in the
system. If necessary switch off the machine.
7.1. Grease lubrication

7.1.1. Re-greasing during start-up
When the centrifuge is operated for the first time the grease filled at works is catapulted outwards.
For this reason, regreasing will be necessary after a test run of approx. 10 minutes until the reducer
has been filled completely with grease. The reducer could otherwise be damaged due to a lack of
lubricant.
Regreasing is done via the grease inlet in the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer drive shaft (1) (see
Figure 1). At least one of the inspection screws (2) on the pin ring must also be opened. Grease
must be filled in until it starts to flow constantly out of the opened inspection screw. The reducer
must then be turned by hand with open inspection screw until no more grease comes out of the
inspection screw. This pushes the grease out from inside the rolling bearings and from the gaps in
the cam disk carrier bore holes and prevents overpressure being created during operation. Once
regreasing has been completed, the inspection screw must be screwed in again tightly with a new
oil seal (see parts list).
Figure 1
7.1.2. Re-greasing during operation

7.1.2.1. Completely sealed reducer
Completely sealed CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducers can only be regreased when the machine is
at a standstill. Regreasing is done via the grease inlet in the drive shaft (1) (see Figure 1). At least
one of the inspection screws (2) on the pin ring must also be opened. The amount of grease re-
quired should be measured so that all of the lubricant will have been changed within half (1/2) a
year according to the prescribed lubricating interval. The amounts of lubricant for the reducer can be
found in the reducer specification tables. Recommended lubricating intervals approx. 1x a month or
500 operating hours or according to the instruction from the manufacturer of centrifuges.

7.1.2.2. Reducer with grease outlet
Some types of reducer have a proper outlet for the excess grease from regreasing. These reducers
can also be regreased during operation. Re-greasing can also be done continuously using a cen-
tralised lubricating system. Regreasing is done via the grease inlet in the drive shaft (1). (see Figure
1). The excess grease escapes via the provided opening (3) (Gap seal on the drive shaft, outward
sealing shaft seal, bore holes in housing etc.). The amount of grease required should be measured
so that all of the lubricant will have been changed within half (1/2) a year according to the pre-
scribed lubricating interval. The amounts of lubricant for the reducer can be found in the reducer
assembly drawing. Recommended lubricating intervals approx. 1x a month or 500 operating hours
or according to the instruction from the manufacturer of centrifuges.
7.2. Oil lubrication

Before the first start-up, the reducer should be filled with a suitable lubricant according to the rec-
ommendations in the table. The reducer could otherwise be damaged due to a lack of lubricant.
7.2.1. Oil bath lubrication

7.2.1.1. Filling with lubricant
On the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer pin ring, there are both two (2) inspection screws at 180°
to each other and two (2) markings (X). Turn the reducer until the separate marking (X) is at the top
(see Figure 2). To fill the reducer, open the two screws at the top. Fill with lubricating oil through the
top opening until lubricating oil comes out of the second opening. Once the reducer has been suc-
cessfully filled, the inspection screws must be screwed in again tightly with new oil seals (see parts
list).
opened
Marking for upper point oil outlet
and for inspection plug
Figure 2
Some reducers with oil splash lubrication have a surge tank connected to the drive shaft which uses
a simple rotary transmission leadthrough. Here the oil is filled in through the oil reservoir with the
inspection screw at the top open. Once the reducer has been successfully filled, the inspection
screw must be screwed in again tightly with a new oil seal.
7.2.1.2. Oil level check

To check the oil level, turn the reducer until the separate marking (X) is at the top (see Figure 2).
The inspection screw at the top to the side is unscrewed. The oil level is correct if oil flows out when
reducer is rotated slightly in the direction of the opened screw. Once the reducer has been suc-
cessfully filled, the inspection screw must be screwed in again tightly with a new oil seal.
7.2.1.3. Oil change

The oil in reducers with oil splash lubrication must be changed at regular intervals. You will find the
oil change intervals in Table 8.3. To change the oil, turn the reducer until one of the inspection
screws is directly at the top. First of all open the inspection screw at the top and then the one at the
bottom. The oil flowing out must be caught in a suitable container. Once all the lubricating oil has
run out, screw in the bottom inspection screw again tightly with a new oil seal. To fill the reducer
with fresh lubricant proceed as described in chapter 7.2.1.1.

7.2.2. Oil circular lubrication
In CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducers with oil circular lubrication, the oil is conducted via a double
rotary transmission leadthrough screwed into the drive shaft, both into the reducer and also out of
the reducer (see Figure 3). The minimum oil quantities required for sufficient lubrication can be
found in Table 8.4. The correct viscosity has to be selected according to the information in Table
8.1. Suitable lubricating oils are listed in Table 8.2. The oil return line should be dimensioned so that
the oil pressure in the reducer does not exceed the permitted pressure for the shaft seal thus pre-
venting leaks.
Figure 3
7.2.3. Oil once-through lubrication

Some CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducers are constructed in such a way that the lubricating oil is
fed to further lubricating points on the centrifuge (e.g. main bearing) inside the reducer via provided
openings. On these reducers the lubricating oil is fed into the reducer through the drive shaft via a
simple rotary transmission leadthrough (see Figure 4). The minimum oil quantities required for suffi-
cient lubrication can be found in Table 8.4. The correct viscosity has to be selected according to the
information in Table 8.1. Suitable lubricating oils are listed in Table 8.2.
Figure 4
8. Tables
8.1. Lubricating oil viscosity
minimum viscosity to achieve the re-
at operating temperature
min. permitted viscosity 2 quired lubricating film thickness for
at least 20 mm /s
power transmission
2
below 4300 mm /s for oil splash lubri- maximum permitted viscosity when
max. permitted viscosity
cated reducers starting
below 2200 mm2/s for reducers with oil maximum permitted viscosity to oper-
circular or oil once-through lubrication ate the oil pump
8.2. Recommended lubricating oils

Lubricant according to Å possible operating temperature Æ
DIN 51517 part 3 ambient temperature operating temperature
-20° 0° +20° +40° +60° +80° +100° +120°
CLP 68
CLP 100
CLP 150
CLP 220
CLP 320
Manufacturer Oil type Manufacturer Oil type

ARAL DEGOL BG ESSO SPARTAN EP
AVIA AVILUB RSX MOBIL MOBOLGEAR
BP ENERGOL GR-XP OPTIMOL ULTRA
DEA FALCON CLP SHELL OMALA
ELF REDUCTELF SP TOTAL CARTER EP
Synthetic oil types are also allowed to be used, if the chemical comptibility with the material of the
oil seals is proofed. Otherwise damage can happen to the centrifuge reducer by oil leakage.

8.3. Oil change intervals
Time of oil change Operating conditions
First oil filling before start-up
first oil change after 500 hours -
Oil change every 6 months up to 12 hours/day
further oil changes every 2500 hours 12 to 24 hours/day
evry 1 - 2 months Extreme temperatures or
moisture and other ambi-
ence conditions
8.4. Flow volume with oil circular and oil once-through lubrication
Reducer size Oil flow [l/min] Reducer size Oil flow [l/min]
ZS 610, 611 0,025 - 0,05 ZS 620, 621 0,6 - 1,2
ZS 612 0,04 - 0,08 ZS 622 0,7 - 1,4
ZS 613, 614 0,07 - 0,14 ZS 623 0,9 - 1,8
ZS 616 0,1 - 0,2 ZS 624 1,2 - 2,4
ZS 617 0,17 - 0,34 ZS 625 1,8 - 3,6
ZS 618 0,3 - 0,6 ZS 626 2,5 - 5,0
ZS 619 0,5 - 1,0
The amounts given here are reference values for the CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer. If there
should be other lubricating points, e.g. main cylinder bearing, worm bearing, in the oil circulation,
these will have to be given special attention when the flow is being determined. Also ensure that this
will not cause the oil pressure in the reducer to exceed the permitted values for the shaft seals.
8.5. Forerun time of oil pump before machine start-up

The CYCLO DRIVE centrifuge reducer has to be filled with a sufficient oil volume before start-up to
make sure that all bearings, especially the eccentric bearing have enough lubricant.
For units with oil circular lubrication according 7.2.2 the forerun time of the oil pump must be long
enough, that an oil volume according to the complete cavity has been pumped into the reducer. The
volume of the cavity is shown in the assembly drawing.
For units with oil once through lubrication according 7.2.3 the forerun time must be as long as it
needs until the oil flows back to the tank. This makes sure, that necessary lubrication after the unit
is also provided with oil.
8.6. Oil volume for oil bath lubrication

Reducers with oil bath lubrication must be correctly filled with lubricant before operation starts. The
approximate oil volume, respectively the measured capacity is written at the drawing of the reducer.
The correct oilvolume has to be checked according 7.2.1.
8.7. Grease recommendation

The grease type is shown in the special regulations.
Only the grease used at original filling may be used for re-greasing and new filling.
Otherwise decomposition of the mixed greases may happen and damages can occur by lack of
lubrication ability.

9. Special regulations
Type: ZS 621 - 87 Article number: PB014129
Oil bath lubrication; shipment without lubricant

10. Assembly drawing
Type: ZS 621 - 87 Article number: PB014129 Cavity: ca. 5000 cm3

11. Parts list
Type: ZS 621 - 87 Article number: PB014129
ZeP Art.-No. Designation Standard Qty.
001 131990 casing 1
003 121299 ring gear housing 1
006 121864 slow speed shaft roller 12
007 132124 seal cover 1
015 AU2402G ring gear pin 44
016 131935 ring gear roller 88
017 114274 seal cover 1
021 165620 slow speed shaft 1
041 AN9597G cycloid disc 2
044 165485 eccentric bearing 1
050 121702 spacer 1
061 132001 flange 1
076 AU2389G support ring 2
079 132006 support ring 1
081 132022 high speed shaft 1
082 204135 support ring 988 SS 55x68x3 1
084 132023 spacer 1
104 201817 oilseal BABSL 130x160x12 1
114 210569 O-ring 225x3 Silicon 1
117 200446 hexagon headed screw 4762 M18x110 12.9 12
124 200934 key 6885 A 14x9x75 1
127 200047 ball bearing 625 6030 2
142 210567 O-ring 400x4 Silicon 2
148 AU3061G key 6885 A 15,91x10x70 1
149 205348 oilseal BABSL 70x90x7/8 1
156 200646 hexagon headed screw 4017 M12x25 8.8 2
172 204315 fillister socket head screw 4762 M8x20 8.8 8
175 210172 retaining ring 472 I 225x5 1
178 240K150-NG retaining ring 471 A 150 1
183 202356 cylindrical roller bearing 5412 NJ311 M 1
257 205668 seal ring 7603A 12x15x1,5 Cu 2
195 203760 cylindrical roller bearing 5412 NUP311 M 1
196 202381 plug 910 M12x1,5 2
205 202971 rotating union 1
268 210896 O-ring 122x3 Silicon 1

Postfach 62 - 85227 Markt Indersdorf - Germany
Cyclostraße 02 - 85227 Markt Indersdorf - Germany
Tel.:+49(0)8136 66-0 - Fax.: +49(0)8136 5771

E ANNEXES
Anne E
Mobile electrical panel

Manual
EEx p control system:
Control unit: APEX 2003.00

Type: 07-3711-121./.000
Control unit: APEX 2003.MV

Type: 07-3711-221./.000
2
Table of contents:
1st Manual.............................................................................................................................................................. 3
2nd Important safety instructions for start-up ........................................................................................................... 3
3rd Guarantee and liability ...................................................................................................................................... 4
4th General instructions and warnings..................................................................................................................... 4
5th Ex protection type: pressurized enclosure .......................................................................................................... 5
6th APEX 2003.00 control unit ................................................................................................................................ 6
6th1st Function ................................................................................................................................................ 6
6th2nd Structure................................................................................................................................................ 7
6th3rd Technical data ....................................................................................................................................... 7
6th4th Construction .......................................................................................................................................... 8
6th5th Installation ............................................................................................................................................. 8
6th6th APEX 2003.00 dimensions..................................................................................................................... 9
6th7th Digital valve type 05-0056-..................................................................................................................... 9
6th8th Pressure reducer type 05-0056-0007...................................................................................................... 9
6th9th Purging time calculation....................................................................................................................... 10
6th10th Leakage air diagram ............................................................................................................................ 11
7th APEX 2003.MV control unit ............................................................................................................................. 12
7th1st Function .............................................................................................................................................. 12
7th2nd Structure.............................................................................................................................................. 13
7th3rd Technical data ..................................................................................................................................... 13
7th4th Construction ........................................................................................................................................ 14
7th5th Installation ........................................................................................................................................... 14
7th6th APEX 2003.MV dimensions ................................................................................................................. 15
7th7th Purging time calculation....................................................................................................................... 15
8th Connection of the electrical lines ..................................................................................................................... 17
8th1st Control module type 07-7331-81.2/1100............................................................................................... 17
9th Status table..................................................................................................................................................... 18
10th Tolerances: ..................................................................................................................................................... 18
11th Start-up........................................................................................................................................................... 19
11th1st Testing the enclosure for leaks............................................................................................................. 19
11th2nd Testing the prepurging phase: .............................................................................................................. 19
11th3rd Testing the operating status: ................................................................................................................ 19
12th Parameter assignment .................................................................................................................................... 20
12th1st Rotary switch S 5 of the control module ............................................................................................... 20
12th2nd Rotary switch S 2 to S 4 of the control module/ purging time setting..................................................... 20
12th3rd Rotary switch S 1 of the control module ............................................................................................... 20
12th4th Pushbuttons S 11 to S 13 of the sensor module ................................................................................... 20
12th5th Switching values "DIFF A" or "DIFF B" ................................................................................................. 21
12th6th Switching values "MIN A" or "MIN B" .................................................................................................... 21
12th7th Switching value "MAX" ......................................................................................................................... 21
12th8th Switching value "MAX 1" ...................................................................................................................... 21
12th9th DP (pressure inside of the enclosure) .................................................................................................. 22
13th Additional components .................................................................................................................................... 22
13th1st Temperature detector PT 100............................................................................................................... 22
13th2nd Keyswitch ............................................................................................................................................ 22
13th3rd ON/OFF switch .................................................................................................................................... 23
13th4th External pressure sensor and switch .................................................................................................... 23
13th5th Safety jumper ...................................................................................................................................... 23
13th6th RS 485 interface .................................................................................................................................. 23
13th7th Dust cover ........................................................................................................................................... 23
14th Malfunctions.................................................................................................................................................... 24
15th Checklist for the EEx p enclosure .................................................................................................................... 25
16th Address .......................................................................................................................................................... 25
17th Selection chart: ............................................................................................................................................... 26
APEX200300_E_210300.DOC • Subject to technical changes

3
1st Manual
The product described in this manual has left the factory in its original faultless state and after having been
tested according to all the safety measurements. In order to maintain this state and to ensure a smooth
and safe operation of the product it is necessary to operate it as prescribed by the manufacturer. Smooth
and safe operation of this product furthermore requires its proper transport, correct storage and careful
handling.
This manual contains all the information needed for the correct use of the APEX 2003 control unit. It
addresses technically qualified personnel.
The knowledge and the technically correct realization of the safety instructions and warnings described in
this manual are prerequisites for a dangerless installation and start-up. Only qualified personnel avails of
the necessary know-how for the correct interpretation and putting into action of the safety instructions and
warnings given in this documentation.
This manual is part of the consignment although separate ordering and shipment are possible. Should you
need further information, please do not hesitate to ask for it at your local BARTEC agency.
The safe and faultless installation of the APEX 2003 control unit on a pressurized enclosure is prerequisite
to its smooth and correct functioning.
2nd Important safety instructions for start-up

The following measures must be observed or carried out during start-up
1. Maximum switching capacity of K 2/3 is 5 A / cos ϕ = 1 / 253 VAC. This requires a check of the
connected non-Ex devices for their power consumption as well as the installation of a back-up fuse of
at least 5 A.
2. Maximum switching capacity of K 4 and K 5 is 100mA/10V usable only for data lines. The data line
connected must therefore be checked for its values.
3. Purging time must be set according to the procedure described under chapter 12.2. This procedure
contains both the requirements for a safety-oriented controller and the exclusion of any operator error
out of carelessness.
4. After start-up, the settings of both switching values and purging time of the control unit must be
checked once again.
5. The input pressure of the overall system must be chosen as described under chapter 6.9. The output
pressure of the pressure reducer mounted on the APEX 2003.MV control unit must not exceed 3 bar.
6. Only inert gas or cleaned and dry compressed industrial air must be used as pressurizing gas. A filter
becomes absolutely necessary when the quality cannot be guaranteed with regard to foreign matters.
7. An EEx p enclosure equipped and completed with the APEX 2003.____ system requires the final
acceptance by way of a federal expert (special acceptance according to Elex V §10).
8. The outputs K 1 (terminals 28/29) and A 1 (terminals 31/32) have integrated back-up fuses with the
following values (in line L) for the connection of Ex valves:
K 1: 0.08 A at 230 V; 0.16 A at 115 V
A 1: 0.08 A at 230 V; 0.16 A at 115 V

4
3rd Guarantee and liability
In general apply our „General Sales and Delivery Conditions“. They are made available to the operator not
later than at contract stipulation. Guarantee and liability claims in case of injuries or damages are
excluded if they are caused by one or more of the following reasons:
- Incorrect use of the APEX 2003 control unit

- Incorrect installation, start-up, operation and maintenance of the APEX 2003 control unit.
- Operation of the APEX 2003 control unit with defective safety devices or safety devices that are not
fixed as prescribed or out of order (e.g. jumped fuses).
- Non-adherence to the instructions given in this manual regarding transport, storage, installation, start-
up, operation, maintenance.
- Unauthorized change of the construction of the single components or complete system supplied by us.
- Not correct or not permitted repairs.
- Catastrophes caused by the effects of foreign matters or acts of God.
On the APEX 2003 control unit and its accessories we grant a warranty period of 1 year from the date of
delivery ex factory Bad Mergentheim. This warranty contains all parts of the delivery and is limited to the
no-cost replacement or repair of the defective parts in our factory in Bad Mergentheim. For this reason the
original packing and packaging must be conserved.
On request the merchandise must be sent to us as agreed in writing. There is no claim for re-works on site.
4th General instructions and warnings
- Works on live parts (intrinsically safe power circuits excluded) are generally prohibited during a real
danger of explosion.
- The connection between PE terminal and protective conductor must be established prior to any other
connection.
- Before switch-on make sure that the operating voltages of the APEX 2003 control unit and the valves
correspond to the supply voltage.
- Live parts may be exposed when you open covers or remove parts. Parts of the connection may be
energized also.
- Make sure to only use spare fuses of type and nominal current indicated by us. The use of jumped
fuses or short-circuit jumpers is not allowed.
- Exclude any dangerous operation by switching off the device and safeguarding it against restarting.
- The standard directives and regulations for explosion protection are binding for the installation of the
devices.
- The connection of compressed air or pressurized gas must be established with completely unscrewed
adjuster lever of the pressure reducer on the input valve. This prevents pressure surges during initial
start-up in case the pressure reducer has been set to a too high output pressure.
- The output pressure of the pressure reducer may be increased to its reference value only in presence
of supply voltage.

5
5th Ex protection type: pressurized enclosure
Ex protection type EEx p called „Pressurized enclosure“ has been described in European Normative
50016 and is based on the idea that explosive gas compounds within a closed containment can be purged
out while a pressure higher than that of the surrounding atmosphere is generated and maintained
afterwards.
Thanks to the higher pressure within the enclosure it is at no time possible for explosive gas components
outside to find their way into the enclosure.
This way a flameproof area has been created where non-flameproof electrical devices can be mounted.
According to the new norm EN 50016:1995 the application of the pressurized enclosure is divided into:
1a) Static pressurization: Maintenance of an overpressure in an enclosure without pressurized gas

compensation within the explosive area.
1b) Pressurization with leakage compensation: Maintenance of an overpressure in an enclosure via

pressurized gas adjustment in order to compensate for leakage losses of the enclosure.
1c) Pressurization with constant purging: Maintenance of an overpressure in an enclosure by means of the
constant purging of the enclosure with pressurized gas.
2a) Fail-safe"Containment Systems": Pressurized enclosure into which combustible media are introduced.
Thanks to the special constructions, however, no internal release takes place.
2b) "Containment Systems" with limited release: Pressurized enclosure into which combustible media are
introduced. This system might release a foreseeable amount of media into the enclosure.
2c) "Containment Systems" with unlimited release: Pressurized enclosure into which combustible media
are introduced. This system might release a non-foreseeable amount of media into the enclosure.
Note: EEx p system for "Containment Systems":

A special pressurized enclosure system „ APEX 2003.SI/B“ is available for applications regarding
„Containment Systems“. The specially written documentation can be requested.
The described applications (except the static pressurized enclosure) distinguishes two operating modes:
a) Prepurging phase
The enclosure must be purged with pressurized gas (compressed air or inert gas) prior to start-up in order
to prevent explosive atmospheres that might have seeped in during down-time from becoming a danger.
The quantity depends on the test values of the initial start-up. The flow rate is measured/determined at the
output of the pressurized enclosure.
b) Operating phase
During operation a pressure higher than that of the surrounding atmosphere must be maintained within
the enclosure. When the internal pressure falls below the fixed limit value, a safety mechanism must
automatically and completely disable the electrical supply to the EEx p enclosure (including all data lines).
The APEX 2003 control unit satisfies all requirements according to EN 50016:1995 resp. The ATEX-
directives and can be used as flameproof device within the Ex-zones 1 and 2.

6
6th APEX 2003.00 control unit
Standard control unit in combination with the digital valve type 05-0056-.... for all conventional
applications (control cabinets, switchgear cabinets, printers, operator terminals etc.). The digital valve is
equipped with an integrated leakage needle valve.
6th1st Function
After installation of the APEX 2003.00 control unit and the digital valve on the EEx p enclosure and after
the connection of the supply voltage line as well as the pressurized gas line, the control unit automatically
controls and monitors the pressure inside of the enclosure during operation.
When the minimum operating pressure (switching value of "MIN A" and "MIN B") of the enclosure is
exceeded during the prepurging phase, and the flow rate of the pressure switch module (switching values
"DIFF A" and "DIFF B") sufficient, the pressure sensors "MIN A", "MIN B", "DIFF A" and "DIFF B" of the
sensor module transmit signals to the control module. The "MIN A", "MIN B", "DIFF A" and "DIFF B" LEDs
light up. The „Purging time running“ LED flashes. Now the residual purging time counts down to zero.
In order to prevent an extremely high flow resistance at the pressurized gas outlet of the control from
causing an excessive pressure inside of the enclosure, the purging process is interrupted as soon as the
„MAX“ value has been reached. A reactivation is possible only via switch S5 on the control module (turn to
0 and back to 1).
In order to prevent an extremely low pressurized gas flow rate from endangering the necessary purging
of the EEx p enclosure, any falling below the switching values „DIFF A“ or „DIFF B“ of the pressurized gas
flow rate causes the residual purging time to be reset to its initial value, the „Purging time running“ LED
goes out. The purging time restarts as soon as the reference flow rate has been reached.
At expiry of the purging time, operation is started automatically.
1. The digital valve closes and the leakage losses are compensated via the integrated needle valve (see
chapter 6.10).
2. The “Operation“ LED lights up.
3. Relay K 2/3 enables the electrical devices inside of the EEx p enclosure.
4. The residual purging time display goes out, the actual pressure inside of the enclosure is output on the
sensor module.
5. Relays K 4 and K 5 switch according to configuration.
If the enclosure pressure falls below the switching values "MIN A" or "MIN B" during operation, the relays
K4 and K5 drop out and the connected non-Ex devices are de-energized. A new prepurging time is
initiated simultaneously.
The EEx p devices are disconnected from the supply with a time-delay of about 5 seconds in order to
compensate for any pressurized gas fluctuations that may occur.
If the enclosure pressure exceeds the „MAX“ switching value during operation, terminals 34 and 35 are
disconnected from the supply without delay only as long as the overpressure is exceeded.
Note: The APEX 2003.00 control unit is equipped with a spring-controlled drain valve which opens at a
pressure of about 5 mbar. This means that „MAX“ can be reached only if the pressurized gas outlet has
been shut without permission.
Purging time and switching values of the pressure switches are set via the EEx i pushbuttons 11 to 13 of
the sensor module and the rotary switches S1 to S4 of the control module.
Relays K 4 and K 5 are freely programmable relays. They can be used for control tasks, e.g. interruption
of a 4-wire data line. The maximum switching capacity of the relays K4 and K5 lies at 100 mA/10 V per
contact.

7
6th2nd Structure
Sensor module Pressurized gas outlet
Pressure switch module

Plain test display
Pneumatic connections
LED status display
Rotary switch
Control module
Breathers
Cable glands
6th3rd Technical data
Certification: DMT 99 ATEX E 082

Marking: EEx e ib d [ia p] IIC T4 or T6
Enclosure material: Polyester, glass-fiber reinforced
Enclosure dimensions: 200 x 250 x 120 mm
Supply voltage: 230 VAC 48-62 Hz ( ±10% )
Option: 115 VAC ( ±10% )
Purging time: Adjustable from 0 to 99 min
Pressure sensors: Setting range: Basic settings:
DIFF A: 0-25 mbar 2.0 mbar

DIFF B: 0-25 mbar 2.0 mbar
MIN A: 0-25 mbar 1.0 mbar
MIN B: 0-25 mbar 1.0 mbar
MAX: 0-25 mbar 23.0 mbar
MAX 1: 0-25 mbar 20.0 mbar
Relay K 2/3 : Maximum switching capacity 5 A at cos ϕ =1 / 253 VAC

OFF-delay (5 sec.)
Relays K 4 and K 5 : Maximum switching capacity 100 mA / 10 V
Output A 1: Input valve connection: max. 7 VA
Terminals: Max. 1 x 2.5 mm² per terminal
Cable glands: 4 x M20x1.5 black / 2 x M20x1.5 blue

8
Flow rate during purging time: See chapter 6.9.
Leakage loss volume: See chapter 6.10.
Connection of a separate temp. detector: PT 100 (EEx-i)

Temperature switching point (option): + 40°C
Weight: 4.3 kg
Climatic conditions:
Maximum ambient temperatures: -20 °C to + 60 °C for storage and transport

-20 °C to + 40 °C during operation
Maximum humidity: < 90 % relative humidity (annual average)
6th4th Construction
EEx p enclosure EEx p control unit APEX 2003.00
Pressurized
gas outlet
H L
DIFF A
DIFF B= MIN A-MIN B
MIN B
MIN A / MAX 1 / MAX
Digital valve Pressurized

gas inlet
Maximum 6 bar
6th5th Installation
The APEX 2003.00 control unit should be mounted on one of the sides of the pressurized enclosure.
Vertical mounting position with air outlet opening pointing upwards. Installation on top of the EEx p
enclosure is also possible.
When mounting the air inlet gland make sure to tighten the gland as much as possible.
EEx p enclosure
O-ring
Air inlet gland
BARTEC
0 1 0 1

9
6th6th APEX 2003.00 dimensions
27,5
120 200
ø 37
78
250
100
BARTEC
2 x ø 7 90 90
6th7th Digital valve type 05-0056-....
When mounting the digital valve on the EEx p enclosure make sure to obtain a flow as diagonal as
possible through the EEx p enclosure. We recommend the valve installation inside of the enclosure. The
electrical connection is established via terminals 31-33 (A1) of the control module. The necessary back-up
fuse of the digital valve is mounted within the control module.
Function: During prepurging the purging air nozzle is enabled. After prepurging the digital valve closes, the
leakage losses of the enclosure are compensated via the adjustable leakage loss needle valve (see
chapter 6.10).
Note: The control module briefly opens the big nozzle of the digital valve to compensate increased
leakage losses when the operating pressure falls below the reference value.
The valve has an internal thread of R 3/8“ on
both sides. The purging air nozzle comes
factory-mounted.
The valve is fixed directly to the enclosure by
means of a bulkhead R 3/8“ x 1/4".
Standard cable length is 3 m.
6th8th Pressure reducer type 05-0056-0007

Functioning as pressure reduction station, the
pressure reducer is screwed directly to the
valve input and can hold a purging air nozzle
of up to 3.9 mm. Greater purging air nozzles
need a pressure reducer with an R 1/2"
thread. The pressure reducer has an internal
thread of R 1/4".
The pressure reducer set contains:
1 removable gland R 1/4"
1 bulkhead gland R 3/8"
2 U-screws for R 3/8“
A control filter can be used if the application
requires it.

10
6th9th Purging time calculation
In this manual we calculate the purging gas quantity in dependence of the enclosure volume (volume-
dependent purging time). If tests are carried out via gas concentration measuring procedure, the resulting
purging time must be determined by a test engineer.
Volume-dependent purging time:
For the calculation of the purging time we need the flow rate of pressurized gas at the output of the
pressurized enclosure. The actual flow rate is obtained by reading the differential pressure at the sensor
module during the purging phase.
Proceed as follows:
1. Choose the correct purging air nozzle and input pressure of the digital valve according to the following
table:
Enclosure volume Purging air nozzle Input pressure [bar] Recommended

[liters] [ø mm] orifice plate
0-100 2 or 2,9 1 till 2 8
100-250 2,9 2 till 3 12
250-700 3,8 2 till 3 12
700-1500 5,5 2 till 3 15
1500-5000 7,7 2 till 3 18
th
2. Determine the orifice plate within the pressure switch module by reading the 10 digit of the type
name.
Example: control unit type: 07-3711-1214 / 1000
Orifice diameter = 12 mm
3. Activate purging.
4. Turn rotary switch S1 to position 3 (DIFF A).
5. Read differential pressure from sensor module.
6. Determine flow rate by means of the following diagram:
Differential pressure [mbar]
Pressurized gas flow rate [l/h]

11
7. Calculate prepurging time according to the following formula:
Enclosure volume [liters] x (e.g.) 5 purging cycles : flow rate [l/h] x 60 = purging time [minutes]
Example: Enclosure volume = 200 liters,

(purging air nozzle chosen ø 2.9 mm, input pressure 2 bar, control unit type 07-3711-1214)
Purging = 5 times the enclosure volume
Differential pressure output in sensor module = 8.3 mbar
Resulting flow rate according to diagram = 9800 l/h
Result:
Purging time = 200 l x 5 : 9800 l x 60 = 6.12 minutes = 6 minutes 10 seconds.
Please note: If you use purging air nozzles of 5.5 or 7.7 mm you might need a separate pressure switch
module.
6th10th Leakage air diagram
The leakage air needle valve

integrated in the digital valve can
be adjusted to the quantity needed
for the leakage air compensation
at any time.
(factory settings:
15 l/min., at 2 bar prepressure).
Adjustment:
To change the quantity of leakage

air, tighten the adjusting screw
(clockwise) accessible through the
purging air nozzle by means of a
screw driver.
Then turn the screw as needed to
achieve the necessary leakage air
value.
The curve shown in the table
shows the passband of the
leakage air quantity in dependence
of the turns
After adjustment, the enclosure
overpressure should range
between 2 and 3 mbar during
operation.

12
7th APEX 2003.MV control unit

Version with integrated proportional valve for small or separate EEx p enclosures (measuring heads,
mobile EEx p enclosures, displays etc.).
Special advantage: between APEX 2003.MV control unit and EEx p enclosure only two flexible cords with
an external diameter of 10 mm have to be connected. All control elements (valve, pressure switch,
controller) necessary for the EEx p operation come mounted within the APEX 2003.MV control unit.
7th1st Function
After installation of the connection cords between the APEX 2003.MV control unit and the EEx p enclosure
and after the connection of the supply voltage line as well as the pressurized gas line, the control unit
automatically controls and monitors the pressure inside of the enclosure during operation.
When the minimum operating pressure (switching value of "MIN A" and "MIN B") of the enclosure is
exceeded during the prepurging phase, and the flow rate of the pressure switch module (switching values
"DIFF A" and "DIFF B") sufficient, the pressure sensors "MIN A", "MIN B", "DIFF A" and "DIFF B" of the
sensor module transmit signals to the control module. The "MIN A", "MIN B", "DIFF A" and "DIFF B" LEDs
light up. The „Purging time running“ LED flashes. Now the residual purging time counts down to zero.
In order to prevent an extremely high flow resistance at the pressurized gas outlet of the control from
causing an excessive pressure inside of the enclosure, the purging process is interrupted as soon as the
„MAX“ value has been reached. A reactivation is possible only via switch S5 on the control module (turn to
0 and back to 1).
In order to prevent an extremely low pressurized gas flow rate from endangering the necessary purging
of the EEx p enclosure, any falling below the switching values „DIFF A“ or „DIFF B“ of the pressurized gas
flow rate causes the residual purging time to be reset to its initial value, the „Purging time running“ LED
goes out. The purging time restarts as soon as the reference flow rate has been reached.
At expiry of the purging time, operation is started automatically.
6. The digital valve closes and the leakage losses are compensated via the integrated needle valve (see
chapter 6.10).
7. The “Operation“ LED lights up.
8. Relay K 2/3 enables the electrical devices inside of the EEx p enclosure.
9. The residual purging time display goes out, the actual pressure inside of the enclosure is output on the
sensor module.
10. Relays K 4 and K 5 switch according to configuration.
If the enclosure pressure falls below the switching values "MIN A" or "MIN B" during operation, the relays
K4 and K5 drop out and the connected non-Ex devices are de-energized. A new prepurging time is
initiated simultaneously.
The EEx p devices are disconnected from the supply with a time-delay of about 5 seconds in order to
compensate for any pressurized gas fluctuations that may occur.
If the enclosure pressure exceeds the „MAX“ switching value during operation, terminals 34 and 35 are
disconnected from the supply without delay only as long as the overpressure is exceeded.
Note: The APEX 2003.MV control unit is equipped with a spring-controlled drain valve which opens at a
pressure of about 5 mbar. This means that „MAX“ can be reached only if the pressurized gas outlet has
been shut without permission.
Purging time and switching values of the pressure switches are set via the EEx i pushbuttons 11 to 13 of
the sensor module and the rotary switches S1 to S4 of the control module.
Relays K 4 and K 5 are freely programmable relays. They can be used for control tasks, e.g. interruption
of a 4-wire data line. The maximum switching capacity of the relays K4 and K5 lies at 100 mA/10 V per
contact.

13
7th2nd Structure
Pressurized gas outlet

Sensor module
Pressure switch module
Pressurized gas inlet

Plain text display
Pneumatic connections
LED status display Proportional valve
Rotary switch
Control module
Breathers
Cable glands
7th3rd Technical data
Certification: DMT 99 ATEX E 082

Marking: EEx e d ib [ia p] IIC T4
Enclosure material: Polyester, glass-fiber reinforced
Enclosure dimensions: 255 x 250 x 120 mm
Supply voltage: 230 VAC 48-62 Hz ( ±10% )
Option: 115 VAC ( ±10% )
Purging time: Adjustable from 0 to 99 min
Pressure sensors: Setting range: Basic settings:
DIFF A: 0-25 mbar 2.0 mbar

DIFF B: 0-25 mbar 2.0 mbar
MIN A: 0-25 mbar 1.0 mbar
MIN B: 0-25 mbar 1.0 mbar
MAX: 0-25 mbar 23.0 mbar
MAX 1: 0-25 mbar 20.0 mbar
DP 1 (operating pressure) 1.5 mbar
Relay K2/3 : Maximum switching capacity 5 A at cos ϕ = 1 / 253 VAC

OFF-delay (5 sec.)
Relays K4 and K5 : Maximum switching capacity 100 mA / 10 V
Terminals: Maximum 1 x 2,5 mm² per terminal
Cable glands: 4 x M20x1.5 black / 2 x M20x1.5 blue

14
Flow rate during purging time: see chapter 7.7.
Leakage air volume: Regulated via proportional valve, max. 2500 l/h
Connection of a separate temp. control: PT 100 (EEx-i)

Temperature switching point (option): + 40 °C
Weight: 8,1 kg
Climatic conditions:
Max. ambient temperatures: -20 °C to + 60 °C for storage and transport

+ 40 °C during operation
Maximum humidity: < 90 % relative humidity (annual average)
7th4th Construction
EEx p enclosure EEx p control unit APEX 2003.MV
Pressurized
air outlet
H L
DIFF A
DIFF B= MIN A-MIN B
MIN B
MIN A / MAX 1 / MAX
Pressurized
air inlet
Maximum 3 bar
7th5th Installation
The EEx p control unit APEX 2003.MV should be mounted on a vertical assembly wall. The connection to
the EEx p enclosure is established via tube with a diameter of 10 x 1 mm or via textile tube with internal
diameter of 9 mm. The connection can be as long as 10 m. Greater lengths are possible, depend, however
on a dimensional check.

15
7th6th APEX 2003.MV dimensions
Mounting holes in the enclosure: 200 H x 230 W ( 4 x ø 7 mm)
25 30
40 to the EEx p enclosure
from the EEx p enclosure
120 255
250
7th7th Purging time calculation
In this manual we calculate the purging gas quantity in dependence of the enclosure volume (volume-
dependent purging time). If tests are carried out via gas concentration measuring procedure, the resulting
purging time must be determined by a test engineer.
Volume-dependent purging time:
For the calculation of the purging time we need the flow rate of pressurized gas at the pressure switch on
the control unit. The actual flow rate is obtained by reading the differential pressure at the sensor module
during the purging phase.
Due to the mechanical structure of the proportional valve in the control unit the nominal width is given and
cannot be changed. The orifice plate has a fixed value of 8 mm.
After installation of the control unit carry out the following steps:
1. Activate purging.
2. Turn rotary switch S1 to position 3 (DIFF A).
3. Read differential pressure from sensor module.

16
4. Determine flow rate by means of the following diagram:
Differential pressure [mbar]
Pressurized gas flow rate [l/h]
5. Calculate prepurging time according to the following formula:
Enclosure volume [liters] x (e.g.) 5 purging cycles : flow rate [l/h] x 60 = purging time [minutes]
Example: Enclosure volume = 50 liters,

Purging = 5 times the enclosure volume
Differential pressure output in sensor module = 6.5 mbar
Resulting flow rate according to diagram = 2400 l/h
Result:
Purging time = 50 l x 5 : 2400 l x 60 = 6,25 minutes = 6 minutes 20 seconds.

17
8th Connection of the electrical lines
8th1st Control module type 07-7331-81.2/1100
Sensor Temperature Key ON/OFF Jumper for

module detector switch switch adjustment
PT 100
not not
occupied occupied
EEx i
1-12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Controll module
K2/3
K1 K4/K5
RS 485
25 26 27 28 29 31 32 39 41 43 45 46 44 42 40 35 34 47 48
not
occupied
L1
N
Inlet Data line Main power
PE
valve
Data EEx p-Gehäuse

line

18
9th Status table

The APEX 2003.____ control unit is constructed according to EN 50016:1995 and meets the
corresponding requirements. The different states and processes are described in the table below.
Status: The following requirements must Result when all requirements

be fulfilled: have been fulfilled:
Preparation for the activation of a) Supply voltage connected
the control unit
b) Internal pressure smaller than
MAX
c) Prepurging time determined
and set
d) Prepurging time not expired Control unit ready for prepurging
Prepurging running a) Internal pressure bigger than
MIN A
b) Internal pressure bigger than
MIN B
c) Internal pressure smaller than
MAX
d) Minimum flow rate bigger than
DIFF A
e) Minimum flow rate bigger than
DIFF B
f) Prepurging time not expired Prepurging time running
Prepurging over, voltage supply a) Internal pressure bigger than
for the non-Ex devices activated MIN A
b) Internal pressure bigger than
MIN B
c) Internal pressure smaller than
MAX
d) Prepurging time expired
e) ON/OFF switch closed Non-Ex devices enabled
10th Tolerances:
Pressure values: Using very precise pressure sensors we were able to limit the tolerances to the following
value.
Tolerance of each pressure sensor: +/- 2% of the switching value
Supply voltage: 230 VAC 48-62 Hz ( ±10% ) Option: 115 VAC ( ±10% )
Conversions: 100 Pa = 1 mbar = 0.001 N/m2 = 10 mm WS

1 bar = 0.1 MPa

19
11th Start-up
Prior to start-up please check all electrical units and devices installed within the EEx p enclosure:
- The individual devices must be sufficiently purged.

- The disconnection from the supply of the electrical devices mounted in the enclosure in case of
pressure drops must be guaranteed. This also applies to the interruption of data lines.
- The standard regulations for safety measures must be adhered to.
After installation of the APEX 2003.00 control unit and the digital valve on the EEx p enclosure or the
interfacing of the connection cords between the APEX2003.MV and the EEx p enclosure, first check the
enclosure for leaks.
11th1st Testing the enclosure for leaks
- Set the required input pressure on the pressure reducer.

- Connect supply voltage, switch on control unit via S5.
- Run prepurging cycle.
- Device changes over to operating pressure. Operating pressure is output on the sensor module
display.
- The enclosure should have an internal pressure of 3 to 4 mbar. If not:
increase the leakage air volume via the needle valve on the APEX 2003.00 control unit (see chapter
6.10 appropriate measures to eliminate the leak in the enclosure
in case of the APEX 2003.MV control unit take appropriate measures to eliminate the leak in the
enclosure.
11th2nd Testing the prepurging phase:
After having checked the enclosure for leaks, check the prepurging phase for its correct process.
- Set a longer prepurging time.
- Connect supply voltage and switch on the control unit.
- Slowly increase the input pressure of the EEx p system until the reference flow rate of the control unit
has been reached (see chapter 6.9 or. 7.7).
- Purging must start when the reference flow rate has been reached, i.e. the „Purging time running“ LED
flashes. It might be necessary to change the "DIFF A" and "DIFF B" switching values (see chapter
12.5)
- Reduce input pressure to 1.5 bar (2.5 bar)
- Reduce the flow rate to below reference flow rate. The LEDs "DIFF A", "DIFF B" and „Purging time
running“ must go out. If they don’t, check the switching values of "DIFF A" and "DIFF B" (see chapter
12.5ff).
- For safe operation increase the reference input pressure of the pressure reducer by a value of 0.5 bar.
11th3rd Testing the operating status:
- Wait until purging is over.

- Device changes over to the preset enclosure operating pressure.
- Slowly reduce the enclosure pressure by means of the pressure reducer.
- At a dropping below the minimum overpressure (switching value of "MIN A" and "MIN B") the "MIN A"
and "MIN B" LEDs must go out. It might be necessary to check the switching values of "MIN A" and
"MIN B" (see chapter 12.6).
- Increase the pressure inside of the enclosure to test the „MAX“ switching value.
- At a going beyond the maximum overpressure (switching value of "MAX"), the „MAX“ LED must light
up. It might be necessary to check the „MAX“ switching value (see chapter 12.7 ).

20
12th Parameter assignment

12th1st Rotary switch S 5 of the control module
Rotary switch S 5 is a reset switch and serves for the system restart in case of adjustment works.
12th2nd Rotary switch S 2 to S 4 of the control module/ purging time setting

Rotary switch S 2 to S 4 is used for the setting of the purging time. You have the possibility to set the
minutes in steps of 10 and steps of 1, the seconds can be set in steps of 10 only.
Set the prepurging time according to the following steps:

- Determine the purging time for an EEx p enclosure as shown in chapters 6.9 or 7.7.
- Connect a jumper to terminals 23 and 24.
- Check the set purging time by controlling the sensor module display.
- Remove the jumper on terminals 23 and 24.
- Restart the system by turning the rotary switch S5 (reset) to 0 and back to 1.
- The purging time determined must be output as reference value on the sensor module.
12th3rd Rotary switch S 1 of the control module

The rotary switch S 1 allows the display and adjustment of the different switching values of the control
unit. The following parameters are assigned to the switch positions:
S 1 switch positions: 0: Display of the pressure value “DP” inside of the enclosure
(LC display) 1: Display of switching value "DIFF A"
2: Display of switching value "DIFF B"
3: Display of switching value "MIN A"
4: Display of switching value "MIN B"
5: Display of switching value "MAX"
6: Display of switching value "MAX 1"
7: free
8: Display of the "K 4" functions
9: Display of the "K 5" functions
12th4th Pushbuttons S 11 to S 13 of the sensor module

The pushbuttons S 11 to S 13 let you change and store the switching values selected via S1. The values
are modified only after connection of the protective jumper to terminals 23 and 24.
Push the + or – button once to change the value by 0.1 mbar. If you keep down until the value has
changed 25 times, modification accelerates to steps of 1 mbar.
The – button allows you to lower the value to zero, the + button to increase the value to 100% of the
respective value. The stored value is marked with a "*".
Switch S 1 on positions 8 and 9: press + or – button to choose the relay.

Note: The selected function is taken over and stored only after system restart via the S5 switch.
0 Simultaneous switching with K 2

1 Switches when the DIFF A switching value has been exceeded
2 Switches when the DIFF B switching value has been exceeded
3 Switches when the MIN A switching value has been exceeded
4 Switches when the MAX switching value has been exceeded
5 Switches when the MAX 1 switching value has been exceeded
6 Switches when purging time counts down
7 Simultaneous switching with K 1
8 Switches when the keyswitch is positioned on jumping
9 Switches if there is an internal malfunction

21
12th5th Switching values "DIFF A" or "DIFF B"

When voltage is supplied and the pressurized gas line connected, the LEDs „DIFF A“ and „DIFF B“ light up
to indicate a sufficient flow rate through the APEX 2003 control unit. To change the switching values carry
out the following step:
- Turn S 1 to position 1 or 2.
- Press buttons + or – to adjust the "DIFF A" or "DIFF B" switching value as desired. "DIFF A" or "DIFF
B " LEDs as well as the LC display output the switching value.
- Confirm the modified switching value by pushing the „SET“ button on the sensor module.
- Remove the jumper between terminals 23 and 24.
12th6th Switching values "MIN A" or "MIN B"

While voltage is supplied and the pressurized gas is connected, the pressure inside of the enclosure is
adjusted to the „MIN A“ or „MIN B“ switching value by means of the pressure reducer. The switching
values are modified as follows:
- Turn S 1 to position 3 or 4
- Press buttons + or – to adjust the "MIN A" or "MIN B" switching value as desired. "MIN A" or "MIN B "
LEDs as well as the LC display output the switching value.
12th7th Switching value "MAX"

adjusted to the „MAX“ switching value by means of the pressure reducer. The switching value is modified
as follows:
- Turn S 1 to position 5
- Press buttons + or – to adjust the "MAX" switching value as desired. The "MAX " LED as well as the
LC display output the switching value.
12th8th Switching value "MAX 1"

The "MAX 1“ switch enables K1 when the internal pressure exceeds the switching value of "MAX 1"
(overpressure protection in combination with an electrical drain valve connected to K1).
adjusted to the „MAX 1“ switching value by means of the pressure reducer. The switching value is
modified as follows:
- Press buttons + or – to adjust the "MAX 1" switching value as desired. The "MAX 1" LED as well as the
LC display output the switching value.

22
12th9th DP (pressure inside of the enclosure)
APEX 2003.00:
The internal pressure of the enclosure results from the preset flow rate through the leakage air needle
valve, the seal-tightness of the enclosure and the opening pressure of the pressure switch module (5
mbar). If the pressure inside of the enclosure falls below the preset DP-value, the purging air nozzle of the
digital valve opens until the DP-value has been reached.
APEX 2003.MV:
The internal pressure of the enclosure is adjusted to the DP-value via the proportional valve.
The reference pressure is changed as follows:

- Press buttons + or – to adjust the switching value as desired.
13th Additional components
13th1st Temperature detector PT 100
An EEx i-PT 100 temperature detector can be connected to terminals 15 and 16 (in this case the control
module must be programmed via the RS 485 interface).
PT 100 operation: when a programmable temperature has been reached (can be changed via RS 485
only), both relay K1 and output A1 are enabled for the duration of the temperature increase. This
increased flow rate of pressurized gas serves as cooling agent for the EEx p enclosure.
Note: Above described temperature detection does not imply a monitoring of surface temperatures in the
sense of Ex-protection. The function serves as protection for electrical devices mounted in pressurized
enclosures. For the control of temperature in the sense of an Ex-protection, a separate temperature
detection mechanism must be installed.
13th2nd Keyswitch
For adjustment works, a keyswitch can be connected to terminals 17 and 18. Thanks to the intrinsically
safe interface, a standard keyswitch can be connected. An IP 65 keyswitch must be used if it is to be
mounted on the wall of the EEx p enclosure
During installation please pay attention on the EN 50020 prescribed distance of at least 50 mm between
intrinsically safe and non-safe power circuits of the components to be connected.
Information on the keyswitch:
The keyswitch allows you to jump the Ex-protection of the APEX 2003 control unit. This means that the
electrical device can be electrically activated for adjustment purposes without the connection of
pressurized gas.
The start-up with „bypass disconnector“ needs to be approved by the operating manager or by him
authorized person. Authorization may be given only if made sure that for the duration of the necessary
works there are no explosive atmospheres or the corresponding preventive measures against explosion
hazard have been taken (fire authorization).
For functions see next page 23

23
Follow below steps to activate the keyswitch function:
1. Switch on keyswitch. The LC display of the sensor module outputs the following message::
K2 function
Close K2
with "+"
2. Activate the keyswitch function by pressing the „+“ button of the sensor module. The pressure control
of the EEx p control unit is being jumped. The LC display of the sensor module outputs the following
message:
K2 function
Open K2
with "-"
3. Disactivate the function by switching off the keyswitch or by pressing the „-„ button of the sensor
module.
13th3rd ON/OFF switch
A switch can be connected to terminals 19 and 20 for the manual activation and disactivation of the
electrical devices within the pressurized enclosure. The intrinsically safe interface allows the connection of
a standard switch. If the key is mounted on the wall of the EEx p enclosure, an IP 65 switch must be used.
During installation please pay attention on the EN 50020 prescribed distance of at least 50 mm between
intrinsically safe and non-safe power circuits of the components to be connected.
If no switch is connected for the manual activation and disactivation of the electrical devices within the
pressurized enclosure, a jumper is needed on the terminals 19 and 20.
13th4th External pressure sensor and switch
Necessary for the application in „Containment Systems“. See separate APEX 2003.SI manual.
13th5th Safety jumper
Adjustments on the control module change the overall function. Any modification and storage of modified
values require a the connection of a jumper on terminals 23 and 24 prior to the adjustment works.
13th6th RS 485 interface
The RS 485 interface allows the modification of the parameters of the control unit.
Such parameters may be changed by authorized personnel only since these modifications may affect
the whole of the EEx p control unit functions.
13th7th Dust cover
54
22
Dust cover of black PP plastics, to be screwed into the spark arrester of the control unit.

24
14th Malfunctions
All external electrical and mechanical devices have been connected as instructed. In case of an error, first
check for correct configuration and connection of the electrical units.
Error Possible cause Measure

Device is not working, M
„ ains“ No voltage supply. Check voltage line.
LED not lit
Device defective. See chapter 3
Electrical devices are enabled Keyswitch enabled. Jumper on terminals 17 and 18. Disable keyswitch, remove jumper.
without prepurging phase.
No pressurized gas. Connect pressurized gas.
Digital valve/proportional valve does not open or is only Check digital valve/proportional valve for application of
partly open. supply voltage (terminals 31 to 33)
Check valve switch for foreign matters in the mechanical
part
No sufficient pressurized gas flow within the enclosure. Increase input pressure to reference value.
Check purging air nozzle for the correct value.
Check pressure switch "DIFF A", "DIFF B", "MIN A" and
"MIN B" of the control unit for the correct value .
„ urging time running“LED not
P
flashing during purging cycle. Reference pressure of the pressure reducer is not Check and eventually increase cross section of the
reached. pressurized gas-in line.
Pressurized gas outlet of the control unit has been Remove cover or reduce with appropriate measures.
shut without authorization or has been equipped with a
reduction.
Flexible cord between control unit and EEx p Seal flexible cord or increase its cross section.
enclosure (APEX 2003.MV) leaky or cross section too
small.
Enclosure leaky during prepurging phase due to Take measures to seal enclosure or reinforce enclosure
increased internal pressure. walls.
Valve does not close Check valve for disconnection from supply voltage
Check valve for foreign matters in the mechanical part.

Digital valve does not switch
over to small nozzle after
prepurging phase.
Temperature sensor connected, internal temperature Wait until increased flow rate has diminished the internal
too high. temperature.
Or: check preset temperature switching value.
ON/OFF switch resp. jumper not connected to Switch on ON/OFF switch or connect jumper to
terminals 19 and 20. terminals 19 and 20.
Control unit does not enable the
electrical devices after
prepurging phase. Internal pressure higher than the M
„ AX“switching Reduce air flow through leakage air nozzle.
value.
"MAX" switching value too low. Check "MAX" switching value.
Enclosure leaky, Seal enclosure.
Control unit switches off the use pressure switch "MIN A" and "MIN B".
electrical devices with a 5
second delay after purging. Leakage air nozzle of the digital valve too small. Increase air flow through leakage air nozzle.
Switching value "MIN A" or "MIN B" too high. Check switching value of "MIN A" or "MIN B".
Relays K4 or K5 do not Configuration of K4 or K5 Check configuration of K4 and K5
connect.
Enclosure leaky. Valve tries to keep the internal Seal enclosure or increase the opening of the leakage air
Digital valve connects briefly pressure by opening the purging air nozzle. nozzle.
during operation.
"DP" value too high. Reduce "DP" value.
The electrical devices do not Keyswitch activated. Disactivate keyswitch.
switch off during pressure
drops.

25
15th Checklist for the EEx p enclosure
Please observe the following items for pressurized enclosures.

Item Check i. O.
1. Visual inspection for enclosure damages
2. Install the EEx p system according to the instruction given in the manual
3. Make sure diagonal prepurging is carried out
4. Check the devices within the pressurized enclosure for their safe fastening
5. Make sure the devices are sufficiently purged
6. Pay special attention to devices with integrated capacitors (label)
7. Pay special attention to devices with hot surfaces (label)
8. Remove batteries/accumulators and replace by EEx e batteries
9. Establish the equipotential bonding of the EEx p enclosure
10. Check the wiring for the presence of blue cores or cables in the non-Ex i area
11. Check the wiring for installation according to the standards and directives
12. Check for eventual electrostatic charges
13. Check which keyboards can be used
14. Use viewing windows of safety glass (at least 2 layers) or of plastic (put label with „avoid electrostatic
15. See that the inside devices have a distance of more than 50 mm from the viewing window
16. If you use a keyswitch, put label „Keyswitch“
17. Check general state of the EEx p enclosure mountings (bases, canopy, cable glands)
18. List internally mounted devices
19. Supply voltage of the single devices must match mains voltage
20. Total power consumption of the devices less than the maximum switching capacity of the control unit
21. Check interruption of possible data lines
22. Check maximum surface temperature
23. Pressure test okay with around 15 mbar, no permanent deformation of the enclosure
24. Determine enclosure volume
25. Test prepurging phase
26. Test switching values of the control unit
27. Test the functions of the control unit
28. Check keyswitch functions
29. Put label on enclosure as prescribed by EN 50016
16th Address
BARTEC Componenten und Systeme
Max-Eyth-Straße 16
D - 97980 Bad Mergentheim
Tel.: +49 (07931) 597-210

Fax.: +49 (07931) 597-160

26
17th Selection chart:
Control unit: Order no:

APEX 2003.00 07-3711-121_ / _ 000
Power supply
1: 230 VAC
2: 115 VAC
Orifice
1: 2 mm
2: 5 mm
3: 8 mm
4: 12 mm (Standard)
5: 15 mm
6: 18 mm
Purge valve: Order no:

Digital valve 05-0056-000_
Purge nozzle
1: 2,0 mm
2: 2,8 mm
3: 3,9 mm
4: 5,5 mm
5: 7,7 mm
6: 10,7 mm
Purge valve: Order no:

Proportional valve 03-5110-000_
Purge nozzle
1: 2,0 mm
Control unit: Order no:

APEX 2003.MV 07-3711-221_ / _ 000
Power supply
1: 230 VAC
2: 115 VAC
Orifice
3: 8 mm

COOLING UNITS
FOR ELECTRIC CABINET
CONDIZIONATORE D’ARIA
PER ARMADIO ELETTRICO
ACONDICIONADORES
PARA EL ENFRIAMENTO DE CUADROS ELECTRICOS
CONDITIONNEURS
POUR LE REFROIDISSEMENT D’ARMOIRES ELECTRIQUES
KLIMAGERÄTE
FÜR DIE KÜHLUNG VON ELEKTROSCHRÄNKEN
MODELS:
EVE - EHE
STULZ SpA - via Torricelli, 3 37067 Valeggio sul Mincio (VR) - Italy
tel: +39 045 6331600 - fax: +39 045 6331635 - www.cosmotec.it
1
INDEX
Information concerning the manual Page 3
1. Unpacking and inspection Page 4
2. Unit identification Page 4
3. Operating principle Page 5
4. Precautions Page 5
5. Safety considerations Page 5
6. Precautions when moving the unit Page 5
7. Installation Page 6
8. Vibrations Page 7
9. Mechanical parts Page 7
10. Cooling components Page 7
11. Motors Page 7
12. Control, monitoring and satety components Page 7
13. Electrical connections Page 8
14. Start-up Page 8
15. Adjusting the temperature Page 8
16. Priority checks after starting the unit Page 8
17. Turning off the unit Page 8
18. Maintenance Page 8
19. Inactivity Page 9
20. Residual hazzards and emergency information Page 9
21. Disassembling the unit Page 10
22. Faults, likely causes, possible remedies Page 11
2
The following information is supplied in accordance with Standards CE73/23, 93/68, 89/392:
MANUFACTURE’S NAME AND ADDRESS:
STULZ SPA - VAI TORRICELLI 3 - 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO
DATA REGARDING THIS MODEL:
COOLING UNITS FOR ELECTRIC CABINETS IP54, to be installed vertically, as a wall-type unit or horizontally
YEAR OF MANUFACTURE: AS SHOWN ON THE TECHNICAL DATA PLATE ON THE UNIT
HOW TO CONSULT THIS MANUAL:

This documents consists of 2 volumes, the first of which contains general information valid for all models, whereas the
second contains information covering the technical aspects of the units as well as the product identification code.
In the event of any information updates to the first volume becoming necessary, such updates shall be inserted in the
second volume.
THIS MANUAL IS INTENDED FOR THE OWNER OF THE EQUIPMENT

PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR ITS INSTALLATION
PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR MANAGING THE PRODUCT
PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DAY-TO-DAY MAINTENANCE
PERSON RESPONSIBLE FOR ITS DISASSEMBLY
PURPOSE OF THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL

CORRECT MOVEMENT, performed by unskilled staff;
CORRECT INSTALLATION, performed by skilled personnel;
CORRECT MANAGEMENT, performed by skilled personnel;
CORRECT MAINTENANCE, performed by skilled personnel;
CORRECT ORDER FOR SPARE PARTS, performed by skilled personnel;
CORRECT DISPOSAL OF THE PRODUCT, performed by skilled personnel.
LIMITATIONS AS TO THE USE OF THIS MANUAL:

They apply to any operations to be performed by highly skilled personnel.
WHERE AND HOW TO STORE THIS MANUAL:

Inside the electric board or together with any other literature concerning the equipment which utilises the product, provided
it is a dry and clean place.
In the event of the manual being misplaced or damaged, the customer may require, for a fee, a new manual, by quoting the
model and serial number shown on the technical data plate, by contacting:
STULZ SPA - SERVIZIO CLIENTI - TORRICELLI 3, 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - PHONE 045 6331600- FAX 045
6331635
CURRENT TECHNOLOGY
This manual reflects technology current at the time of the product being marketed and shall not be deemed to be inadequate
for the sole reason that it has not been updated as a result of any new technological innovations.
UPDATES
STULZ SPA reserves the right to update the product and relevant manual without being responsible for updating previous
products and manuals other than in exceptional circumstances. To require or receive any updates of the instructions
manual or amendments thereto, which shall be deemed to be an integral part of the manual, please contact:
STULZ SPA - SERVIZIO CLIENTI - VAI TORRICELLI 3 - 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - PHONE 045 6331600- FAX 045
6331635
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION:

STULZ SPA - SERVIZIO CLIENTI - VAI TORRICELLI 3 - 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - PHONE 045 6331600- FAX 045
6331635.
Any suggestions or recommendations made by installers or users of the product for the purpose of improving the product
or the contents of this manual, will be greatly appreciated by the Manufacturer.
3
1. UNPACKING AND INSPECTION 2. UNIT IDENTIFICATION
STULZ products are despatched with delivery ex This unit can be correctly identified by the technical
works. All units have been individually checked in all data plate containing all the information for its correct
their parts, including the packaging, and have been use. Such a data plate is located on the right hand
carefully wrapped in appropriate cartons. side, facing the plastic grates.
Please inspect the unit upon its receipt. Please check Further to the manufacturer’s identification data and
whether the unit is on the carrier’s vehicle and is in the product trade-marks, the data plate contains the
the prescribed travelling position; otherwise make a following information:
note on the carrier’s docket.
We advise that the goods be accepted subject to
inspection. PRODUCER CE
Please check for any damage or oil stains on the
packaging; if any are present, make a note on the MODEL: This identifies the product family
carrier’s docket. SERIES: Product identification number
DATE:
Date on which the product is placed on the market
and date of commencement of warranty
VOLTAGE RATING:
Grid voltage to be supplied to the unit
CONTROL VOLTAGE:
Working voltage of the auxiliary circuits, if different
from the voltage rating
FREQUENCY: Grid frequency
START/OPERATION:
Current absorbed when starting the
compressor/Current absorbed during operation at the
maximum working temperature allowed.
RATED YIELD:
Cooling capacity of the unit with a room temperature
Before discarding it, please check the packaging for of 35°C and a cabinet temperature of 35°C, as per
any documentation or equipment parts. Standard DIN3168
Any damages found on the goods, must be reported ABSORBED POWER:
to the forwarding agent by registered mail within 8 Power absorbed with a cabinet temperature of 35°C
days from the receipt thereof. and a room temperature of 50°C
The carrier is liable for any damages suffered during AUTOMATIC SWITCH, TYPE C:
transport. Rating of the automatic switch to be installed by the
STULZ shall not be liable for any damages caused to installer
the goods by the carrier; however, it will do its best to INSIDE TEMPERATURE:
assist the customer. Minimum and maximum acceptable temperatures
This product may not be returned without prior allowed inside the cabinet
written consent by STULZ SPA. OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE:
For any assistance please contact: Minimum and maximum acceptable temperatures
GAS LOAD:
STULZ SPA Quantity of gas contained in the unit cooling circuit
SERVIZIO ASSISTENZA CLIENTI COOLANT TYPE:
VIA TORRICELLI 3 Commercial brand name of the coolant contained in
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO the unit cooling circuit
PHONE 045 6331600 - FAX 045 6331635 MAXIMUM PRESSURE:
Maximum pressure at which the cooling circuit can
NOTE: If the product does not require immediate function
installation or needs to be on forwarded to its final CABINET SIDE PROTECTION:
destination, please replace it in its packing, after IP protection level, in the direction of the cabinet on
inspecting it, and store it in a safe place. which it operates
ROOM SIDE PROTECTION: IP protection level, in
As an environmental concern, we recommend that the the direction of the room
packaging cartons be recycled and separated from WEIGHT: No-load weight of the unit
any plastic. OPERATION: Operational capacity of the unit
4
For any assistance or information concerning the unit If the unit has been loaded with the compressor in a
described in this manual, knowledge of its serial horizontal position, the lead-up time before starting
number is essential. The technical data plate is hot- the unit must be at least 8 hours.
forged on a plastic support which ensures high If traces of oil are present on the unit, which point to a
resilience of the text even in particularly difficult loss of coolant, on the inside or the outside, then the
environments. equipment must be thoroughly checked before
starting the unit and, if necessary, Stulz’s technical
3. OPERATING PRINCIPLE department should be contacted.
Do not operate the unit if there is a loss of coolant.
STULZ cooling units are designed for the cooling of
electric cabinets with IP54 protection level and are
suitable for operating in industrial environments. 5. SAFETY CONSIDERATIONS
Their use allows to eliminate problems caused by high The installation and handling of cooling units may be
temperatures, dirt and humidity which are present in hazardous as they form a pressurised system with
the environment. electric components.
The unit, which is basically made up of a sealed Only skilled personnel may repair, inspect or maintain
cooling circuit where the coolant circulates, is divided the cooling units.
into two sections, hermetically separated from each Unskilled staff may only replace the filter. All other
other, where the air in the environment and the air in operations must be performed by personnel who are
the cabinet are treated without coming into contact experienced and qualified in the maintenance of
with each other. cooling systems.
The system operates as follows: Before servicing this unit, refer to the instructions
The compressor compresses the coolant gas bringing contained in this manual, check the data on the data
it to a high pressure and temperature; plate and follow any other precaution to ensure
The hot gas, by going through the condenser, is optimum safety.
cooled and liquefied thus releasing heat to the air in
the environment. Pushed through the capillary or 6. PRECAUTIONS WHEN MOVING
thermal expansion valve, the liquid gas suffers a fall in
THE UNIT
pressure which makes it prone to evaporation which
takes place in the exchanger-evaporator when it To move this unit, when it is still packaged, use a
comes into contact with the warm air from the cabinet forklift or a system using chains or cables.
which is therefore cooled. When it is no longer packaged, use two M6 eyebolts,
attaching them to the upper part of the cooling unit,
where appropriate holes have already been arranged.
LEGENDA
MT1 Compressor MT2 Condenser fan

MT3 Evaporator fan TAAntifreeze thermostat
TR Regulating thermostat HP High pressure switch
C Condenser colil E Evaporator coil
4. PRECAUTIONS
The EVE series cooling units are designed to operate

as a wall-type unit and in an upright position. The
EHE series cooling units are designed to operate as
ceiling-type units and in a horizontal position. For
both models the compressor is and must always be in
an upright position.
The cooling units may not be used or transported in a
position other than that for which they have been
designed.
5
7. INSTALLATION
7.1 Unpack the unit taking care not to damage its
exposed parts. Before discarding it, check the
packaging for any parts or documents.
Check that the supply voltage is as designated.
7.2 Check that:
a) there is enough room for an easy application and
installation, both inside and outside the cabinet;
b) the cabinet is at least of the IP54 type;
c) the cabinet is clean on the inside;
d) the cabinet is not in the proximity of heat sources
or warm air flows;
e) the inside of the cabinet allows a proper air
circulation, preventing any recirculation;
For the EVE series cooling units the following
precautions must be followed:
f) the cooling unit must be installed as high as 7.6 For the horizontal EHE cooling units, it is
possible; necessary to unroll the safety condensate drainage
g) if installed on a door, make sure the hinges can pipe, some 2 metres long. This pipe, once the cooling
withstand the weight of the unit; unit has been installed, must be brought to the
h) make sure the electric cable is not torn or damaged outside through the bottom of the cabinet avoiding
when the door is closed; any twisted or uphill paths.
i) if the depth of the cooling unit prevents the door
from opening completely, arrange a stopper for such a
door.
7.3 Prior to servicing the cabinet, disconnect power

supply to the same.
Prior to drilling holes or making cuts on the cabinet,
make sure that holes, screws, cables, etc. do not
interfere with the equipment which has already been
installed.
Make cuts on the cabinet panels by following the
relevant template.
7.4 Once the anchoring holes have been drilled,
7.8 Rest the cooling unit on the cabinet and secure it
mount the eyebolts to handle the unit.
with the appropriate screws.
7.5 Glue the adhesive gasket around the edges of the
holes drilled on the cabinet;
6
8. VIBRATIONS anticorrosion plastic materials, with class B insulation
and class 1 protection.
The cooling unit does not produce any significant
The motor protection is IP44, in accordance with
vibrations as the parts which generate them are
Standard DIN40500 whereas the safety rate complies
installed on anti-vibration devices.
with Standards DIN30110.
Noise levels are consistent with Standard DIN 45635.
9. MECHANICAL PARTS
9.1 STRUCTURE 12. CONTROL, MONITORING AND
The structure is manufactured in powder varnished SAFETY COMPONENTS
sheet, unless otherwise specified, with self- All the equipment is inspected and calibrated at the
supporting panels which make access to the various Company’s works and usually no further adjustments
parts extremely convenient. or servicing are required.
If, due to special requirements, any amendments to
10. COOLING COMPONENTS the calibration of the automatisms are required, these
These are interconnected by copper piping, shall be carried out only by skilled personnel
appropriately welded to ensure a greater seal. experienced with this product, subject to notice being
10.1 COOLANT GAS given to STULZ spa.
This is R134a (Tetrafluoroethane) The cooling unit is provided with a set of monitoring
It is neither toxic nor flammable and is not harmful to and control parts which ensure its proper operation.
the ozone layer. The triggering of any of the automatic safety devices
For some models, which are not included in the indicates a faulty operation and therefore it is
catalogue, coolant R22 may be used (HCFC). essential that the cause be removed. It is illegal to
10.2 COMPRESSOR make electrical by-passes on the safety equipment.
This is an alternative, airtight compressor. Such an action, further to being dangerous, results in
the product warranty becoming null and void.
10.3 CONDENSER 12.1 HIGH PRESSURE SAFETY SWITCH
This part allows the release of the heat of the coolant This brings the compressor to a halt when the inside
gas in the environment. It consists of an exchange pressure of the circuit exceeds the calibration level. It
pack with copper piping and aluminium fins. is not required in low power models.
10.4 GAS FILTER 12.3 ADJUSTMENT THERMOSTAT
This is a mixed mechanical/chemical filter and serves This is a gas loaded mechanical thermostat. Its bulb is
the purpose of filtering the coolant which goes positioned at the air intake point of the cabinet and it
through it, at the same time eliminating humidity measures and controls the temperature providing the
particles. go ahead to the compressor. In standard models, it
10.5 CAPILLARY OR THERMAL EXPANSION has pre-set calibration levels which adjust the cooling
VALVE unit’s operating range to the rated levels. In some
This part causes a drop in the pressure of the coolant models the mechanical thermostat may be replaced
in its run towards the evaporator. with an electronic thermostat whose specifications, if
10.6 EVAPORATOR there is one in the cooling unit, are outlined in part
This is the part where the transfer of the heat, two of the manual.
contained in the air in the cabinet, to the coolant gas 12.4 ANTI-FREEZE THERMOSTAT
takes place . Similar to the adjustment thermostat, it is calibrated in
It consists of copper pipes and aluminium fins. such a way as to prevent the possible build-up of ice
on the exchanger-evaporator. It is present in
11 MOTORS horizontal models and on units where it has been
11.1 COMPRESSOR shown to be essential as a result of appropriate tests.
Electric motor with squirrel cage rotor, placed on the 12.5 CONTACTOR
inside of the compressor. It is cooled by the cold gas This is found in those models where it is required in
flowing back from the evaporator. It is mounted on view of the unit’s power or parts. It controls the
anti-vibration springs in order to damp any vibrations. motors through operations of the auxiliary circuit. It
11.2 FANS complies with Standard IEC947-4-1.
These may be of different types depending on the 12.6 TRANSFORMER
model. They are either: In models with greater power it is used to transform
multiblade axial, with outside rotor on bearings, grid voltage into auxiliary circuit voltage.
dynamically balanced; 12.7 AUTOTRANSFORMER
compact axial, on bearings; This is found in those models which function at a
radial, with plastic or metal rotor, on bearings. voltage other than the standard voltage. It is
These fans are manufactured in accordance with manufactured in compliance with Standards EN60742
Standard EN 60 335 1. They are treated with and CEI14-6.
7
13. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS
13.1Check the grid voltage.
13.2Switch off voltage before servicing the system.
13.3 Make the necessary connections by using
the cables supplied with the unit. Connection to the
grid must take place through an omnipolar knife
switch, or overload cutout, installed by the installer
with a minimum 3 mm gap between the open contacts.
13.4 Check that the connection cables, should the
standard cables have been replaced, have a section
suitable for the cooling unit’s power and distance;
refer Standard EN60204.
13.4 Check that the supply voltage of the cooling unit
is disconnected when opening the cabinet doors.
14. START-UP
Supply voltage to the cooling unit.
If the cabinet temperature is lower that the
temperature set on the thermostat, the cooling unit’s
fan will cause air recirculation in the cabinet. If the
cabinet temperature is greater than the temperature
set on the thermostat, the compressor and outside fan
(condenser) will start. These will operate until the
16. PRIORITY CHECKS AFTER
cabinet temperature reaches a level lower that the
temperature set on the thermostat. STARTING THE UNIT
Beware! Check that the air being released from the condenser
Avoid sudden stops and re -starts. At least 3 minutes into the environment flows regularly without being
should elapse between a stop and the next re-start. sucked again into the cooling unit.
17. TURNING OFF THE UNIT

15. ADJUSTING THE TEMPERATURE To turn off the unit, disconnect the voltage from the
Note: system.
Excessively low cabinet temperatures may cause
serious problems to the cabinet parts and require an 18. MAINTENANCE
increased power consumption and greater cooling This unit, which is suitable to operate in an industrial
power. environment, requires a low degree of maintenance.
The adjustment should be made by experienced However, low as it may be, maintenance still needs to
personnel by acting on the thermostat pin with a be carried out.
screwdriver after switching off the voltage and Failure to service the unit, further to affecting the
removing the cooling unit’s lid. unit’s operation, will cause the STULZ warranty to
Standard products have a thermostat which does not become null and void.
allow adjustments smaller than 25°C and greater than WARNING! Before servicing the unit, make sure no
45°C. For temperatures other than those in the pre-set voltage is being supplied to the latter.
range, contact our service department. 18.1 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The thermostat has a 4°C hysteresis, therefore the 18.1.1 Two monthly
compressor will start at a temperature 4°C greater than Check that the unit’s condensate drainage system is
the stopping temperature. perfectly clear and operational.
After the adjustment, close the lid and re-supply 18.1.2 Yearly
voltage. Check that the fans do not show signs of overheating
or abnormal vibrations.
Check that the exchangers are efficient and not soiled.
18.1.3 After each scheduled and unscheduled

service:
check that the condensate drainage system is
perfectly efficient.
18.2 EXTRAORDINARY MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULE
8
Every 3 years or every 10,000 hours of operation, a Increase ventilation capacity to remove combustion
general overhaul of the unit must be carried out at the gases.
STULZ works or any other approved service centre, Advise appropriate department.
at the customer’s own expense. This maintenance is 20.2 HAZARDS ARISING FROM THE PRODUCT
covered by the provisions concerning liability for COMING INTO CONTACT WITH THINGS OR
damages caused by a defective product. PERSONS
18.3 HOW TO CLEAN TO UNIT No hazards exist.
Do not use acid or caustic substances to clean any 20.3 HAZARDS ARISING FROM ELECTRICAL
part of the cooling unit. Should you decide to replace FAULTS
the filter, the spare filter must have the same thickness
and density specifications as the original. 20.3.1 SAFETY STANDARDS FOR ELECTRICAL
A set of spare filters may be requested from Stulz’s EQUIPMENT - INTRODUCTION
service department. Causes of electrical hazards are well known and their
The inner parts of the cooling unit, either on the room prevention is not difficult provided constant care is
or cabinet side, must be cleaned with a liquid applied.
detergent and compressed air having a pressure not In order to reduce such risks, operators must be
greater than 4 bar, with the unit properly earthed. informed of potential hazards and trained on the use
of safety procedures.
19. INACTIVITY 20.3.2 TASKS ALLOCATED TO OFFICERS-IN-
CHARGE
If the unit remains inactive for lengthy periods of time,
Officers-in-charge must be informed of any potential
it is necessary to drain any condensate residue and
hazards existing in the system and must monitor
carry out a general cleaning procedure.
electric equipment operators. This monitoring
function involves identifying possible danger
20. RESIDUAL HAZARDS AND situations and investigating problems encountered by
EMERGENCY INFORMATION staff during maintenance procedures.
This equipment has been designed so as to minimise Each faulty part must be repaired or replaced
any danger situations. Such situations arise mainly immediately.
from an improper use of the product and the failure to An officer-in-charge must insist on the use of safety
comply with installation, use and maintenance procedures without tolerating or accepting any
standards. shortcuts, as this can cause harm to persons and
This information must be made known to all staff equipment.
operating this equipment and in the proximity thereof. 20.3.3 HIGH VOLTAGE
20.1 GENERAL SAFETY PROVISIONS Contact with high voltage circuits can cause burns,
All staff responsible for testing, handling and shock, loss of consciousness and even the victim’s
servicing this equipment, must be familiar with the electrocution.
following safety provisions: This may happen because of the lack of awareness of
Hazards tags and notices must be readily visible in the dangers connected with the use of electrical
any potential hazard areas. equipment. The damage suffered by the human body
A monitoring service must be arranged in such hazard depends on the amount of power as well as on the
areas. duration and path followed by the current inside the
Supervisors must keep in constant touch with body.
monitors. 20.3.4 SAFETY STANDARDS TO COMPLY WITH
Transit areas, doorways and stairways, in the WHEN THE EQUIPMENT IS TURNED OFF
proximity of the equipment must be kept clear. Before handling the equipment, disconnect all
Emergency exits must be kept clear at all times. circuits.
Slippery areas, which are a hazard to staff, must be Make sure that no voltage whatsoever is present in
covered with anti-slip material. the circuit.
For any specific activity, specific tools and Clean and dry the whole area.
procedures must be used. Remove pins, rings, brackets or any accessories
Testing tools and equipment must be kept in good which may obstruct operations or turn into a potential
working order. electrical conductor.
Staff must have a detailed knowledge of methods and Earth dump or short circuit the condenser terminals
procedures used in the event of a fire (make connected with the deactivated circuit.
fireextinguishers readily accessible). Remove the fuses only after the circuit has been
The following steps must be undertaken at the deactivated.
outbreak of a fire: 20.3.5 SAFETY STANDARDS TO COMPLY WITH
turn off the electric power supply from the fire WHEN SERVICING LIVE EQUIPMENT
affected part. Add the following provisions to those under items 2,
3 and 4 above:
9
Staff must never operate alone. Avoid high concentrations of coolant as they can
If possible, use only one hand to perform work cause the same effects as suffocation. In this event,
required. Check wires and instruments regularly. the victim must be evacuated from the saturated area
Use only approved procedures to bypass the and subjected to mouth-to-mouth resuscitation;
interlocks. Ensure that operators are perfectly familiar Avoid brazing or welding in the presence of coolant
with the equipment parts and maintenance vapours. Do not place gas heating equipment or
procedures, before handling the unit. electrical radiators in places where coolant gas
Use a pair of protective gloves. Open all contact vapours may be present;
which feed power to the equipment before recording Do not smoke in the presence of coolant gas vapours;
resistance levels. Do not overheat gas cylinders; do not exceed the
Check that there is no high voltage in the low voltage coolant gas limit indicated on the technical data plate;
circuits. The cooling system must be handled with care as it
Do not use magnetic tools in the proximity of strong may contain acids as a result of motor burnout.
magnetic fields. Therefore, protective gloves, goggles and clothing
20.3.6 SAFETY STANDARDS TO COMPLY WITH must be worn;
WHEN SERVICING THE UNIT Eliminate pressure from the entire cooling system
If continuous operation is not required, the system before brazing or welding. Welding when the circuit is
must be turned off. under pressure is extremely dangerous due to the risk
Before commencing work, the following is required: of the piping rupturing and molten material being
Check that the maintenance technician is not carrying projected by the coolant pressure.
any objects which may act as conductors; 20.5 FIRE HAZARDS
Inspect the work area to make sure the floor is clean No direct danger.
and dry; The coolant gas, in the presence of live flames,
Check work tools. They must be suitable for their generates toxic and corrosive substances. In view of
designated task and in good working order so as to the relatively low quantities of gas contained in the
ensure safe maintenance operations. cooling unit, to prevent hazards just place the unit in
Check that all gauges are regularly calibrated. adequately ventilated areas.
Check servicing procedures before commencing work 20.6 TOXIC SUBSTANCES
by inspecting the wiring diagram and visualising the The gas contained in the unit is environment-friendly
system structure. When carrying out electrical and is called R134 (tetrafluoroethane). Its quantity is
maintenance procedures, the following is required: small and the cooling circuit is completely sealed.
The maintenance technician must be familiar with high During testing, all leaks greater than 15 grams per year
voltage circuits; No resistance operations are to be are checked and eliminated.
carried out on live circuits; The coolant gas manufacturer defines as harmless gas
Use only one hand to operate on live circuits; concentrations smaller than 1/1000.
Earth all instrument terminals before operating on live In the event the unit is not installed in ventilated or
circuits; The above recommendations must be strictly adequately sized rooms and a rapid leak of refrigerant
adhered to. Maintenance operations shall be deemed becomes obvious, it will be necessary to evacuate
to have been completed only when all parts have staff and ventilate the premises.
been re-installed and the product had regained its 20.7 HAZARDOUS FLUIDS
original appearance. The unit does not contain any fluids which are a
20.4 SAFETY STANDARDS TO COMPLY WITH hazard to people.
WHEN SERVICING THE COOLING CIRCUIT During operation, the cooling unit produces
The coolant used on this equipment may be condensate which is drained into the environment if it
dangerous if not used correctly. Therefore it is is not dissipated by the dissipator. It is recommended
necessary to adopt certain precautions when that this fluid be adequately piped so as to prevent
handling this substance. possible hazards to people in the area.
Do not drain, stock or use coolant in the presence of
live flames; it is not poisonous, however, if it comes 21. DISASSEMBLING THE UNIT
into contact with live flames, the combustion This unit must be disassembled by authorised
produces corrosive toxic gases; organisations. STULZ spa avails itself of equipment
Do not expose eyes to contact with the coolant as suitable for the recovery of fluids which are present
this may reach temperatures as low as -40°C; inside the cooling system and for the subsequent
Do not expose skin to contact with the coolant fluid. disassembly and recovery of the product parts.
Should that happen, the injury may be treated with
the same methods as those used for frostbite;
10
22. FAULTS - CAUSES - REMEDIES
22.1 FAILS TO COOL
.1 No part is working;
.1 Lack of voltage to the unit;
.2 Check that doors and switches are closed.
.2 Compressor, condenser fan and evaporator fan working;
.1 Cooling system has run out of gas;
Contact STULZ technician or service department.
.2 Compressor broken down mechanically;
Contact STULZ technician or service department.
.3 Compressor and outside fan working, inside fan not working;
.1 Fan electric condenser not working;
.1 Replace fan electric condenser;
.2 Evaporator fan broken down;
.1 Replace fan.
.4 Outside fan and inside fan working, compressor not working;
.1 Where present, compressor thermo amperometer broken down;
.1 Replace thermo amperometer and check efficiency of the compressor’s electrical parts;
.2 Compressor relay or starter PTC broken down;
.1 Replace compressor relay or starter PTC;
.3 Where present, start-up condenser broken down;
.1 Replace start-up condenser;
.4 Compressor motor broken down;
.1 Contact STULZ cooling system technician or service department.
.5 High pressure switch broken down;
.1 Contact STULZ cooling system technician or service department;
.6 Where present, compressor remote control switch broken down
.1 Replace remote control switch.
.5 Inside and outside fan and compressor working;:
.1 Adjustment thermostat broken down or calibrated at a temperature exceeding that in the
cabinet;
.2 When present, anti-freeze thermostat broken down.
22.2 FAILS TO COOL SUFFICIENTLY

.1 Inside fan working, compressor and outside fan working intermittently
.1 Service anti-freeze thermostat;
.1 Clean evaporator
.2 Check for any external causes which may limit the airflow to the inside circuit;
.2 Where present, service low pressure switch;
.1 Insufficient gas load in cooling circuit;
Contact STULZ cooling system technician or service department;
.3 Where present, solenoid valve broken down;
.1 Replace solenoid valve coil;
.2 Contact STULZ cooling system technician or service department;
.2Condenser fan, evaporator fan working, compressor working intermittently;
.1 Where present, service high pressure switch;
.1 Room temperature exceeding maximum temperature as shown on technical data plate;
.1 Ventilate room;
.2 Contact STULZ service department;
.2 Dirty heat exchange condenser;
Clean exchanger;
.3 Air short-circuit;
.1 Check that no obstruction or obstacle are causing the expelled air to short-
circuit;
.2 Check that requirements concerning minimum distance from a wall, from the
ceiling, from the electric cabinet or from any other air cooling unit are met as
per this manual;
11
.2 Service compressor heat protector;
.1 Air temperature in cabinet exceeding maximum temperature shown on unit’s
technical dataplate;
.2 Same causes and relevant remedies as outlined under items 22.2.2.1.1/2/3/;
.3 Inside fan working, outside fan not working, compressor working intermittently;
.1 Fan electric condenser broken down;
Replace electric condenser;
.2 Outside fan broken down;
Replace condenser fan.
22.3 EXCESSIVE CONDENSATE BUILD-UP;

.1 Cabinet with protection level lower than IP54;
.1 Check that the self-adhesive seal between the cooling unit and the cabinet has been
correctly applied;
.2 Check that the unit’s locking panels have been correctly installed;
.3 Check that there are no openings in the cabinets.
12
INDICE
Informazioni sul manuale pagina 14

1. Disimballo e controllo pagina 15
2. Identificazione dell’unità pagina 15
3. Principio di funzionamento pagina 16
4. Precauzioni pagina 16
5. Considerazioni sulla sicurezza pagina 16
6. Precauzioni sulla movimentazione dell’unità pagina 16
7. Installazione pagina 16
8. Vibrazioni pagina 18
9. Componenti meccanici pagina 18
10. Componenti frigoriferi pagina 18
11. Motori pagina 18
12. Componenti di comando, controllo, sicurezza pagina 18
13. Collegamenti elettrici pagina 19
14. Avviamento pagina 19
15. Regolazione della temperatura pagina 19
16. Primi controlli dopo la partenza pagina 19
17. Spegnimento pagina 19
18. Manutenzione pagina 19
19. Soste in inattività pagina 20
20. Informazione sui pericoli residui e le situazioni di emergenza pagina 20
21. Smantellamento dell’unità pagina 22
22. Inconvenienti, cause, rimedi pagina 23
.
13
Ai sensi delle Direttive CE73/23, 93/68, 89/392, si forniscono le seguenti informazioni:
NOME ED INDIRIZZO DEL FABBRICANTE:
STULZ SPA - VAI TORRICELLI 3 - 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO
DATI INFORMATIVI SUL MODELLO:
CONDIZIONATORI PER ARMADI ELETTRICI IP54, per applicazione verticale, da parete od orizzontale
ANNO DI COSTRUZIONE: RIPORTATO SULLA TARGA TECNICA DELL’UNITA’
COME CONSULTARE IL MANUALE:

Questo documento è costituito da 2 fascicoli, dei quali il primo riporta informazioni generali valide per tutti i modelli ed il
secondo riporta, oltre al codice di identificazione del prodotto, le informazioni relative agli aspetti tecnici dell’unità.
Nel caso si rendesse necessaria una integrazione di informazioni al primo fascicolo, esse saranno inserite nella seconda
parte.
DESTINATARI DI QUESTO MANUALE
PROPRIETARIO DELL’APPARECCHIATURA
RESPONSABILE DELL’INSTALLAZIONE
RESPONSABILE GESTIONE DEL PRODOTTO
RESPONSABILE MANUTENZIONE ORDINARIA
RESPONSABILE DELLO SMANTELLAMENTO
FINALITÀ’ DELLE INFORMAZIONI CONTENUTE NEL PRESENTE MANUALE

CORRETTA MOVIMENTAZIONE, attuata da personale generico;
CORRETTA INSTALLAZIONE, fatta da personale specializzato;
CORRETTA GESTIONE, fatta da personale specializzato;
CORRETTA MANUTENZIONE, fatta da personale specializzato;
CORRETTA ORDINAZIONE DEI RICAMBI, fatta da personale specializzato;
CORRETTO SMALTIMENTO DEL PRODOTTO, fatto da personale specializzato.
LIMITI DI UTILIZZO DEL MANUALE:

Si riferisce ad operazioni che richiedono personale professionalmente qualificato.
DOVE E COME CONSERVARE IL MANUALE:

All’interno del quadro elettrico o unitamente agli altri fascicoli della macchina utilizzatrice del prodotto, purché in luogo
asciutto e pulito.
In caso di smarrimento o danneggiamento del manuale, richiedere a pagamento, un nuovo fascicolo, citando il modello ed
il numero di serie, riportati sulla targa tecnica, a:
STULZ SPA - SERVIZIO CLIENTI - VIA TORRICELLI 3, 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600- FAX 045
6331635
STATO DELLA TECNICA:

Questo manuale rispecchia lo stato della tecnica al momento della commercializzazione e non può essere considerato
inadeguato solo perché non aggiornato in base a nuove esperienze.
AGGIORNAMENTI
La STULZ SPA si riserva il diritto di aggiornale la produzione ed il relativo manuale senza l’obbligo di aggiornare manuali
e produzione precedenti se non in casi eccezionali. Per richiedere o ricevere eventuali aggiornamenti del manuale di
istruzione o integrazioni, che saranno da considerare parte integrante del manuale, contattare:
STULZ SPA - SERVIZIO CLIENTI - VAI TORRICELLI 3 -
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL 045 6331600- FAX 045 6331635
PER ULTERIORI INFORMAZIONI:

STULZ SPA - SERVIZIO CLIENTI - VIA TORRICELLI 3
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL 045 6331600- FAX 045 6331635.
Segnalazioni o proposte, suggerite da installatori o utilizzatori del prodotto, per migliorare il prodotto o il contenuto del
presente manuale, saranno particolarmente gradite dal Costruttore.
IN CASO DI CESSIONE DEL PRODOTTO:

Segnalare, alla STULZ SPA, l’indirizzo del nuovo proprietario onde poter permettere l’invio di eventuali nuove
integrazioni del manuale, in caso contrario la STULZ SPA si ritiene sollevata da eventuali responsabilità.
14
1. DISIMBALLO E CONTROLLO 2. IDENTIFICAZIONE DELL’UNITA’
I prodotti STULZ sono spediti con resa franco fabbrica. Questa unità può essere correttamente identificata
Tutte le unità sono state singolarmente controllate in attraverso la targa tecnica, che contiene tutti gli estremi
ogni loro parte, compreso l’imballo e attentamente per un uso corretto, situata sul fianco destro,
avvolte in appositi cartoni. guardando le griglie in plastica.
Controllare immediatamente l’unità appena ricevuta. Oltre agli estremi di identificazione del produttore ed i
Fare attenzione se l’unità è sul mezzo del trasportatore, marchi del prodotto, la targa riporta le seguenti
che sia nella posizione di trasporto prescritta, in caso informazioni:
contrario segnalarlo sulla bolla del trasportatore.
COSTRUTTORE CE
MODELLO: Identifica la famiglia del prodotto

SERIE: Numero di identificazione del prodotto
DATA: Data di immissione nel mercato ed inizio del
periodo di garanzia
TENSIONE NOMINALE: Tensione di rete che deve
essere fornita all’unità
TENSIONE DI COMANDO: Tensione di lavoro dei
circuiti ausiliari, se diversa dalla nominale
FASE: Fase della tensione
FREQUENZA: Frequenza di rete
AVVIAMENTO/MARCIA: Corrente assorbita
all’avviamento del compressore/Corrente assorbita in
Si consiglia di accettare la merce con riserva di marcia alla massima temperatura di lavoro ammessa
controllo. RESA NOMINALE: Capacità di raffreddamento
Verificare l’assenza di ogni danno o macchia di olio dell’unità con una temperatura ambiente di 35°C ed una
sull’imballo, se presente segnalarlo sulla bolla del temperatura in armadio di 35°C, secondo DIN3168
trasportatore. POTENZA ASSORBITA: Potenza assorbita alle
Controllare l’imballo, prima di gettarlo, che non condizioni di temperatura armadio 35°C ed ambiente
contenga documenti o parti di macchina. 50°C
Ogni danno riscontrato sulla merce, deve essere INTERRUTTORE AUTOMATICO TIPO C: Valore
evidenziato al corriere, a mezzo raccomandata, entro 8 dell’interruttore automatico da installare a cura
giorni dal ricevimento. dell’installatore
Di ogni danno sostenuto durante il trasporto ne è TEMPERATURA INTERNA: Temperatura interna
responsabile il trasportatore. La STULZ non potrà all’armadio, minima e massima ammesse
rispondere dei danni provocati alla mercanzia, dal TEMPERATURA ESTERNA: Temperatura minima e
trasportatore, anche se farà il possibile per assis tere il massima ammessa
cliente, in questo frangente. CARICA DI GAS: Quantità di refrigerante contenuta
Questo prodotto non potrà essere reso senza nel circuito frigorifero dell’unità
approvazione scritta della STULZ SPA TIPO DI REFRIGERANTE: Nome commerciale del
Per qualsiasi assistenza contattare: refrigerante contenuto nel circuito frigorifero dell’unità
STULZ SPA MASSIMA PRESSIONE: Massima pressione alla quale
SERVIZIO ASSISTENZA CLIENTI il circuito frigorifero può operare
VIA TORRICELLI 3 PROTEZIONE LATO ARMADIO: Brado di protezione
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - VR - I IP, verso l’armadio su cui opera
TEL. 045 6331600- FAX 045 6331635 PROTEZIONE LATO AMBIENTE: grado di protezione
IP, verso l’ambiente
NOTA: Se il prodotto non deve essere immediatamente PESO: Peso dell’unità a vuoto
installato o deve essere trasportato alla destinazione FUNZIONAMENTO: Operatività dell’unità
finale, dopo il controllo, rimetterla nel proprio imballo
ed immagazzinarla in luogo protetto. Per qualsiasi necessità o informazione relativa all’unità
Si invita, per il rispetto della natura, a recuperare il del presente manuale è indispensabile la conoscenza
cartone di imballo e separarlo dalla plastica. del numero di matricola. La targa tecnica è stampata, a
caldo, su un supporto plastico che garantisce una
lunga permanenza delle scritte anche in ambienti
particolarmente gravosi.
15
accensione ed eventualmente interpellare il
3. PRINCIPIO DI FUNZIONAMENTO dipartimento tecnico STULZ.
Non far funzionare l’unità se si riscontra una perdita di
I condizionatori STULZ sono unità progettate per il
refrigerante.
raffreddamento degli armadi elettrici, con grado di
protezione IP54 e sono adatti ad operare in ambienti
industriali. Il loro uso consente l’eliminazione dei
5. CONSIDERAZIONI SULLA
problemi dovuti alle alte temperature, allo sporco ed SICUREZZA
all’umidità presente nell’ambiente. L’installazione e la conduzione di unità per il
L’unità, fondamentalmente costituita da un circuito raffreddamento può essere pericolosa in quanto trattasi
frigorifero stagno, nel quale circola il refrigerante, è di un sistema sotto pressione, con componenti elettrici.
divisa in due sezioni, ermeticamente separate, dove Solo personale specializzato potrà riparare, controllare o
viene trattata l’aria ambiente e l’aria dell’armadio senza assistere i condizionatori.
che vengano in contatto tra loro Il personale non specializzato potrà effettuare la sola
Il sistema funziona come segue: sostituzione del filtro. Tutte le altre operazioni devono
Il compressore comprime il gas frigorigeno, portandolo essere eseguite da personale esperto e qualificato nella
ad una alta pressione e temperatura; manutenzione di apparati frigoriferi.
Il gas, caldo, attraversando il condensatore, viene Prima di intervenire su questa unità osservare le
raffreddato e liquefatto cedendo calore all’aria indicazioni di questo manuale, controllare i dati di targa
ambiente. Spinto attraverso il capillare , o la valvola ed ogni altra precauzione per garantire la massima
termostatica, il gas liquido subisce una caduta di sicurezza.
pressione che lo predispone all’evaporazione che
avviene nello scambiatore evaporatore quando a 6. PRECAUZIONI SULLA
contatto con l’aria calda proveniente dall’armadio che
viene così raffreddata.
MOVIMENTAZIONE DELL’UNITA’
Per movimentare questa unità, quando imballata,
TUBO CAPILLARE
utilizzare un carrello di sollevamento o un sistema
dotato di cinghie o funi.
Aria Aria Quando non imballata, utilizzare 2 golfari di
ambiente armadio
sollevamento, M6, fissandoli sulla parte superiore del
condizionatore, dove i fori sono già predisposti.
LEGENDA
MT1 Compressore MT2 Vent. condensatore.

MT3 Vent. evaporatore TA Termostato antigelo
TR Termostato di regolazione HP Pressostato
sicurezza
C Condensatore E
Évaporatore
4. PRECAUZIONI
I condizionatori della serie EVE, sono progettati per
operare a parete ed in posizione verticale. I
condizionatori della serie EHE sono progettati per
operare a soffitto, in posizione orizzontale. Per entrambi 7. INSTALLAZIONE
i modelli il compressore è e deve rimanere sempre, in
7.1 Disimballare l’unità facendo attenzione a non
posizione verticale.
danneggiare le parti esposte. Verificare che l’imballo,
I condizionatori non possono essere utilizzati o
prima di gettarlo, non contenga parti o documenti.
trasportati in posizione diversa da quella per cui sono
Verificare che la tensione di alimentazione sia quella
stati progettati.
prescritta.
Se l’unità è stata coricata, con il compressore
7.2 Accertarsi che:
orizzontale, il tempo di attesa prima della accensione,
a) esista lo spazio per una facile applicazione e
deve essere di almeno 8 ore.
manutenzione, sia all’interno che all’esterno
Se sull’unità sono presenti tracce di olio, indice di una
dell’armadio;
perdita di refrigerante, all’interno o all’esterno,
b) l’armadio sia almeno IP54;
controllare attentamente l’apparecchiatura prima della
c) l’armadio sia pulito internamente;
16
d) l’armadio non sia in prossimità di fonti di
calore o flussi di aria calda;
e) l’interno dell’armadio consenta una adeguata
circolazione di aria, evitando ricircoli;
Per i condizionatori serie EVE osservare le seguenti
precauzioni:
f) il condizionatore deve essere installato il più in
alto possibile;
g) se installato su porta assicurarsi che le
cerniere sostengano il peso dell’unità;
h) che il cavo elettrico non si strappi o si rovini a
porta chiusa;
i) se la profondità del condizionatore ostruisce
la totale apertura della porta, prevedere un fermo per
quest’ultima.
7.6 Per i condizionatori orizzontali, EHE, è necessario
srotolare il tubo scarico condensa di sicurezza, lungo
circa 2 mt posizionato al suo interno. Questo tubo, una
volta installato il condizionatore, deve essere portato
all’esterno, attraverso il fondo dell’armadio evitando
percorsi tortuosi ed in salita.
Tubo scarico condensa esterno
Tubo di sicurezza per

evacuazione condensa
7.3 Sconnettere l’alimentazione dell’armadio prima di

effettuare qualsiasi intervento sullo stesso.
Prima di effettuare fori e tagli sull’armadio accertarsi che
fori, viti, cavi, ecc. non interferiranno sulle
apparecchiature già installate.
Effettuare i tagli sui pannelli dell’armadio, secondo la
dima di foratura.
7.4 Predisposti i fori di applicazione, montare i golfari di
sollevamento, per maneggiare l’unità.
7.5 Incollare la guarnizione adesiva, sul contorno dei
fori fatti sull’armadio;
7.8 Appoggiare il condizionatore all’armadio e fissarlo

con le apposite viti.
17
8. VIBRAZIONI La protezione dei motori è IP44, secondo DIN40500
mentre il grado di sicurezza è corrispondente alle norme
Il condizionatore non produce particolari vibrazioni in
DIN30110.
quanto i componenti che le generano sono installati su
La rumorosità è ricavata secondo DIN 45635.
antivibranti.
12. COMPONENTI DI COMANDO,
9. COMPONENTI MECCANICI
CONTROLLO E SICUREZZA
9.1 STRUTTURA
E’ realizzata in lamiera verniciata a polvere, salvo Tutte le apparecchiature vengono controllate e tarate in
specifiche diverse, con pannelli autoportanti che fabbrica e di norma non sono previste ulteriori
rendono estremamente semp lice l’accesso ai vari regolazioni o interventi.
componenti. Se per particolari esigenze si rendessero necessarie
modifiche sulle tarature degli automatismi, queste
dovranno essere eseguite, previo preavviso alla STULZ
10. COMPONENTI FRIGORIFERI
SPA, esclusivamente da personale specializzato sul
Sono interconnesse tra loro con tubazioni in rame, prodotto.
saldate per assicurare una maggiore tenuta. Il condizionatore è dotato di una serie di componenti di
10.1 GAS FRIGORIGENO controllo e comando che ne garantiscono un corretto
E’ R134a (Tetrafluoroetano) funzionamento.
Non è ne tossico ne infiammabile e non è dannoso per L’intervento di uno qualsiasi degli automatismi di
lo strato d’ozono. sicurezza è indice di anomalia e pertanto è
Per alcuni modelli, non presenti a catalogo, può essere indispensabile che la causa sia rimossa. E’ proibito
utilizzato il refrigerante R22 (HCFC). effettuare by-pass elettrici sulle apparecchiature di
10.2 COMPRESSORE sicurezza; Questo intervento, oltre che pericoloso,
E’ di tipo alternativo, ermetico. provoca la decadenza della garanzia sul prodotto.
10.3 CONDENSATORE 12.1 PRESSOSTATO DI SICUREZZA PER ALTA
E’ il componente che consente lo smaltimento del calore PRESSIONE
dal gas refrigerante all’ambiente. E’ costituito da un Arresta il funzionamento del compressore quando la
pacco di scambio con tubi in rame ed alette di alluminio. pressione interna la circuito supera il livello di taratura;
10.4 FILTRO GAS Nei modelli di bassa potenza non è presente.
E’ di tipo misto meccanico/chimico e serve per filtrare il 12.2 PRESSOSTATO DI BASSA PRESSIONE
refrigerante che lo attraversa, eliminando nello stesso Arresta il funzionamento del compressore quando la
tempo anche le particelle di umidità. pressione interna è inferiore al valore di taratura; E’
10.5 VALVOLA TERMOSTATICA O CAPILLARE presente solo nei modelli di grande potenza;
E’ il componente che provoca la caduta di pressione del 12.3 TERMOSTATO DI REGOLAZIONE
refrigerante nella sua corsa verso l’evaporatore. E’ di tipo meccanico a carica di gas; Ha il bulbo
10.6 EVAPORATORE posizionato nel punto di ingresso dell’aria aspirata
E’ il componente nel quale avviene la cessione di dall’armadio e ne rileva e controlla la temperatura dando
calore, contenuto nell’aria dell’armadio, al gas consenso al compressore. Possiede, nei modelli di serie,
frigorigeno. dei limiti di taratura fissi che limitano il campo di lavoro
E’ costituito da tubi in rame ed alette di alluminio. del condizionatore ai valori di targa.
In alcuni modelli il termostato meccanico può essere
11 MOTORI sostituito da un termostato elettronico, le cui
11.1 COMPRESSORE caratteristiche, se presente nel condizionatore, sono
Motore elettrico con rotore a gabbia di scoiattolo, illustrate nella parte seconda del manuale.
posizionato all’interno del compressore, viene 12.4 TERMOSTATO ANTIGELO
raffreddato dal gas freddo di ritorno dall’evaporatore. E’ Di tipo similare a quello di regolazione, ha una taratura
montato su molle antivibranti per lo smorzamento delle che evita la eventuale formazione di ghiaccio sullo
vibrazioni. scambiatore evaporatore. E’ presente nei modelli
11.2 VENTILATORI orizzontali e sulle unità per le quali le prove di
Possono essere di tipo diverso a seconda del modello; funzionamento ne hanno evidenziato la necessità.
Si distinguono in 12.5 CONTATTORE
- assiali multipala, con rotore esterno su Presente nei modelli ove la potenza o i componenti ne
cuscinetti, bilanciato dinamicamente; richiedono la presenza; Comanda i motori tramite
- assiali compatti, su cuscinetti; operazioni del circuito ausiliario. Sono rispondenti alle
- radiali, con girante in plastica o lamiera, su norme IEC947-4-1.
cuscinetti. 12.6 TRASFORMATORE
Sono realizzati secondo le norme EN 60 335 1. Trattati Nei modelli di grossa potenza viene utilizzato per la
con speciali materiali plastici anticorrosivi, isolamento trasformazione della tensione di rete a quella degli
in classe B e protezione in classe 1. ausiliari.
12.7 AUTOTRASFORMATORE
18
E’ presente nei modelli funzionanti con tensione diversa Avvertenza:
da quella standard. Sono costruiti secondo le norme Temperature eccessivamente basse dell’armadio,
EN60742 e CEI14-6. possono causare gravi problemi ai componenti in
armadio e richiedono un aggravio dei consumi di
13. COLLEGAMENTI ELETTRICI energia e la necessità di maggior potenza di
13.1 Verificare la tensione di rete; raffreddamento.
13.2 Togliere tensione prima di intervenire sul sistema; La regolazione va fatta, con cacciavite, da personale
13.3 Effettuare il collegamento utilizzando i cavi in esperto agendo sul perno del termostato, dopo aver
dotazione all’unità; L’allacciamento alla rete deve tolto tensione e il coperchio del condizionatore.
avvenire tramite un sezionatore onnipolare, o I prodotti standard hanno il termostato che non
salvamotore, installato a cura dell’installatore, con consente regolazioni inferiori a 25°C e superiori a 45°C.
almeno 3 mm di distanza tra i contatti aperti. Per temperature diverse dal camp o proposto interpellare
13.4 Verificare che i fili di collegamento, in caso di il nostro dipartimento tecnico.
sostituzione di quelli in dotazione, siano di sezione Il termostato ha una isteresi di 4°C, pertanto l’avvio del
adatta alla potenza e alla distanza del condizionatore, compressore avverrà ad una temperatura superiore di
vedi EN60204. circa 4°C rispetto a quella di fermata.
13.4 Verificare che il circuito di alimentazione del Dopo la regolazione, richiudere il coperchio e ridare
condizionatore sia interrotto in caso di apertura delle tensione.
porte dell’armadio;
16. PRIMI CONTROLLI DOPO LA
14. AVVIAMENTO PARTENZA
Dare tensione al condizionatore. Controllare che l’aria in uscita dal condensatore, in
Se la temperatura dell’armadio sarà inferiore alla ambiente, defluisca regolarmente senza che venga
temperatura impostata sul termostato, partirà e riaspirata nel condizionatore.
funzionerà in continuo, il ventilatore condensatore;
Quello che fa ricircolare l’aria dell’armadio. 17. SPEGNIMENTO
Se la temperatura dell’armadio sarà superiore al valore Per spegnere l’unità togliere tensione al sistema.
della temperatura impostata sul termostato, partirà il
compressore ed il ventilatore esterno (condensatore).
Questi funzioneranno fino a quando la temperatura
18. MANUTENZIONE
dell’armadio non raggiungerà un valore inferiore alla Per questa unità adatta ad operare in ambiente
temperatura impostata sul termostato. industriale, richiede un basso grado di manutenzione;
Attenzione! La poca manutenzione richiesta deve essere eseguita.
Evitare fermate e immediate ripartenze. Tra la fermata e La mancata manutenzione, oltre che a compromettere il
la successiva ripartenza devono trascorrere almeno 3 funzionamento della macchina, fa decadere la garanzia
minuti. STULZ.
ATTENZIONE! Prima di effettuare qualsiasi intervento
15. REGOLAZIONE DELLA sull’unità accertarsi che questa non sia sotto tensione.
18.1 INTERVALLI DI MANUTENZIONE
TEMPERATURA PREVENTIVA
18.1.1 Ogni 2 mesi
Controllare che lo scarico condensa dell’unità sia
perfettamente libero e funzionante.
18.1.2 Annualmente
Verificare che le ventole non diano segni di
surriscaldamento o di vibrazioni anomale.
Verificare che gli scambiatori siano efficienti e non
sporchi.
18.1.3 Dopo ogni manutenzione, ordinaria o
straordinaria
Verificare la perfetta efficienza dello scarico condensa.
18.2 INTERVALLI DI MANUTENZIONE
STRAORDINARIA
Ogni 3 anni od ogni 10.000 ore di funzionamento, una
revisione generale dell’unità deve essere effettuata
presso gli stabilimenti STULZ o presso centri di
assistenza autorizzati dal costruttore, a complete spese
del cliente. Questa manutenzione è anche in riferimento
19
ala norma relativa alla responsabilità per danno da All’insorgere di un focolaio di incendio devono
prodotto difettoso. essere eseguite le seguenti azioni:
18.3 COME EFFETTUARE GLI INTERVENTI DI - Spegnere l’alimentazione elettrica del
PULIZIA componente che brucia;
Per pulire quals iasi componente del condizionatore non - Aumentare la capacità di ventilazione per
utilizzare sostanze acide o caustiche. asportare i gas della combustione;
La pulizia del filtro va fatta dopo averlo tolto dal - Informare l’ufficio responsabile.
condizionatore. Nel caso si decida per una sua 20.2 PERICOLI DERIVANTI DAL CONTATTO DEL
sostituzione, il filtro sostituito deve possedere le stesse PRODOTTO CON COSE O PERSONE
caratteristiche di spessore e densità di quello originale. Non esistono pericoli.
Un set di filtri di ricambio può essere richiesto al 20.3 PERICOLI DERIVANTI DA PROBLEMI
servizio assistenza STULZ. ELETTRICI
La pulizia dei componenti interni al condizionatore, lato 20.3.1 NOME DI SICUREZZA PER
ambiente o lato armadio deve essere fatta, con unità a APPARECCHIATURE ELETTRICHE -
terra, con liquido detergente ed aria compressa con una INTRODUZIONE
pressione non superiore a 4 bar. Le cause dei rischi elettrici sono ben note e la loro
prevenzione non è difficile purché l’attenzione rimanga
19. SOSTE IN INATTIVITÀ’ costante.
Per ridurre questi rischi, il personale addetto deve
Se l’unità rimane per lungo tempo inattiva, è necessario
essere informato dei pericoli potenziali ed istruito
scaricare eventuali residui di condensa ed effettuare
sull’uso delle procedure di sicurezza.
una pulizia generale.
20.3.2 COMPITI ASSEGNATI AI RESPONSABILI
I responsabili devono essere informati sui rischi
20. INFORMAZIONE SUI PERICOLI potenziali esistenti nel sistema e controllare il personale
RESIDUI E LE SITUAZIONI DI addetto alle apparecchiature elettriche. Questa azione di
EMERGENZA controllo consiste nel localizzare possibili condizioni di
rischio e nell’indagare sui problemi riscontrati dal
Questa apparecchiatura è stata progettata limitando al
personale durante gli interventi di manutenzione.
massimo le situazioni di pericolo. Queste situazioni
Ogni componente difettoso deve essere riparato o
nascono principalmente da un uso improprio del
sostituito immediatamente.
prodotto e dal mancato rispetto delle norme di
Il responsabile deve insistere sull’uso delle misure di
installazione, uso e manutenzione.
sicurezza senza tollerare o accettare deviazioni, in
Queste informazioni devono essere conosciute e rese
quanto ciò può provocare danno alle persone e alle
note a tutto il personale che opera su questo
apparecchiature.
componente o in prossimità dello stesso.
20.3.3 ALTA TENSIONE
20.1 NORME DI SICUREZZA GENERALI
Il contatto con circuiti in cui passa l’alta tensione può
Tutto il personale addetto al collaudo alla conduzione e
provocare bruciature, causare shock, incoscienza e
manutenzione del componente, deve essere al corrente
portare anche alla morte per folgorazione, delle persone
delle seguenti norme di sicurezza:
colpite. Ciò può accadere per scarsa conoscenza dei
Le targhe di pericolo devono essere ben visibili
pericoli connessi con l’uso di apparecchiature
nelle aree di potenziale pericolo.
elettriche.
Un servizio di sorveglianza deve essere istituito
Il danno che in questi casi subisce il corpo umano
nelle zone di pericolo.
dipende dalla quantità di corrente, dalla durata e dal
I supervisori devono mantenere un costante
percorso della corrente all’interno dell’organismo.
contatto con i controllori.
20.3.4 NORME DI SICUREZZA DA RISPETTARE
Le aree di transito, porte e scale, in prossimità
QUANDO L’APPARECCHIATURA E’ SPENTA
dell’apparecchiatura devono essere libere.
Disalimentare i circuiti prima di intervenire.
Le uscite di emergenza devono essere sempre
Accertarsi che comunque non sia presente tensione nei
libere.
circuiti.
Le aree sdrucciolevoli, che costituiscono un
Pulire ed asciugare la zona di lavoro.
rischio potenziale per il personale, devono
Rimuovere spinotti, anelli, staffe, o qualsiasi particolare
essere ricoperte da materiale antisdrucciolevole.
che possa intralciare l’intervento o che possa diventare
Per ogni attività specifica devono essere
un potenziale conduttore elettrico.
utilizzati utensili e procedure specifiche.
Scaricare a terra o cortocircuitare i terminali dei
Gli utensili e gli apparecchi di prova devono
condensatori connessi con il circuito disattivato.
essere mantenuti in buone condizioni.
Rimuovere i fusibili solo dopo che il circuito è stato
Il personale deve avere una conoscenza
disattivato.
dettagliata dei metodi e delle procedure adottate
20.3.5 NORME DI SICUREZZA DA RISPETTARE
in caso di incendio (predisporre servizio un
QUANDO SI EFFETTUA LA MANUTENZIONE SU
estintori a portata di mano).
APPARECCHIATURA IN TENSIONE
20
A quanto descritto nei punti 2, 3, 4, aggiungere le pertanto necessario adottare alcune precauzioni
seguenti norme: quando si maneggia questa sostanza:
Il personale non deve operare da solo. - Non scaricare, stoccare, usare refrigerante ove siano
Se possibile usare una sola mano per effettuare il presenti fiamme vive;
lavoro. Non è velenoso, ma a contatto con la fiamma viva, la
Controllare gli strumenti ed i fili conduttori combustione sviluppa gas tossici corrosivi.
periodicamente. - Non esporre gli occhi al contatto con il refrigerante
Usare solo procedure autorizzate per by-passare gli che può raggiungere temperature di - 40°C.
interlocks. - Non esporre la pelle al contatto con il liquido
Accertarsi che il personale assegnato sia perfettamente refrigerante. In un evento del genere la lesione deve
a conoscenza dei componenti dell’apparato e delle essere trattata con la stessa metodologia dei
procedure di manutenzione, prima di effettuare congelamenti.
l’intervento. - Evitare alte concentrazioni di refrigerante in quanto
Usare un paio di guanti di protezione. possono provocare gli stessi effetti del soffocamento.
Aprire tutti i contatti che portano l’alimentazione In questo caso la persona deve essere evacuata dalla
all’apparecchiatura, prima di rilevare i valori di zona satura e sottoposta respirazione artificiale.
resistenza. - Evitare di brasare o di saldare in presenza di vapori di
Verificare che nei circuiti di bassa tensione non sia refrigeranti, non collocare apparecchi di riscaldamento a
presente l’alta tensione. gas ne radiatori elettrici nei punti ove possano essere
Non usare attrezzi magnetici in prossimità di forti campi presenti vapori di gas refrigeranti.
magnetici. - Non fumare in presenza di vapori di refrigeranti.
20.3.6 NORME DI SICUREZZA DA UTILIZZARE - Non surriscaldare le bombole del gas, non
DURANTE L’INTERVENTO oltrepassare il limite di riempimento della carica di gas
Se non richiesto il funzionamento continuo, il sistema refrigerante riportata sulla targa tecnica.
deve essere spento. - L’olio dell’impianto di refrigerazione deve essere
Prima di iniziare il lavoro è necessario che: manipolato con precauzione in quanto può contenere
- Sia fatto un controllo sul tecnico manutentore che non acidi a seguito di una bruciatura del motore, usare
porti con se oggetti che possono agire come quindi guanti, occhiali e abiti di protezione.
conduttori; - Eliminare la pressione in tutto l’impianto frigorifero
- Sia ispezionata l’area di lavoro affinché il pavimento prima di procedere ad una azione di brasatura o
sia pulito ed asciutto; saldatura; La saldatura con il circuito in pressione è
- Siano controllati gli attrezzi di lavoro; Devono essere estremamente pericolosa a causa del rischio della
adatti all’intervento ed in buono stato onde consentire rottura della tubazione con proiezione di materiale fuso,
un intervento in sicurezza; sotto la pressione del refrigerante.
- Gli strumenti di misura siano stati tarati 20.5 PERICOLI DERIVANTI IN CASO DI INCENDIO
periodicamente; Nessun pericolo diretto.
- Siano verificate le procedure di intervento, prima di Il gas frigorifero in presenza di fiamma, sviluppa
iniziare il lavoro, controllando lo schema elettrico e sostanze tossiche e corrosive. Date le relativamente
prendendo visione mentale di come è strutturato il basse quantità di gas contenute nel condizionatore, la
sistema; prevenzione del rischio è quella di posizionare l’unità in
Mentre si effettua la procedura di manutenzione ambienti sufficientemente arieggiati.
elettrica è necessario che: 20.6 SOSTANZE TOSSICHE
- Il tecnico sia a conoscenza dei circuiti sui quali è Il gas contenuto in questa unità è di tipo ecologico ed è
presente l’alta tensione; denominato R134a (Tetrafluoroetano). E’ di quantità
- Non vengano effettuate misure di resistenza nei ridotta ed il circuito frigorifero e completamente
circuiti sotto tensione; sigillato.
- Si usi una sola mano per effettuare misure sui circuiti Durante il collaudo vengono verificate ed eliminate
sotto tensione; tutte le perdite superiori a 15 grammi anno.
- Siano messi a terra i terminali degli strumenti prima di Il produttore del gas refrigerante dichiara innocue
effettuare misure sui circuiti sotto tensione; concentrazioni di gas inferiori al 1/1000.
- Siano seguiti con scrupolo i suggerimenti sopra Nel caso l’unità non sia installata in locali arieggiati o di
descritti. adeguata dimensione e sia evidente una perdita rapida
L’intervento di manutenzione potrà ritenersi concluso di refrigerante, sarà opportuno allontanare gli operatori
solo quando tutti i componenti sono stati reinstallati ed ed arieggiare il locale.
il prodotto ha riassunto il suo aspetto originale. 20.7 LIQUIDI PERICOLOSI
20.4 MISURE DI SICUREZZA NEGLI INTERVENTI L’unità non possiede liquidi pericolosi per le persone.
SUL CIRCUITO FRIGORIFERO Durante il lavoro il condizionatore produce liquido di
Il refrigerante usato per questa apparecchiatura può condensa che viene scaricato in ambiente, se non
essere pericoloso, se non usato correttamente, è dissipato dal dissipatore. E’ opportuno che questo
21
liquido sia adeguatamente convogliato onde evitare
possibili pericoli alla movimentazione delle persone.
21. SMANTELLAMENTO DELL’APPARECCHIO

Questa unità deve essere smantellata da enti autorizzati.
La STULZ SPA è dotata di apparecchiature atte al
recupero dei fluidi presenti all’interno del circuito
frigorifero ed al successivo smantellamento e recupero
dei componenti del prodotto.
22
22 INCONVENIENTI - CAUSE - RIMEDI
22.1 NON RAFFREDDA

.1 Nessun componente funziona;
.1 Manca tensione all’unità;
.1 Verificare che porte e interruttori siano chiusi.
.2 Compressore, ventilatore condensatore e ventilatore evaporatore funzionano;
.1 Impianto frigorifero scarico di gas;
.1 Interpellare tecnico frigorista o assistenza tecnica STULZ;
.2 Compressore guasto meccanicamente;
.1 Interpellare tecnico frigorista o assistenza tecnica STULZ.
.3 Compressore e ventilatore esterno funzionano, ventilatore interno non funzionante;
.1 Condensatore elettrico ventilatore non funzionante;
.1 Sostituire condensatore elettrico ventilatore;
.2 Ventilatore evaporatore guasto;
.1 Sostituire ventilatore.
.4 Ventilatore esterno e ventilatore interno funzionano, compressore non funziona;
.1 Guasto protettore termoamperometrico compressore dove presente;
.1 Sostituire protettore termoamperometrico e verificare efficienza componenti elettrici del
compressore;
.2 Guasto del relè o PTC di avviamento del compressore;
.1 Sostituire rele’ o PTC di avviamento compressore;
.3 Guasto del condensatore di partenza del compressore dove presente;
.1 Sostituire il condensatore di partenza;
.4 Motore compressore guasto;
.5 Pressostato di alta pressione guasto ;
.6 Teleruttore compressore dove presente guasto;
.1 Sostituire il teleruttore;
.5 Ventilatore interno, esterno e compressore funzionano;
.1 Termostato regolazione guasto o tarato ad una temperatura superiore a quella presente in armadio;
.2 Termostato antigelo dove presente guasto.
22.2 NON RAFFREDDA SUFFICIENTEMENTE;
.1 Ventilatore interno funziona, compressore e ventilatore esterno funzionano ad intermittenza,

.1 Intervento termostato antigelo;
.1 Pulire evaporatore;
.2 Accertare eventuali cause esterne che limitano il flusso dell’aria circuito interno;
.2 Intervento pressostato bassa pressione dove presente;
.1 Insufficiente carica di gas nel circuito frigorifero;
.2 Guasto valvola solenoide quando presente;
.1 Sostituire bobina valvola solenoide;
.2 Ventilatore condensatore, ventilatore evaporatore funzionano, compressore funziona ad
intermittenza;
.1 Intervento pressostato alta pressione dove presente;
.1 Temperatura ambiente superiore al valore massimo consentito riportato sulla targa tecnica;
.1 Arieggiare il locale;
.2 Interpellare centro assistenza tecnica STULZ;
.2 Filtro aria sporco,
.1 Pulire o se necessario sostituire filtro aria sporco;
.3 Condensatore di scambio termico sporco;
.1 Pulire scambiatore;
.4 Cortocircuitazione dell’aria,
.1 Verificare che ostruzioni o ostacoli non provochino la cortocircuitazione dell’aria in espulsione;
.2 Verificare che siano rispettate le distanze minime da una parete, dal soffitto, da un
armadio elettrico o da un altro condizionatore d’aria riportate sul presente manuale;
23
.2 Intervento protettore termico del compressore,
.1 Temperatura dell’aria in armadio superiore al valore massimo riportato sulla targa tecnica
dell’unità;
.2 Stesse cause con relativi rimedi riportate ai punti 22.2.2.1.1/2/3/4;
.3 Ventilatore interno funzionante, ventilatore esterno non funzionante, compressore funzionante ad
intermittenza;
.1 Condensatore elettrico ventilatore guasto;
. 1 Sostituire il condensatore elettrico:
.2 Ventilatore esterno guasto;
.1 Sostituire ventilatore condensatore:
22.3 FORMAZIONE ECCESSIVA DI CONDENSA;

.1 Armadio con grado di protezione minore di IP54;
.1 Controllare che la guarnizione autoadesiva di tenuta tra il condizionatore e l’armadio sia stata
applicata correttamente;
.2 Controllare il corretto montaggio dei pannelli di chiusura del condizionatore;
.3 Controllare che non vi siano aperture negli arma
24
INDICE
INFORMES SOBRE EL MANUAL pág. 26

1.DESEMBALAJE Y CONTROL pág. 28
2.IDENTIFICATION DE LA UNIDAD pág. 28
3.PRINCIPIO DE FUNCIONAMENTO pág. 29
4.PRECAUCIONES pág. 29
5.COMENTARIOS RESPECTO A LA SEGURIDAD pág. 29
6.PRECAUCIONES PARA EL MOVIMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD pág. 29
7.INSTALACIÓN pág. 29
8.VIBRACIONES pág. 31
9.COMPONENTES MECANICOS pág. 31
10.COMPONENTES FRIGORIFICOS pág. 31
11.MOTORES pág. 31
12.COMPONENTES DE MANDO, CONTROL Y SEGURIDAD pág. 31
13.CONEXIONES ELÉCTRICAS pág. 32
14.ARRANQUE pág. 32
15.REGULACIÓN DE LA TEMPERATURA pág. 32
16.PRIMERAS COMPROBACIONES DESPUES DEL ARRANQUE pág 33
17.PARADA pág. 33
18.MANTENIMIENTO pág. 33
19.PERIODOS DE INACTIVIDAD pág. 33
20.INFORME REFERENTE A LOS PELIGROS DE LOS RESIDUOS Y A LAS
SITUACIONES DE EMERGENCIA pág. 33
21.DESMANTELAMIENTO DEL APARATO pág. 35
22.AVERÍAS, CAUSAS PROBABLES, POSIBLES REMEDIOS pág. 13
25
Cumpliendo con las Directivas CE73/23, 93/68, 89/392, se suministran los informes siguientes:
NOMBRE Y DIRECCION DEL FABRICANTE:
STULZ SPA, - VIA TORRICELLI 3, VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO.
DATOS INFORMATIVOS SOBRE EL MODELO:
ACONDICIONADORES PARA CUADROS ELECTRICOS IP54, para aplicación vertical, empotrados o para aplicación
horizontal.
AÑO DE CONSTRUCCION: APARECE EN LA PLACA TECNICA DE LA UNIDAD.
COMO CONSULTAR EL MANUAL:

Este documento se compone de 2 fascículos, el primero de los cuales contiene informes generales valederos para
todos los modelos y el segundo contiene, además del código de identificación del producto, los informes referentes a
los aspectos técnicos de la unidad.
En caso de que hiciese falta integrar los informes contenidos en el primer fascículo, las integraciones se incluirán en
la segunda parte.
LOS DESTINATARIOS DE ESTE MANUAL SON:
EL PROPIETARIO DEL APARATO
EL RESPONSABLE DE LA INSTALACION
EL RESPONSABLE DE LA UTALIZACION DEL PRODUCTO
EL RESPONSABLE DEL MANTENIMIENTO ORDINARIO
EL RESPONSABLE DEL DESMANTELAMIENTO
LAS FINALIDADES DE LOS INFORMES CONTENIDOS EN ESTE MANUAL SON:

EL MOVIMIENTO CORRECTO, realizado por personal genérico;
LA INSTALACION CORRECTA, realizada por personal especializado;
LA UTILIZACION CORRECTA, realizada por personal especializado;
EL MANTENIMIENTO CORRECTO, realizado por personal especializado;
EL PEDIDO CORRECTO DE LOS REPUESTOS, realizado por personal especializado;
LA CORRECTA DESMANTELACION DEL PRODUCTO, realizada por personal especializado.
LIMITES DE EMPLEO DEL MANUAL:

El mismo se refiere a operaciones que requieren personal profesionalmente cualificado.
DONDE Y COMO GUARDAR EL MANUAL:

En el interior del cuadro eléctrico o junto con los demás manuales del producto, con tal de que sea lugar seco y
limpio.
En caso de que el manual se pierda o quede dañado, se pedirá, contra pago, un nuevo fascículo, indicando el modelo
y el número de serie, que aparecen en la placa técnica, a:
STULZ SPA - DEPARTAMENTO DE CLIENTES - VIA TORRICELLI 3, 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TELÉFONO
045 6331600 - TELEFAX 045 6331635
DATOS TECNICOS:
Este manual refleja los datos técnicos en el momento de la comercialización y no puede considerarse inadecuado sólo
porque no está puesto al día en base a n uevas experiencias.
PUESTAS AL DIA
STULZ SPA, se reserva el derecho de poner al día la producción y el manual correspondiente, pero sin quedar
obligada a poner al día los manuales y la producción anteriores, sino en casos excepcionales. Para pedir o recibir las
eventuales puestas al día del manual de instrucción o sus integraciones, que se considerarán como parte integrante
del manual mismo, hay que ponerse al habla con:
STULZ SPA - SERVICIO CLIENTES - VIA TORRICELLI 3 - 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600 - FAX
045 6331635
PARA INFORMES ULTERIORES:

STULZ SPA - SERVICIO CLIENTES - VIA TORRICELLI 3 - 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600 - FAX
045 6331635
El Constructor agradecerá especialmente las señalizaciones o propuestas sugeridas por instaladores o usuarios del
producto, para mejorar el producto mismo o el contenido de este manual.
26
EN CASO DE VENTA DEL PRODUCTO:
Hay que comunicar a STULZ SPA, la dirección del nuevo propietario para hacer posible el envío de eventuales
nuevas integraciones del manual, en caso contrario STULZ SPA, queda libre de eventuales responsabilidades
consiguientes.
27
1. DESEMBALAJE Y CONTROL 2. IDENTIFICACION DE LA UNIDAD
Los productos STULZ se envían con entrega franco Se puede identificar correctamente esta unidad a través
fábrica. Todas las unidades han sido controladas de la placa técnica, que contiene todos los datos para el
individualmente en cada parte, incluido el embalaje, y empleo correcto y está colocada en el lado derecho,
colocadas con todo esmero en unos cartones al efecto. mirando las rejillas de plástico.
Hay que comprobar la unidad en cuanto llegue. Si la Además de los datos para la identificación del
unidad se encuentra sobre el medio de transporte del constructor y las marcas del producto, la placa de datos
transportista, comprobar que la misma esté en la contiene los informes siguientes:
posición de transporte establecida, en caso contrario PRODUCER
hay que tomar nota de ello en la guía del transportista. CE
MODELO: Identifica la familia del producto.
SERIE: Número de identificación del producto.
FECHA: Fecha de introducción en el mercado y
comienzo del plazo de garantía.
TENSION NOMINAL: Tension de red que hay que
suministrar a la unidad.
TENSION DE MANDO: Tension de trabajo de los
circuitos auxiliares, si es distinta da aquella de empleo.
FASE: Fase de tension.
FRECUENCIA: Frecuencia de red
ARRANQUE/MARCHA: Corriente absorbida al
arranque del compresor/Corriente absorbida en marcha
a la temperatura máxima de trabajo admitida.
RENDIMIENTO NOMINAL: Capacidad de enfriamiento
de la unidad habiendo una temperatura ambiente de
35°C y una temperatura en el cuadro de 35°C, según
Se aconseja aceptar la mercancía con derecho a realizar
DIN3168.
el control.
POTENCIA ABSORBIDA: Potencia absorbida en las
Hay que averiguar que no haya daño alguno ni
condiciones de temperatura en el cuadro de 35°C y
manchas de aceite en el embalaje, en caso de que los
ambiente 50°C.
haya, tomar nota en la guía del transportista.
INTERRUPTOR AUTOMATICO TIPO C: Valor del
Antes de tirarlo, hay que comprobar que el embalaje no
interruptor automático que el instalador tiene que
contenga documentos o partes de la máquina.
encargarse de instalar.
Cualquier daño comprobado en la máquina tendrá que TEMPERATURA INTERIOR: Temperatura mínima y
ser comunicado al transportista, por carta certificada, máxima admitidas al interior del cuadro.
dentro de 8 día contados desde la recepción. TEMPERATURA EXTERIOR: Temperatura mínima y
El transportista es responsable de cualquier daño máxima admitida
ocurrido durante el transporte. La empresa STULZ no CARGA DE GAS: Cantidad de refrigerante contenida
podrá hacerse cargo de los daños causados a la en el circuito frigorífico de la unidad.
mercancía por el transportista, sin embargo hará todo lo TIPO DE REFRIGERANTE: Nombre comercial del
posible para ayudar al cliente en esta circunstancia. refrigerante contenido en el circuito frigorífico de la
Este producto no podrá ser devuelto sin la autorización unidad.
por escrito de STULZ SPA. PRESION MAXIMA: Presión máxima de trabajo a la
Para cualquier asistencia hay que ponerse en contacto cual el circuito frigorífico puede actuar.
con: PROTECCION LADO CUADRO: Grado de protección
STULZ SPA IP, hacia el cuadro en el cual se actúa.
SERVIZIO ASSIS TENZA CLIENTI PROTECCION LADO AMBIENTE: Grado de
VIA TORRICELLI 3 protección IP, hacia el ambiente.
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO PESO: Peso de la unidad en vacío.
PHONE 045 6331600 - FAX 045 6331635 FUNCIONAMIENTO: Capacidad de actuar de la
unidad.
NOTA: Si no hay que instalar enseguida el producto o
hay que transportarlo al destino final, después del Para cualquier exigencia o informe referente a la unidad
control hay que volver a colocarlo en su embalaje y a la cual este manual se refiere, es indispensable
almacenarlo en un sitio resguardado. conocer el número de matrícula. La placa técnica está
Para el respeto del medio ambiente, se ruega recuperar moldeada, en caliente, sobre un soporte plástico que
el cartón del embalaje y separarlo del plástico.
28
garantiza una larga permanencia de los letreros también refrigerante, al interior o al exterior, hay que comprobar
en ambientes especialmente difíciles. detenidamente el aparato antes del encendido y en su
caso ponerse al habla con col departamento técnico de
3. PRINCIPIO DE FUNCIONAMIENTO STULZ. Si se observa una pérdida de refrigerante, no
Los acondicionadores STULZ son unidades pensadas hacer funcionar la unidad.
para el enfriamiento de los cuadros eléctricos, con
grado de protección IP54, y son aptos para funcionar 5. COMENTARIOS RESPECTO A LA
en ambientes industriales. Su empleo permite solucionar SEGURIDAD
los problemas causados por las altas temperaturas, la La instalación y la utilizacicondución de los
suciedad y la humedad que haya en el ambiente. La acondicionadoras pueden ser peligrosas puesto que se
unidad se compone esencialmente de un circuito trata de un sistema bajo presión, con componentes
frigorífico hermético, en el cual circula el refrigerante y eléctricos. Por consiguiente, sólo personal
está dividida en dos secciones, herméticamente especializado podrá reparar, comprobar o cuidar los
separadas, donde se tratan el aire del ambiente y el aire acondicionadores.
del cuadro, sin que lleguen a contactar entre sí. El El personal no especializado podrá realizar sólo la
sistema funciona de la siguiente forma: sustitución del filtro. Todas las demás operaciones
El compresor comprime el gas refrigerante, llevándolo a tendrán que realizarse por personal experto y calificado
una presión y temperatura elevadas. El gas caliente, para la manutención de aparatos frigoríficos.
pasando a través del condensador, se enfría y licua Antes de intervenir en esta unidad hay que cumplir con
cediendo calor al aire del ambiente. Siendo empujado a las indicaciones de este manual, comprobar los datos
través del capilar, o de la válvula termostática, el gas contenidos en la placa y cumplir con cualquier otra
líquido experimenta una caída de presión que lo precaución para garantizar la máxima seguridad.
predispone para la evaporación que ocurre en el
intercambiador evaporador cuando llegue a contactar 6. PRECAUCIONES PARA EL
con el aire caliente procedente del cuadro, que así
resulta enfriada.
MOVIMIENTO DE LA UNIDAD
Para mover esta unidad, cuando está embalada, hay que
utilizar una carretilla elevadora o un sistema provisto de
correas o sogas.
Cuando no está embalada, utilizar dos argollas de
levantamiento M6, fijándolas en la parte de arriba del
acondicionador, donde los agujeros están ya
predispuestos.
LEGENDA
MT1 Compresor MT2 Vent. del condensador

MT3 Vent. de evaporador TA Termostato
anticongelation
TR Termostato de regulacion H P Interuptor
. manometrico de sefuridad
C Condensador E Évaporador
4. PRECAUCIONES
Los acondicionadores de la serie EVE están pensados
para funcionar empotrados y en posición vertical. Los
acondicionadores de la serie EHE están proyectodos
para funcionar en el techo, en posición horizontal. En
ambos modelos el compresor tiene que quedar siempre
en posición vertical.
7. INSTALACION
No se pueden emplear o transportar los
7.1 Desembalar la unidad poniendo cuidado para no
acondicionadores en una posición distinta de aquella
dañar las partes expuestas. Antes de tirar el embalaje,
para la cual han sido proyectados.
comprobar que no contenga parte alguna ni
Si la unidad ha sido ladeada, estando el compresor
documentos.
horizontal, el tiempo de espera antes del encendido
Averiguar que la tensión de suministro eléctrico sea
tiene que ser de 8 horas por lo menos. Si en la unidad
aquella indicada.
hay trazas de aceite, lo que señala una pérdida de
29
7.2 Asegurarse que:
a) haya espacio suficiente para una fácil aplicación y
manutenimiento, ya sea al interior como al exterior del
cuadro;
b) el cuadro sea por lo menos IP54;
c) el cuadro esté limpio al interior;
d) el cuadro no se encuentre cerca de fuentes de calor o
de flujos de aire caliente;
e) el interior del cuadro permita una circulación
adecuada de aire, evitando recirculaciones;
Para los acondicionadores de la serie EVE hay que
cumplir con las precauciones siguientes:
f) hay que instalar el acondicionador en la posición más
alta posible;
g) si está instalado sobre una puerta, asegurarse que
las bisagras aguanten el peso de la unidad; 7.6 Para los acondicionadores horizontales, EHE, hace
h) que el cable eléctrico no se rompa o se estropee falta desenrollar el tubo para descarga de la
estando la puerta cerrada; condensación de seguridad, que tiene alrededor de 2
i) si la profundidad del acondicionador obstruye toda la mt. de largo. Después de haber instalado el
profundidad de la puerta, hay que prever un afianzador acondicionador, hay que llevar este tubo al exterior, a
para ésta última. través del fondo del cuadro, evitando recorridos
tortuosos y ascendentes.
7.8 Apoyar el acondicionador en el cuadro y sujetarlo
por los tornillos al efecto.
7.3 Desconectar el suministro eléctrico al cuadro antes

de realizar cualquier intervención en el mismo. Antes
de practicar agujeros y cortes en el cuadro hay que
asegurarse que los agujeros, los tornillos, los cables
etc. no interfieren en los equipamientos ya instalados.
Practicar los cortes en los paneles del cuadro, según el
patrón de horadación.
7.4 Después de haber practicado los agujeros de
aplicación, montar las argollas de levantamiento, para
mover la unidad.
7.5 Pegar la junta adhesiva en el borde de los agujeros
practicados en el cuadro;
30
Es el componente que permite la eliminación del calor
del gas refrigerante hacia el ambiente. Se compone de
un bloque de intercambio con tubos de cobre y aletas
de aluminio.
10.4 FILTRO GAS
Es del tipo mixto mecánico/químico y sirve para filtrar el
refrigerante que lo atraviesa, eliminando al mismo
tiempo también las partículas de humedad.
10.5 VALVULA TERMOSTATICA O CAPILAR
Es el componente que causa la caída de presión del
refrigerante en su recorrido hacia el evaporador.
10.6 EVAPORADOR
Es el componente en el cual se realiza la cesión del calor
contenido en el aire del cuadro, al gas refrigerante. Se
compone de tubos de cobre y aletas de aluminio.
11. MOTORES
11.1 COMPRESOR
Motor eléctrico con rotor de jaula de ardilla, colocado al
interior del compresor; es enfriado por el gas frío de
vuelta del evaporador. Está montado sobre resortes
antivibradores para amortiguar las vibraciones.
11.2 VENTILADORES
Pueden ser de tipo diferente según el modelo. Están
divididos en:
- axiales multiaspas, con rotor exterior sobre
cojinetes, balanceado dinámicamente;
- axiales compactos, sobre cojinetes;
- radiales, con rotor en plástico o en chapa, sobre
cojinetes.
Están construidos con arreglo a las normas EN 60 335 1.
Están tratados con especiales materiales plásticos
anticorrosivos, aislamiento de clase B y protección de
clase 1. La protección de los motores es IP44, según
DIN40500; el grado de seguridad cumple con las
8. VIBRACIONES
normas DIN30110.
El acondicionador no causa vibraciones especiales
El ruido está calculado según DIN 45635.
porque los componentes que las producen están
instalados sobre antivibradores.
12. COMPONENTES DE MANDO,
9. COMPONENTES MECANICOS CONTROL Y SEGURIDAD
9.1 ESTRUCTURA Todos los aparatos están controlados y calibrados en
Está construida en chapa barnizada con barniz en fábrica y normalmente no están previstas regulaciones
polvo, salvo especificaciones diferentes, con paneles ni intervenciones ulteriores. Si para exigencias
desmontables que hacen muy fácil el acceso a los especiales hiciese falta modificar los calibrados de los
distintos componentes. automatismos, habrá que intervenir, previo aviso a
STULZ SPA, sólo y exclusivamente personal
10. COMPONENTES FRIGORIFICOS especializado en el producto. El acondicionador está
Están interconectados entre sí con tuberías de cobre, provisto de una serie de componentes de control y
soldadas para asegurar una mayor hermeticidad. mando que garantizan su correcto funcionamiento. La
10.1 GAS REFRIGERANTE intervención de cualquiera de los automatismos de
Es el R134a (tetrafluoroetano). No es tóxico ni seguridad señala una anomalía y por consiguiente es
inflamable y no es perjudicial para la capa de ozono. indispensable eliminar su causa. Queda prohibido
Para algunos modelos, que no están en el catálogo, se realizar bypass eléctricos en los aparatos de seguridad.
puede utilizar el refrigerante R22 (HCFC) Esta intervención, además de ser peligrosa, causa la
10.2 COMPRESOR pérdida de la garantía para el producto.
Es del tipo alternativo, hermético.
10.3 CONDENSADOR
31
12.1 PRESOSTATO DE SEGURIDAD PARA ALTA
PRESION 14. ARRANQUE
Para el funcionamiento del compresor cuando la presión Dar tensión al acondicionador.
en el interior del circuito sobrepasa el nivel de Si la temperatura del cuadro es menor de aquella torada
calibrado; no lo hay en los modelos de potencia en el termóstato, el ventilador del condensador
reducida. arrancará y funcionará de manera continua; el mismo es
12.2 PRESOSTATO DE BAJA PRESION aquel que se encarga de la recirculación del aire en el
Para el funcionamiento del compresor cuando la presión cuadro. Si la temperatura del cuadro es mayor de
interior es menor del valor de calibrado. Lo hay sólo en aquella torada en el termóstato, arrancarán el compresor
los modelos de elevada potencia. y el ventilador exterior (condensador): Estos
12.3 TERMOSTATO DE REGULACION funcionarán hasta que la temperatura del cuadro no
Es del tipo mecánico de carga de gas, tiene la ampolla alcance un valor menor de la temperatura torada en el
colocada en el punto de entrada del aire aspirado del termóstato.
cuadro y observa y controla su temperatura actuando el Cuidado!
compresor. En los modelos de serie tiene unos límites Hay que evitar de parar y volver a arrancar enseguida.
de calibrado fijos que mantienen el campo de trabajo del Entre la parada y el nuevo arranque sucesivo tienen
acondicionador dentro de los límites indicados en la que pasar 3 minutos por lo menos.
placa. En algunos modelos el termóstato mecánico
puede sustituirse por un termóstato electrónico, cuyas 15. REGULACION DE LA
características, si está presente en el acondicionador,
están descritas en la segunda parte del manual.
TEMPERATURA
12.4. TERMOSTATO ANTIHELADA
De tipo parecido a aquel de regulación, está calibrado
para evitar la eventual formación de hielo en el
intercambiador evaporador. Está presente en los
modelos horizontales y en las unidades para las cuales
los ensayos de trabajo han puesto de manifiesto que
hace falta.
12.5 CONTACTOR
Lo hay en los modelos en los cuales la potencia o los
componentes lo requieren. Manda los motores a través
de operaciones del circuito auxiliar. Cumplen con las
normas IEC947-4-1.
12.6 TRANSFORMADOR
En los modelos de elevada potencia se utiliza para
transformar la tensión de red en aquella de los
auxiliares.
12.7 AUTOTRANSFORMADOR
Lo hay en los modelos que funcionan con tensión
distinta de aquella estándar. Están construidos con
arreglo a las normas EN60742 y CEI14-6.
Advertencia:
Unas temperaturas demasiado bajas en el cuadro
13. CONEXIONES ELECTRICAS.
pueden causar graves problemas a los componentes del
13.1 Averiguar la tensión de red.
cuadro y tienen como consecuencia un aumento de los
13.2 Cortar la tensión antes de intervenir en el sistema.
gastos de energía y la necesidad de una mayor potencia
13.3 Realizar la conexión utilizando los cables que
de enfriamiento.
suministra la unidad. Hay que realizar la conexión con la
La regulación tiene que realizarse, por medio de un
red a través de un interruptor de aislamiento omnipolar,
destornillador, por personal experto, actuando en el
o interruptor de sobrecarga, de cuya instalación se
perno del termóstato, después de haber cortado la
encargará el instalador, que tenga una distancia de por
tensión y haber quitado la tapa del acondicionador.
lo menos 3 mm entre los contactos abiertos.
Los productos estándar tienen el termóstato que no
13.4. Averiguar que los hilos de conexión, en caso de
permite regulaciones a temperaturas menores de 25°C o
que se sustituyan aquellos de serie, tengan una sección
mayores de 45°C. Para temperaturas distintas del camp o
adecuada a la potencia y a la distancia del
propuesto hay que ponerse al habla con nuestro
acondicionador, véase EN60204.
departamento técnico
13.5 Averiguar que el circuito de alimentación del
El termóstato tiene una histéresis de 4°C, por
acondicionador se corte en caso de apertura de las
consiguiente el arranque del compresor ocurrirá a una
puertas del cuadro.
32
temperatura mayor de 4°C aproximadamente respecto a reunir las mismas características de espesor y densidad
aquella de parada. respecto al original.
Después de la regulación, volver a cerrar la tapa y dar Se puede pedir un set de filtros de repuesto al servicio
otra vez tensión. asistencia STULZ.
La limpieza de los componentes interiores del
16. PRIMERAS COMPROBACIONES acondicionador, en el lado ambiente o en el lado
DESPUES DEL ARRANQUE cuadro, tiene que realizarse, estando la unidad puesta a
Comprobar que el aire que sale del condensador, al tierra, con líquido detergente y aire comprimido con una
ambiente, fluya regularmente sin que sea aspirada otra presión no mayor de 4 bar.
vez en el acondicionador.
19. PERIODOS DE INACTIVIDAD
17. PARADA Si la unidad permanece inactiva durante largo tiempo,
Para parar la unidad hay que cortar la tensión al hace falta descargar los eventuales residuos de
sistema. condensación y realizar una limpieza general.
18. MANTENIMIENTO 20. INFORME REFERENTE A LOS

Esta unidad, que es apta para funcionar en ambiente PELIGROS DE LOS RESIDUOS Y A LAS
industrial, requiere un grado reducido de SITUACIONES DE EMERGENCIA
mantenimiento, sin embargo, el poco manutenimiento Se ha pensado este aparato limitando al máximo las
requerido tiene que realizarse. situaciones de peligro. Estas situaciones están
La falta de mantenimiento, además de perjudicar el causadas principalmente porel incuplimiento de las
funcionamiento de la máquina, hace perder la garantía normas para la instalación, el empleo y la
de STULZ. mantenimiento.
CUIDADO! Antes de realizar cualquier intervención en Estes informes tienen que ser conocidos y
la unidad hay que asegurarse que la misma no se comunicados a todo el personal que actúa en este
encuentre bajo tensión. componente o cerca del mismo.
18.1 INTERVALOS DE MANTENIMIENTO 20.1 NORMAS GENERALES DE SEGURIDAD
PREVENTIVA Todo el personal encargado del ensayo, de la
utilización y del mantenimiento del componente, tiene
18.1.1 Cada 2 meses que estar al tanto de las siguientes normas de
Comprobar que la descarga de condensación de la seguridad:
unidad esté perfectamente libre y funcionando. Las placas de peligro tienen que estar bien
18.1.2 Anualmente visibles en las zonas de peligro potencial.
Averiguar que los ventiladores no den señales de Hay que organizar un servicio de vigilancia en
recalentamiento o de vibraciones anómalas. las zonas de peligro.
Averiguar que los intercambiadores estén en eficiencia Los supervisores tienen que estar en contacto
y no estén sucios. constante con los controladores.
18.1.3 Después de cada mantenimiento ordinario o Las zonas de pasaje, puertas y escaleras, cerca
extraordinaria del aparato tienen que quedar libres.
Averiguar el perfecto funcionamiento de la descarga de Las salidas de emergencia tienen que quedar
condensación. siempre libres.
18.2 INTERVALOS DE MANTENIMIENTO Las zonas resbaladizas, que constituyen un
EXTRAORDINARIA riesgo potencial para el personal, tienen que
Cada 3 años o cada 10.000 horas de funcionamiento, estar recubiertas con material antideslizante.
hay que realizar un repaso general de la unidad en la Para cada actividad específica hay que utilizar
fábrica STULZ o en centros de asistencia autorizados utensilios y procedimientos específicos.
por el constructor, con gastos totalmente a cargo del Hay que mantener en buenas condiciones los
cliente. Este mantenimiento cumple también con la utensilios y los aparatos de ensayo.
norma referente a la responsabilidad para daños El personal tiene que tener conocimientos
causados por un producto defectuoso. detallados de los métodos y de los
18.3 COMO HAY QUE REALIZAR LAS procedimientos adoptados en caso de incendio
INTERVENCIONES DE LIMPIEZA. (hay que disponer de un servicio de extintores al
Para limpiar cualquier componente del acondicionador alcance de la mano).
no utilizar sustancias ácidas o cáusticas. En caso de un foco de incendio hay que actuar
Hay que realizar la limpieza del filtro después de haberlo de la siguiente forma:
sacado del acondicionador. En caso de que se decida - cortar el suministro eléctrico al componente
sustituirlo, el filtro empleado en sustitución tiene que que se está quemando;
33
- aumentar la capacidad de ventilación para A lo descrito en los párrafos 2, 3, 4 hay que añadir las
extraer los gases de combustión; normas siguientes:
- informar el departamento responsable El personal no tiene que actuar por sí solo.
20.2 PELIGROS QUE PROCEDEN DEL CONTACTO Si es posible, utilizar sólo una mano para realizar el
DEL PRODUCTO CON COSAS O PERSONAS trabajo.
No hay peligro alguno. Hay que comprobar periódicamente los instrumentos y
20.3 PELIGROS PROCEDENTES DE PROBLEMAS los hilos conductores.
ELECTRICOS Utilizar sólo procedimientos de mantenimiento
20.3.1 NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD PARA autorizados para el bypass de los “interlocks”.
APARATOS ELECTRICOS - INTRODUCCION Asegurarse que el personal encargado esté
Las causas de los riesgos eléctricos son bien conocidas perfectamente al tanto de los componentes del aparato
y su prevención no es difícil con que haya una atención y de los procedimientos de mantenimiento, antes de
constante. realizar la intervención.
Para disminuir estos riesgos, el personal encargado Llevar un par de guantes de protección.
tiene que estar al tanto de los peligros potenciales y Abrir todos los contactos que llevan el suministro
estar instruido sobre la aplicación de los eléctrico al aparato, antes de tomar los valores de
procedimientos de seguridad. resistencia.
20.3.2 TAREAS ASIGNADAS A LOS Averiguar que en los circuitos de baja tensión no haya
RESPONSABLES alta tensión.
Los responsables tienen que estar al tanto de los No utilizar aparatos magnéticos cerca de fuertes
riesgos potenciales que existen en el sistema y campos magnéticos.
controlar al personal encargado de los aparatos 20.3.6 NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD A UTILIZAR
eléctricos. Esta acción de control consiste en localizar DURANTE LA INTERVENCION
las posibles condiciones de riesgo y en investigar los Si el funcionamiento continuo no es necesario, hay que
problemas observados por el personal durante las apagar el sistema.
intervenciones de mantenimiento. Antes de empezar el trabajo, hace falta que:
Cualquier componente defectuoso tiene que ser - Se haga un control sobre el técnico encargado de la
reparado o sustituido enseguida. mantenimiento, que no lleve con sigo objetos que
El responsable tiene que exigir la aplicación de las puedan actuar como conductores;
medidas de seguridad sin tolerar o aceptar - Se inspeccione la zona de trabajo para que el
desviaciones, porque esto puede causar daños a las pavimento esté limpio y seco;
personas y a los aparatos. - Se controlen los utensilios para el trabajo: tienen que
20.3.3 ALTA TENSION estar aptos para la intervención y en buen estado, para
El contacto con circuitos por donde pasa alta tensión permitir una intervención en seguridad;
puede causar quemaduras, causar choque, desmayo y - Los instrumentos de medida hayan sido calibrados
incluso la muerte por electrocución, de las personas periódicamente;
que lo hayan sufrido. Esto puede ocurrir por un escaso - Se verifiquen los procedimientos de intervención,
conocimiento de los peligros procedentes del empleo antes de empezar el trabajo, consultando el dibujo de
de los aparatos eléctricos. cableado y dándose cuenta mentalmente de como está
El daño que en estos casos sufre el cuerpo humano estructurado el sistema.
depende de la cantidad de corriente, de la duración y Mientras se realiza el procedimiento de mantenimiento
del recorrido de la corriente al interior del organismo. eléctrica hace falta que:
20.3.4 NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD A CUMPLIR - El técnico esté al tanto de los circuitos en los cuales
CUANDO EL APARATO ESTA’ APAGADO hay alta tensión;
Cortar la corriente a los circuitos antes de intervenir. - No se realicen mediciones de resistencia en los
Asegurarse de todas las forma no haya tensión en los circuitos bajo tensión;
circuitos. - Se utilice una sola mano para realizar mediciones en
Limpiar y secar la zona de trabajo. Quitar los pasadores, los circuitos bajo tensión;
anillos, abrazaderas o cualquier otra pieza que pueda - Los bornes de los instrumentos estén puestos a tierra
estorbar la intervención o que pueda resultar un antes de realizar mediciones en los circuitos bajo
potencial conductor de electricidad. tensión;
Descargar a tierra o poner en cortocircuito los bornes - Se cumplan cuidadosamente las sugerencias arriba
de los condensadores conectados con el circuito descritas.
desactivado. Quitar los fusibles sólo después que el Se podrá considerar concluida la intervención de
circuito ha sido desactivado. mantenimiento sólo cuando todos los componentes
20.3.5 NORMAS DE SEGURIDAD A CUMPLIR han sido instalados otra vez y el producto tiene otra vez
CUANDO SE REALIZA EL MANTENIMIENTO DE UN su aspecto original.
APARATO BAJO TENSION
34
20.4 MEDIDAS DE SEGURIDAD EN LAS 20.5 PELIGROS EN CASO DE INCENDIO
INTERVENCIONES SOBRE EL CIRCUITO No hay ningún peligro directo.
FRIGORIFICO El gas frigorífico en presencia de una llama produce
El refrigerante utilizado para este aparato puede resultar unas sustancias tóxicas y corrosivas. Por las
peligroso, si no se utiliza correctamente, por cantidades relativamente pequeñas de gas que están
consiguiente hay que adoptar algunas precauciones contenidas en el acondicionador, la prevención del
cuando se maneja esta sustancia: riesgo consiste en colocar la unidad en ambientes
- No descargar ni almacenar o utilizar refrigerante donde bastante ventilados.
haya llamas vivas 20.6 SUSTANCIAS TOXICAS
No es tóxico, pero a contacto con la llama viva, la El gas contenido en esta unidad es de tipo ecológico y
combustión produce. gases tóxicos corrosivos. es llamado R134a (tetrafluoroetano). Está presente en
- No exponer los ojos al contacto con el refrigerante que cantidad reducida y el circuito frigorífico es totalmente
puede alcanzar temperaturas de -40°C. hermético.
- No exponer la piel al contacto con el líquido Durante el ensayo se averiguan y se eliminan todas las
refrigerante. En caso de que esto ocurriera, hay que pérdidas mayores de 15 gramos/año.
tratar la lesión con los mismos métodos de las El fabricante del gas refrigerante declara que son
congelaciones. innocuas las concentraciones de gas menores de
- Evitar altas concentraciones de refrigerante, porque 1/1000.
pueden causar los mismos efectos del ahogo. En este Si la unidad no está instalada en lugares ventilados o
caso hay que sacar la persona de la zona saturada y de tamaño adecuado y es evidente una pérdida rápida
someterla a respiración artificial. de refrigerante, será oportuno alejar a los operadores y
- Evitar soldar con estaño o de otra forma donde haya ventilar el lugar.
vapores de refrigerantes, no colocar aparatos de 20.7 LIQUIDOS PELIGROSOS
calefacción de gas ni radiadores eléctricos en los La unidad no contiene líquidos peligrosos para las
puntos donde pueda haber vapores de gases personas.
refrigerantes. Durante el trabajo el acondicionador produce líquido de
- No fumar donde haya vapores de gases refrigerantes. condensación que es descargado en el ambiente, si no
- No recalentar las bombonas del gas, no sobrepasar el es disipado por el disipador. Es oportuno encauzar este
límite de llenado de la carga de gas refrigerante indicada líquido adecuadamente para evitar unos posibles
en la placa técnica. peligros para el movimiento de las personas.
- Manejar con precaución el aceite del sistema de
refrigeración porque puede contener ácidos como 21. DESMANTELAMIENTO DEL APARATO
consecuencia de que se haya quemado el motor, por Esta unidad tiene que ser desmantelada por empresas
consiguiente hay que llevar guantes, gafas y prendas autorizadas.
protectoras. STULZ SPA está equipada de aparatos que están en
- Eliminar la presión en todo el sistema frigorífico antes condiciones de recuperar los fluidos que hay al interior
de realizar una soldadura con estaño o de otra forma. Es del circuito frigorífico y para el sucesivo
muy peligroso soldar estando el circuito bajo presión desmantelamiento y recuperación de los componentes
por el riesgo de rotura de la tubería con proyección de del producto.
material fundido, bajo la presión del refrigerante.
35
22. AVERIAS - CAUSAS - REMEDIOS.
22.1 NO ENFRIA:
.1 Ningún componente funciona:
.1 Falta tensión a la unidad.
.1 Averiguar que las puertas y los interruptores estén cerrados.
.2 El compresor, el ventiladordel condensador y el ventilador del evaporador funcionan;
.1 El sistema frigorífico está vacío de gas;
.1 Ponerse al habla con un técnico de frigoríficos o con la asistencia técnica
de STULZ;
.2 El compresor tiene avería mecánica;
de STULZ;
.3 El compresor y el ventilador exterior funcionan, el ventilador interior no funciona;
.1 El condensador eléctrico del ventilador no funciona;
.1 Sustituir el condensador eléctrico del ventilador;
.2 El ventilador del evaporador está en averíado;
.1 Sustituir el ventilador.
.4 El ventilador exterior y el ventilador interior funcionan, del compresor no funciona:
.1 Avería del aparato protector termoamperimétrico compresor donde lo hay;
.1 Sustituir el aparato protector termoamperimétrico y comprobar la eficiencia de
los componentes eléctricos del compresor.
.2 Avería del relé o PTC de arranque del compresor;
.1 Sustituir el relé o PTC de arranque del compresor;
.3 Avería del condensador de arranque del compresor donde lo hay;
.1 Sustituir el condensador de arranque.
.4 Motor del compresor avariado:
de STULZ.
. 5 Presóstato de alta presión en avería;
de STULZ;
.6 Telerruptor del compresor, donde lo hay, en averíado;
.1 Sustituir el telerruptor;
.5 El ventilador interior, el exterior y el compresor funcionan;
.1 El termóstato del regulador está en averíado o está calibrado a una temperatura mayor
de aquella que hay en el cuadro;
.2 El termóstato antihelada, donde lo hay, está averiado.
22.2 NO ENFRIA LO SUFICIENTE

.1 El ventilador interior funciona, el compresor y el ventilador exterior funcionan de manera
intermitente.
.1 Intervención del termóstato antihelada;
.1 Limpiar el evaporador;
.2 Averiguar las eventuales causas exteriores que limitan el flujo del aire del
circuito interior;
.2 Intervención presótato de baja presión donde lo hay;
.1 Carga insuficiente de gas en el circuito frigorífico;
.1 Ponerse al habla con un técnico de frigoríficos o con la asistencia
técnica de STULZ.
.2 Avería de la válvula solenoide cuando la hay;
.1 Sustituir la bobina de la válvula solenoide.
36
.2 Ponerse al habla con un técnico de frigoríficos o con la asistencia
técnica de STULZ.
.2 El ventilador del condensador, el ventilador del evaporador funcionan, el compresor funciona de
manera intermitente;
.1 Intervención del presóstato alta presión donde lo hay;
.1 Temperatura ambiente mayor del valor máximo admitido, que está indicado en
la placa técnica;
.1 Ventilar el lugar
.2 Ponerse al habla con un centro asistencia técnica de STULZ.
.2 Condensador de intercambio térmico sucio;
.1 Limpiar el intercambiador;
.3 Aire en cortocircuito;
.1 Comprobar que no haya obstrucciones u obstáculos que causen el
cortocircuito del aire en expulsión;
.2 Comprobar que se hayan observado las distancias mínimas respecto a
una pared, al techo, a un cuadro eléctrico o a otro acondicionador de aire, que están contenidas en este
manual;
.2 Intervención del aparato protector térmico del compresor,
.1 La temperatura del aire en el cuadro es mayor del valor máximo indicado en la
placa técnica de la unidad;
.2 Las mismas causas con los remedios correspondientes indicadas en los párrafos
22.2.2.1.1/2/3/4.
.3 El ventilador interior funciona, el ventilador exterior no funciona, el compresor funciona de
manera intermitente.
.1 El condensador eléctrico del ventilador está averiado.
.1 Sustituir el condensador eléctrico;
.2 El ventilador exterior está en averíado;
.1 Sustituir el ventilador del condensador.
22.3 FORMACION EXCESIVA DE CONDENSADOS;

.1 Cuadro con grado de protección menor que IP54;
.1 Comprobar que la junta adhesiva de sellado entre el acondicionador y el cuadro haya
sido aplicada correctamente;
.2 Comprobar el montaje correcto de los paneles de cierre del acondicionador;
.3 Comprobar que no haya aperturas en los cuadros.
37
TABLE DES MATIERES
Renseignements sur le manuel page 39

1. Déballage et contrôle page 40
2. identification DE L’UNITE page 40
3. Principe de fonctionnement page 41
4. Précautions page 41
5. Considérations sur la sécurité page 41
6. Précautions sur la manutention page 41
7. Mise en place page 41
8. VIBRATONS page 42
9. COMPOSANTS MECANIQUES page 43
10. COMPOSANTS FRIGORIFIQUES page 43
11. MOTEURS page 43
12. COMPOSANTS DE COMMANDE, DE CONTROLE ET DE SECURITE page 43
13. Branchements électriques page 44
14. DEMARRAGE page 44
15. Réglage de la température page 44
16. PREMIERS CONTROLES APRES LA MISE EN MARCHE page 44
17. EXTINCTION page 44
18. Entretien page 44
19. INACTIVITE page 45
20. Renseignements sur les risques résiduels et lessituations
d'urgence page 45
21. Démontage de l'appareil page 47
22. Inconvénients, causes probables, remèdes possibles page page 48
38
Aux termes des Directives CE73/23, 93/68, 89/392, on fournit les renseignements suivants:
NOM ET ADRESSE DU FABRICANT:
STULZ SPA - VIA TORRICELLI 3- 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO
DONNEES D'INFORMATION SUR LE MODELE:
CONDITIONNEURS POUR ARMOIRES ELECTRIQUES IP54, pour l'application verticale, murale ou horizontale
ANNEE DE FABRICATION: INDIQUEE SUR LA PLAQUE TECHNIQUE DE L'UNITE
COMMENT CONSULTER LE MANUEL:

Ce document se compose de 2 fascicules. Le premier fascicule fournit des renseignements généraux valables pour
tous les modèles et le deuxième fournit les renseignements techniques de l'unité, outre le code d'identification du
produit.
S'il faut intégrer les renseignements du premier fascicule, on le fera dans le deuxième.
DESTINATAIRES DE CE MANUEL:
PROPRIETAIRE DE L'APPAREILLAGE
RESPONSABLE DE LA MISE EN PLACE
RESPONSABLE DE LA GESTION DU PRODUIT
RESPONSABLE DE L'ENTRETIEN ORDINAIRE
RESPONSABLE DU DEMONTAGE
LES RENSEIGNEMENTS CONTENUS DANS CE MANUEL VISENT A:

LA MANUTENTION CORRECTE, réalisée par un personnel ordinaire;
LA MISE EN PLACE CORRECTE, effectuée par un personnel spécialisé;
LA GESTION CORRECTE, effectuée par un personnel spécialisé;
L'ENTRETIEN CORRECT, effectué par un personnel spécialisé;
LA COMMANDE CORRECTE DES PIECES DETACHEES, effectuée par un personnel spécialisé;
L'ELIMINATION CORRECTE DU PRODUIT, effectuée par un personnel spécialisé.
LIMITES D'UTILISATION DU MANUEL:

Se rapportent aux opérations qui doivent être effectuées par un personnel qualifié.
OU ET COMMENT CONSERVER LE MANUEL:

A l'intérieur du tableau électrique ou avec les autres fascicules de la machine utilisatrice du produit, pourvu que ce
soit en un lieu sec et propre.
En cas de perte ou de détérioration du manuel, demander un nouveau fascicule payant, mentionnant le modèle ou le
matricule indiqués sur la plaque technique, à:
STULZ SPA - SERVICE CLIENTS - VIA TORRICELLI 3- 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600 -
TELECOPIEUR 045 6331635
ETAT DE LA TECHNIQUE:
Ce manuel reflète l'état de la technique lors de la commercialisation. Il ne peut être estimé inadéquat seulement parce
qu'il n'est pas actualisé selon de nouvelles expériences.
MISES A JOUR:
La Sté STULZ se réserve le droit de réactualiser la production et le manuel correspondant sans l'obligation de
réactualiser la production et les manuels précédents, sauf dans des cas exceptionnels. Pour demander ou recevoir les
mises à jour éventuelles du manuel d'instruction ou les intégrations qui devront être considérées comme partie
intégrante du manuel, contacter:
TELECOPIEUR 045 6331635
POUR TOUT RENSEIGNEMENT SUPPLEMENTAIRE:
TELECOPIEUR 045 6331635.
Les suggestions ou les propositions conseillées par les installateurs ou les utilisateurs du produit, en vue d'améliorer
le contenu de ce manuel, sont particulièrement appréciées par le Fabricant.
EN CAS DE CESSION DU PRODUIT:

Signaler à STULZ SPA l'adresse du nouveau propriétaire, afin de permettre l'envoi de nouvelles intégrations
éventuelles du manuel; dans le cas contraire, STULZ SPA se tient soulevée de toute responsabilité consécutive.
39
1. DEBALLAGE ET CONTROLE 2. IDENTIFICATION DE L'UNITE
Les produits STULZ sont livrés départ usine. Toutes Cette unité peut être correctement identifiée
les unités ont été contrôlées une à une dans toutes moyennant la plaque technique située sur le côté
leurs pièces, y compris l'emballage, et soigneusement droit, en regardant les grilles en plastique, qui
enveloppées dans des cartons adéquats. contient toutes les données pour l'utilisation correcte.
Contrôler immédiatement l'unité dès réception. Si Outre les données d'identification du fabricant et les
l'unité est sur le véhicule du transporteur, faire marques du produit, la plaque fournit les
attention à ce qu'elle soit dans la position de transport renseignements suivants:
prescrite; dans le cas contraire, le signaler sur le
bordereau du transporteur. On conseille d'accepter la
marchandise sous réserve de contrôle. CONSTRUCTEUR CE
Contrôler l'absence de tout dommage ou tache d'huile
sur l'emballage; s'il y en a, le signaler sur le bordereau MODELE: il identifie la famille du produit
du transporteur. SERIE: Numéro d'identification du produit
DATE: Date d'introduction sur le marché et
commencement de la période de garantie.
TENSION NOMINALE:
Tension de réseau qui doit être débitée à l'unité.
TENSION DE COMMANDE:
Tension de service des circuits auxiliaires, si elle n'est
pas nominale
PHASE: Phase de la tension
FREQUENCE: Fréquence de réseau
DEMARRAGE/MARCHE:
Courant absorbé au démarrage du
compresseur/Courant absorbé en marche à la
température maximale de service admise
RENDEMENT NOMINAL: Capacité de
refroidissement de l'unité à la température ambiante de
35°C et une température dans l'armoire de 35°C,
Avant de jeter l'emballage, contrôler qu'il ne contient conformément à DIN3168.
pas de documents ou de pièces de la machine. PUISSANCE ABSORBEE:
Tout dommage constaté sur la marchandise doit être Puissance absorbée aux conditions de température
signalé au transporteur par lettre recommandée dans dans l'armoire de 35°C et ambiante de 50°C.
le délai de 8 jours à compter de la réception. INTERRUPTEUR AUTOMATIQUE DU TYPE C :
Le transporteur est responsable de tout dommage Valeur de l'interrupteur automatique qui doit être
subi pendant le transport. STULZ ne pourra répondre monté par l'installateur.
des dommages causés à la marchandise par le TEMPERATURE INTERIEURE:
transporteur, même si elle fait tout son possible pour Température minimale et maximale admises à l'intérieur
assister le client en l'occurrence. de l'armoire
Ce produit ne pourra être rendu sans l'approbation TEMPERATURE EXTERIEURE:
écrite de STULZ SPA. Température minimale et maximale admise
Pour toute aide, contacter: CHARGE DE GAZ: Quantité de réfrigérant contenue
STULZ SPA dans le circuit frigorifique de l'unité
Service après-vente TYPE DE REFRIGERANT:
VIA TORRICELLI 3 Nom commercial du réfrigérant contenu dans le circuit
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO frigorifique de l'unité
TEL. 045 6331600 - TELECOPIEUR 045 6331635 PRESSION MAXIMALE:
Pression maximale à laquelle le circuit frigorifique peut
REMARQUE: Si le produit ne doit pas être travailler
immédiatement installé ou qu'il doit être transporté à PROTECTION COTE ARMOIRE: Degré de
sa destination finale, après le contrôle, le reposer protection IP, vers l'armoire sur lequel on travaille
dans son emballage et l'emmagasiner à l'abri. PROTECTION COTE MILIEU: Degré de protection
Pour sauvegarder la nature, on invite à recycler le IP, vers le milieu
carton d'emballage et à le séparer du plastique. POIDS: Poids de l'unité à vide
FONCTIONNEMENT: Fonctionnement de l'unité
40
Pour tout besoin ou renseignement concernant l'unité Si l'unité a été couchée, le compresseur étant dans la
de ce manuel, il est indispensable de connaître le position horizontale, le temps d'attente avant
matricule. La plaque technique est matricée à chaud l'allumage doit être de 8 heures au moins.
sur un support plastique qui assure une longue durée La présence de traces d'huile sur l'unité indique une
des inscriptions, même dans des milieux fuite de réfrigérant à l'intérieur ou à l'extérieur.
particulièrement lourds. Contrôler soigneusement l'appareillage avant
l'allumage et, s'il le faut, interpeller le service
3. PRINCIPE DE FONCTIONNEMENT technique STULZ.
Ne pas faire fonctionner l'unité si l'on remarque une
Les conditionneurs STULZ sont des unités conçues
fuite de réfrigérant.
pour le refroidissement des armoires électriques au
degré de protection IP54. Ils sont aptes à fonctionner
dans les milieux industriels. Leur utilisation permet 5. CONSIDERATIONS SUR LA
d'éliminer les problèmes dus aux températures élevées, SECURITE
à la saleté et à l'humidité ambiante. La mise en place et l'exploitation d'unités de
L'unité est essentiellement constituée d'un circuit conditionnement peuvent être dangereuses puisqu'il
frigorifique étanche où circule le réfrigérant. Elle est s'agit de systèmes sous pression avec des
divisée en deux sections hermétiquement séparées où composants électriques.
l'air ambiant et l'air de l'armoire sont traités sans qu'ils Le personnel spécialisé uniquement pourra réparer,
entrent en contact entre eux. contrôler ou maintenir les conditionneurs.
Le système fonctionne de la façon suivante: Le personnel non spécialisé ne pourra que remplacer
Le compresseur comprime le gaz frigorigène et le porte le filtre. Toutes les autres opérations doivent être
à une pression et une température élevées; le gaz exécutées par un personnel expérimenté et qualifié
chaud, en traversant le condenseur, est refroidi et dans la maintenance d'appareils frigorifiques.
liquéfié, cédant de la chaleur à l'air ambiant. Poussé Avant d'agir sur cette unité, observer les consignes
par le tube capillaire ou la soupape thermostatique, le de ce manuel, contrôler les données de plaque et
gaz liquide subit une chute de pression qui en toute autre précaution pour assurer le maximum de
favorise l'évaporation, qui s'effectue dans l'échangeur sécurité.
évaporateur lorsqu'il vient au contact de l'air chaud
provenant de l'armoire qui est ainsi refroidi. 6. PRECAUTIONS SUR LA
MANUTENTION DE L'UNITE
Pour manutentionner cette unité, lorsqu'elle est
emballée, utiliser un chariot élévateur ou un système
équipé de sangles ou de câbles.
Si elle n'est pas emballée, utiliser deux boulons à oeil
de levage M6 et les fixer sur le côté supérieur du
conditionneur où les trous sont déjà percés.
LEGENDA
MT1 Compresseur MT2 Vent. cond.

MT3 Vent. évaporateur TA
Thermostat antigel
TR Thermostat de reglage HP
Manostatde sécurité
C Condenseur E Evaporateur
4. PRECAUTIONS
Les conditionneurs de la série EVE sont conçus pour
travailler appliqués au mur et dans la position
verticale. Les conditionneurs de la série EHE sont
conçus pour fonctionner au plafond, dans la position
horizontale. Pour les deux modèles, le compresseur est
dans la position verticale et il doit toujours y rester. 7. MISE EN PLACE
Les conditionneurs ne peuvent être utilisés ou 7.1 Déballer l'unité, veillant à ne pas endommager les
transportés dans une position autre que celle pour pièces exposées. Avant de jeter l'emballage, contrôler
lesquels ils ont été conçus. qu'il ne contient pas de pièces ou de documents.
Vérifier si la tension d'alimentation est celle prescrite.
41
7.2 S'assurer:
a) que l'espace à l'intérieur et à l'extérieur est suffisant
à une application et une maintenance aisées;
b) que l'armoire a au moins le degré de protection
IP54;
c) que l'armoire est propre à l'intérieur;
d) que l'armoire ne se trouve pas près des sources de
chaleur ou des débits d'air chaud;
e) que l'intérieur de l'armoire permet une circulation
d'air adéquate, évitant les recirculations.
Pour les conditionneurs de la série EVE, observer les
précautions suivantes:
f) le conditionneur doit être installé le plus haut
possible;
g) s'il est installé sur une porte, s'assurer que les
charnières supportent le poids de l'unité; 7.6 Pour les conditionneurs horizontaux EHE, il est
h) le câble électrique ne doit pas se déchirer ou nécessaire de dérouler le tuyau d'évacuation de la
s'abîmer si la porte est fermée; buée de sécurité long de 2 mètres. Dès que le
i) si la profondeur du conditionneur entrave conditionneur est installé, ce tuyau doit être conduit à
l'ouverture totale de la porte, prévoir un arrêt pour l'extérieur par le fond de l'armoire, évitant les parcours
cette dernière. sinueux et en côte.
7.3 Débrancher l'alimentation de l'armoire avant toute

intervention sur celle-ci.
Avant d'exécuter des trous et des coupes sur
l'armoire, s'assurer que les trous, les vis, les câbles,
etc. n'interfèrent pas avec les appareillages déjà
installés.
Effectuer les coupes sur les panneaux de l'armoire,
suivant le gabarit de perçage.
7.4 Après avoir percé les trous d'application, monter
les boulons à oeil de levage pour manier l'unité. 7.7 Appuyer le conditionneur sur l'armoire et le fixer
7.5 Coller le joint adhésif sur le contour des trous par les vis spéciales.
percés sur l'armoire.
8. VIBRATIONS
Le conditionneur ne produit pas de vibrations
particulières car les composants qui l'engendrent sont
installés sur des ressorts antivibratoires.
42
9. COMPOSANTS MECANIQUES Bruit conforme à la norme DIN 45635.
9.1 STRUCTURE
12. COMPOSANTS DE COMMANDE,
Elle est réalisée en tôle peinte à la poudre, sauf
spécifications différentes, avec panneaux DE CONTROLE ET DE SECURITE
autoporteurs qui permettent un accès extrêmement Tous les appareillages sont contrôlés et étalonnés à
simple aux différents composants. l'usine. En principe, d'autres réglages ou interventions
ne sont pas prévus.
10. COMPOSANTS FRIGORIFIQUES Si, pour des besoins spéciaux, il est nécessaire de
Ils sont interconnectés entre eux moyennant des modifier les étalonnages des automatismes, cela ne
tubes en cuivre soudés pour assurer une plus grande devra être effectué que par un personnel spécialisé
étanchéité. sur le produit, après avis préalable à la société STULZ
10.1 GAZ FRIGORIGENE SPA.
R134a (Tétrafluoréthane). Le conditionneur est équipé d'une série de
Ce gaz n'est ni toxique ni inflammable; il n'est pas composants de contrôle et de commande qui assurent
nuisible à la couche d'ozone. son fonctionnement correct.
Pour quelques modèles n'étant pas au catalogue, on Le déclenchement de l'un quelconque des dispositifs
peut utiliser le réfrigérant R22 (HCFC). de sécurité signale une panne. Il est donc nécessaire
10.2 COMPRESSEUR que la cause soit éliminée. Il est défendu d'effectuer
Du type alternatif, hermétique. des dérivations électriques sur les appareillages de
10.3 CONDENSEUR sécurité. Cette intervention est dangereuse et entraîne
C'est le composant qui permet l'écoulement de la aussi la déchéance de la garantie sur le produit.
chaleur du gaz frigorigène à l'environnement. Il est 12.1 MANOSTAT DE SECURITE HAUTE
constitué d'un paquet d'échange avec tubes en cuivre PRESSION
et ailettes en aluminium. Il stoppe le fonctionnement du compresseur lorsque
10.4 FILTRE A GAZ la pression à l'intérieur du circuit dépasse le niveau
Du type mixte mécanique/chimique. Il filtre le d'étalonnage. Il n'existe pas sur les modèles à basse
réfrigérant qui le traverse et supprime en même temps puissance.
les particules d'humidité. 12.2 MANOSTAT BASSE PRESSION
10.5 SOUPAPE THERMOSTATIQUE OU Il stoppe le fonctionnement du compresseur lorsque
CAPILLAIRE la pression intérieure est inférieure à la valeur
C'est le composant qui provoque la chute de pression d'étalonnage. Il n'existe que sur les modèles à grande
du réfrigérant dans sa course vers l'évaporateur. puissance.
10.6 EVAPORATEUR 12.3 THERMOSTAT DE REGLAGE
C'est le composant où la chaleur contenue dans l'air Du type mécanique à charge de gaz. Il a la boule
de l'armoire est cédée au gaz frigorigène. Il est placée au point d'entrée de l'air aspiré par l'armoire et
constitué de tuyaux en cuivre et d'ailettes en en détecte et contrôle la température, donnant le
aluminium consentement au compresseur. Sur les modèles de
série, il a des limites d'étalonnage fixes qui bornent le
11. MOTEURS champ de travail du conditionneur aux valeurs de
plaque. Sur quelques modèles, le thermostat
11.1 COMPRESSEUR
mécanique peut être remplacé par un thermostat
Moteur électrique avec rotor à cage d'écureuil. Il est
électronique, dont les caractéristiques, s'il existe dans
placé à l'intérieur du compresseur, refroidi par le gaz
le conditionneur, sont illustrées sur la deuxième partie
froid de retour de l'évaporateur et monté sur des
du manuel.
ressorts antivibratoires pour amortir les vibrations.
12.4 THERMOSTAT ANTIGEL
11.2 VENTILATEURS
Du type semblable au thermostat de réglage. Son
Ils peuvent être de type différent, suivant le modèle.
étalonnage empêche la formation éventuelle de glace
Ils se distinguent en
sur l'échangeur évaporateur. Il existe sur les modèles
- axiaux à palettes multiples, avec rotor extérieur sur
horizontaux et sur les unités pour lesquelles les essais
coussinets, équilibré dynamiquement;
de fonctionnement en ont dénoncé la nécessité.
- axiaux compacts, sur coussinets;
12.5 CONTACTEUR
- radiaux, avec roue en plastique ou en tôle, sur
Il existe sur les modèles où la puissance ou les
coussinets.
composants l'exigent. Il commande les moteurs par le
Ils sont construits conformément aux normes EN 60
biais d'opérations du circuit auxiliaire. Il est conforme
335 1 et traités par des matériaux plastiques spéciaux
aux normes IEC947-4-1.
résistants à la corrosion. Classe d'isolation B et classe
12.6 TRANSFORMATEUR
de protection 1.
Sur les modèles de grande puissance, il est utilisé
La protection des moteurs est IP44, conformément à
pour la transformation de la tension de réseau à celle
la norme DIN40500, tandis que le degré de sécurité
des appareils auxiliaires.
correspond aux normes DIN30110.
12.7 AUTOTRANSFORMATEUR
43
Il existe sur les modèles fonctionnant à une tension Avertissement:
autre que la tension standard. Il est construit Des températures trop basses de l'armoire peuvent
conformément aux normes EN60742 et CEI14-6. causer de graves problèmes aux composants dans
l'armoire et exigent une plus grande consommation
13. BRANCHEMENTS ELECTRIQUES d'énergie et une plus grande puissance de
13.1 Vérifier la tension de réseau. refroidissement.
13.2 Couper la tension avant d'agir sur le système. Le réglage doit être effectué à l'aide d'un tournevis par
13.3 Effectuer le branchement moyennant les câbles un personnel expérimenté par action sur le goujon du
livrés avec l'unité. Le branchement sur le réseau doit thermostat, après avoir coupé la tension et enlevé le
être effectué par le biais d'un sectionneur omnipolaire couvercle du conditionneur.
ou d'un disjoncteur installé par l'installateur avec une Les produits standard ont le thermostat qui ne permet
distance minimale de 3 mm entre les contacts ouverts. pas de réglages inférieurs à 25°C et supérieurs à 45°C.
13.4 Vérifier si les fils de connexion, en cas de Pour des températures différentes de la plage
remplacements des fils livrés, ont une section adaptée proposée, interpeller notre service technique.
à la puissance et à la distance du conditionneur (Cf. Le thermostat a une hystérésis de 4°C. Le démarrage
EN60204). du compresseur s'effectuera donc à une température
13.4 Vérifier si le circuit d'alimentation du supérieure de 4°C environ par rapport à la température
conditionneur est coupé en cas d'ouverture des d'arrêt.
portes de l'armoire. Après le réglage, refermer le couvercle et remettre
sous tension.
14. DEMARRAGE
16. PREMIERS CONTROLES APRES
Mettre le conditionneur sous tension.
Si la température de l'armoire est inférieure à la LA MISE EN MARCHE
température établie sur le thermostat, le ventilateur Contrôler que l'air sortant du condenseur dans le
condenseur se mettra en marche et fonctionnera de milieu s'écoule régulièrement sans être aspiré de
façon continue. C'est le dispositif qui fait recirculer nouveau dans le conditionneur.
l'air de l'armoire.
Si la température de l'armoire est supérieure à la valeur 17. EXTINCTION
de la température établie sur le thermostat, le Pour éteindre l'unité, couper la tension au système.
compresseur et le ventilateur extérieur (condenseur)
se mettront en marche. Ils fonctionneront tant que la 18. ENTRETIEN
température de l'armoire aura atteint une valeur
inférieure à la température établie sur le thermostat. Cette unité qui est apte à travailler dans un milieu
Attention! industriel exige un degré réduit d'entretien. Le peu
Eviter les arrêts et les redémarrages immédiats. Un d'entretien demandé doit être exécuté.
laps de temps de 3 minutes au moins doit s'écouler Le non-entretien non seulement préjudicie au
entre l'arrêt et le redémarrage suivant. fonctionnement de la machine, mais il fait aussi
déchoir la garantie STULZ.
15. REGLAGE DE LA TEMPERATURE ATTENTION! Avant toute intervention sur l'unité,
s'assurer qu'elle n'est pas sous tension.
18.1 INTERVALLES D'ENTRETIEN PREVENTIF
18.1.1 Tous les deux mois
Contrôler si l'évacuation de la buée est parfaitement
libre et fonctionnante.
18.1.2 Chaque année
Contrôler que les ventilateurs ne donnent pas de
signes de surchauffage ou de vibrations anormales.
Contrôler que les échangeurs sont performants et
propres.
18.1.3 Après tout entretien ordinaire ou extraordinaire
Vérifier si l'évacuation de la buée fonctionne
parfaitement.
18.2 INTERVALLES D'ENTRETIEN
EXTRAORDINAIRE
Tous les 3 ans ou toutes les 10.000 heures de service,
une révision générale de l'unité doit être effectuée
dans les usines STULZ ou les services après-vente
agréés par le fabricant. Les frais sont entièrement à la
charge du client. Cet entretien se rapporte également à
44
la norme concernant la responsabilité pour dommage - augmenter la capacité de ventilation pour enlever les
causé par un produit défectueux. gaz de combustion;
18.3 COMMENT EFFECTUER LES - informer le bureau responsable.
INTERVENTIONS DE NETTOYAGE 20.2 DANGERS DUS AU CONTACT DU PRODUIT
Pour nettoyer tout composant du conditionneur, ne AVEC DES CHOSES OU DES PERSONNES:
pas utiliser de substances acides ou caustiques. Il n'existe pas de danger.
Le filtre doit être nettoyé après l'avoir enlevé du 20.3 DANGERS CAUSES PAR DES PROBLEMES
conditionneur. Si on décide de le remplacer, le filtre ELECTRIQUES
substitutif devra avoir la même épaisseur et densité 20.3.1 NORMES DE SECURITE POUR LES
que le filtre original. APPAREILLAGES ELECTRIQUES -
Un jeu de filtres de rechange peut être demandé au INTRODUCTION
service après-vente STULZ. Les causes des risques électriques sont bien connues
Le nettoyage des composants intérieurs du et leur prévention n'est pas difficile, à condition de
conditionneur, côté milieu ou côté armoire, doit être maintenir une attention constante.
effectué, l'unité étant au sol, avec un liquide détergent Pour réduire ces risques, le personnel préposé doit
et l'air comprimé à une pression n'excédant pas 4 bars. être informé sur les dangers potentiels et formé sur
l'utilisation des procédures de sécurité.
19. INACTIVITE 20.3.2 TACHES ATTRIBUEES AUX
RESPONSABLES
Si l'unité demeure longtemps inactive, il est nécessaire
Les responsables doivent être informés sur les
d'évacuer la buée résiduelle et d'effectuer un
risques potentiels existant dans le système et
nettoyage général.
contrôler le personnel préposé aux appareillages
20. RENSEIGNEMENTS SUR LES électriques. Cette action de contrôle consiste à repérer
DANGERS RESIDUELS ET LES les conditions possibles de ris que et à chercher à
SITUATIONS D'URGENCE connaître les problèmes rencontrés par le personnel
pendant les interventions d'entretien.
Cet appareillage a été conçu en bornant au maximum
Chaque composant défectueux doit être réparé ou
les situations de danger. Ces situations découlent
remplacé immédiatement.
surtout d'utilisations impropres du produit et de la
Le responsable doit insister sur l'utilisation des
non-observation des normes de mise en place,
mesures de sécurité sans tolérer ou accepter des
d'emploi et d'entretien.
déviations, car cela pourrait nuire aux personnes et
Ces renseignements doivent être connus par tout le
aux appareillages.
personnel qui travaille sur ce composant ou à sa
20.3.3 HAUTE TENSION
proximité.
Le contact avec les circuits de haute tension risque de
20.1 NORMES DE SECURITE GENERALES
provoquer des brûlures, des chocs, l'inconscience et
Tout le personnel préposé à l'essai, à l'exploitation et à
même la mort par foudroiement des personnes
à l'entretien du composant doit connaître les normes
touchées. Cela peut être causé par une connaissance
de sécurité suivantes:
insuffisante des risques liés à l'utilisation
Les plaques de danger doivent être bien visibles sur
d'appareillages électriques.
les zones potentiellement dangereuses.
Le dommage que le corps humain subit dans ces cas
Un service de surveillance doit être institué sur les
est fonction de la quantité de courant, de sa durée et
zones dangereuses.
de son parcours à l'intérieur de l'organisme.
Les superviseurs doivent maintenir une liaison
20.3.4 NORMES DE SECURITE A RESPECTER
constante avec les contrôleurs.
LORSQUE L'APPAREILLAGE EST ETEINT
Les zones de passage, les portes et les escaliers
Débrancher les circuits avant d'intervenir.
situés près de l'appareillage doivent être libres.
S'assurer qu'il n'y a pas de tension dans les circuits.
Les issues de secours doivent toujours être libres.
Nettoyer et essuyer la zone de travail.
Les zones dérapantes qui constituent un risque
Enlever les chevilles, les bagues, les étriers ou toute
potentiel pour le personnel doivent être recouvertes
pièce qui peut entraver l'intervention ou devenir un
d'un matériau antidérapant.
conducteur électrique potentiel.
Pour chaque activité spécifique, on doit utiliser les
Décharger à la terre ou court-circuiter les bornes des
outils et les procédures spécifiques.
condensateurs branchées sur le circuit désactivé.
Les outils et les appareils d'essai doivent être
N'enlever les fusibles qu'après avoir désactivé le
conservés dans un bon état.
circuit.
Le personnel doit connaître à fond les méthodes et les
20.3.5 NORMES DE SECURITE A RESPECTER
procédures adoptées en cas d'incendie (prévoir un
LORSQU'ON EFFECTUE L'ENTRETIEN SUR
service d'extincteurs à portée de la main).
L'APPAREILLAGE SOUS TENSION
En cas de survenance d'un foyer d'incendie, agir de la
Aux normes décrites aux points 2, 3 et 4, on doit
façon suivante:
ajouter les normes suivantes:
- couper l'alimentation électrique du composant qui
Le personnel ne doit pas travailler tout seul.
brûle;
45
Si possible, ne se servir que d'une main pour effectuer Il n'est pas toxique, mais au contact de la flamme vive,
le travail. la combustion dégage des gaz toxiques corrosifs.
Contrôler périodiquement les instruments et les fils - Ne pas exposer les yeux au contact du réfrigérant qui
conducteurs. peut atteindre des températures de -40°C.
N'utiliser que les procédures autorisées pour dériver - Ne pas exposer la peau au contact du liquide
les interverrouillages. réfrigérant; dans ce cas, la lésion doit être traitée
S'assurer que le personnel affecté connaît suivant la même méthode que pour les congélations.
parfaitement les composants de l'appareil et les - Eviter les hautes concentrations de réfrigérant car
procédés d'entretien, avant d'effectuer le travail. elles risquent de provoquer les mêmes effets qu'un
Porter une paire de gants de protection. étouffement.
Ouvrir tous les contacts qui portent l'alimentation à Dans ce cas, la personne doit être évacuée du local et
l'appareillage, avant de relever les valeurs de soumise à la respiration artificielle.
résistance. - Eviter de braser ou de souder en présence de
Contrôler qu'il n'y a pas de haute tension dans les vapeurs de réfrigérants; ne pas placer d'appareils de
circuits de basse tension. chauffage au gaz ou de radiateurs électriques aux
Ne pas utiliser d'outils magnétiques près de forts endroits où il peut y avoir des vapeurs de gaz
champs magnétiques. réfrigérants.
20.3.6 NORMES DE SECURITE A OBSERVER - Ne pas fumer en présence de vapeurs de
PENDANT L'INTERVENTION réfrigérants.
Si le fonctionnement continu n'est pas demandé, le - Ne pas surchauffer les bouteilles à gaz, ne pas
système doit toujours être éteint. franchir la limite de remplissage de la charge de gaz
Avant de commencer le travail, il est nécessaire: réfrigérant indiquée sur la plaque technique.
- d'effectuer un contrôle sur le technicien de l'entretien - L'huile de l'installation de réfrigération doit être
qu'il ne porte pas d'objets susceptibles d'être des maniée avec précaution car elle peut contenir des
conducteurs; acides par suite d'une brûlure du moteur; porter donc
- de contrôler la zone de travail pour s'assurer que le des gants, des lunettes et des vêtements de
plancher est propre et sec; protection.
- de contrôler les outils de travail; ils doivent être - Eliminer la pression dans toute l'installation
adaptés à l'intervention et dans un bon état, afin de frigorifique avant de braser ou de souder. Le soudage
permettre l'intervention en toute sécurité; avec le circuit sous pression est extrêmement
- les instruments de mesure doivent être étalonnés dangereux car il y a le risque de rupture du tuyau avec
périodiquement; projection du matériau fondu sous la pression du
- vérifier les procédures d'intervention, avant de réfrigérant.
commencer le travail, en contrôlant le schéma 20.5 DANGERS CAUSES PAR INCENDIE
électrique et prenant connaissance mentale de Aucun danger direct.
comment le système est structuré. Le gaz frigorigène, en présence de la flamme, dégage
Tandis que l'on effectue la procédure d'entretien des substances toxiques et corrosives. Etant donné
électrique, il y a lieu: les quantités relativement réduites contenues dans le
- que le technicien connaisse les circuits de haute conditionneur, le risque se prévient en plaçant l'unité
tension; dans des locaux suffisamment aérés.
- de ne pas effectuer des mesures de résistance dans 20.6 SUBSTANCES TOXIQUES
les circuits sous tension; Le gaz contenu dans cette unité est du type
- de ne se servir que d'une main pour prendre des écologique dénommé R134a (tétrafluoréthane). Sa
mesures sur les circuits sous tension; quantité est réduite et le circuit frigorifique est
- de mettre à la terre les bornes des instruments, avant entièrement scellé.
d'effectuer des mesures sur les circuits sous tension; Pendant l'essai, on vérifie et élimine toutes les fuites
- de suivre scrupuleusement les susdites suggestions. supérieures à 15 g/an.
L'intervention d'entretien ne pourra être tenue pour Le producteur du gaz réfrigérant déclare les
achevée que lorsque tous les composants auront été concentrations de gaz inférieures à 1 par 1000
réinstallés et que l'appareil aura pris son aspect inoffensives.
originaire. Au cas où l'unité ne serait pas installée dans des
20.4 MESURES DE SECURITE DANS LES locaux aérés ou aux dimensions convenables et une
INTERVENTIONS SUR LE CIRCUIT fuite rapide de réfrigérant se produirait, il y aura lieu
FRIGORIFIQUE d'éloigner les opérateurs et d'aérer le local.
Le réfrigérant utilisé pour cet appareil peut être 20.7 LIQUIDES DANGEREUX
dangereux s'il n'est pas correctement utilisé. Par L'unité n'a pas de liquides dangereux pour les
conséquent, il est nécessaire de prendre quelques personnes.
précautions lorsqu'on manie cette substance: Pendant le travail, le conditionneur produit du liquide
- ne pas évacuer, stocker ou utiliser le réfrigérant où il de condensation qui est évacué dans le milieu, s'il
y a des flammes vives. n'est pas dissipé par le dissipateur. Il y a lieu que ce
46
liquide soit convenablement canalisé afin d'empêcher frigorifique et au démontage et recyclage suivants des
des risques possibles au mouvement des personnes. composants du produit.
21. DEMONTAGE DE L'APPAREIL
Cette unité doit être démontée par les organismes
agréés.
La Sté STULZ SPA est équipée d'appareillages aptes
à récupérer les fluides circulant à l'intérieur du circuit
47
22. INCONVENIENTS - CAUSES - REMEDES
22.1 LE CONDITIONNEUR NE REFROIDIT PAS
.1 Aucun composant ne fonctionne:
.1 Absence de tension à l'unité;
.2 Vérifier si les portes et les interrupteurs sont fermés.
.2 Le compresseur, le ventilateur condenseur et le ventilateur évaporateur fonctionnent;
.1 Installation frigorifique sans gaz;
Interpeller le technicien frigoriste ou le service après-vente STULZ;
.2 Compresseur détraqué;
Interpeller le technicien frigoriste ou le service après-vente STULZ;
.3 Le compresseur et le ventilateur extérieur fonctionnent, tandis que le ventilateur intérieur ne
fonctionne pas;
.1 Le condensateur électrique du ventilateur ne fonctionne pas;
Remplacer le condensateur électrique du ventilateur;
.2 Ventilateur évaporateur détraqué;
Remplacer le ventilateur.
.4 Le ventilateur extérieur et le ventilateur intérieur fonctionnent, tandis que le compresseur ne
fonctionne pas;
.1 Panne de la protection thermoampèremétrique du compresseur, si elle existe;
Remplacer la protection thermoampèremétrique et vérifier le bon fonctionnement des
composants electriques du compresseur;
.2 Panne du relais ou du PTC de démarrage du compresseur;
.1 Remplacer le relais ou le PTC de démarrage du compresseur;
.3 Panne du condensateur de départ du compresseur, s'il existe;
.1 Remplacer le condensateur de départ;
.4 Moteur du compresseur en panne;
.1 Interpeller le technicien frigoriste ou le service après-vente STULZ;
.5 Manostat haute pression détraqué;
.6 Télérupteur du compresseur détraqué, s'il existe;
.1 Remplacer le télérupteur;
.5 Le ventilateur intérieur, extérieur et le compresseur fonctionnent;
.1 Thermostat de réglage détraqué ou étalonné à une température supérieure à la température
présente dans l'armoire;
.2 Thermostat antigel détraqué, s'il y en a un.
22.2 LE CONDITIONNEUR NE REFROIDIT PAS ASSEZ:

.1 Le ventilateur intérieur fonctionne, le compresseur et le ventilateur extérieur fonctionnent par
intermittence.
.1 Déclenchement du thermostat antigel;
.1 Nettoyer l'évaporateur;
.2 Vérifier s'il y a des causes extérieures qui bornent le débit d'air du circuit intérieur;
.2 Déclenchement du manostat basse pression, s'il existe;
.3 Le solénoïde, s'il y en a un, est détraqué;
.1 Remplacer la bobine du solénoïde;
.2 Le ventilateur condenseur et le ventilateur évaporateur fonctionnent, tandis que le compresseur
fonctionne par intermittence;
.1 Déclenchement du manostat haute pression, s'il existe;
.1 Température ambiante supérieure à la valeur maximale admise indiquée sur la plaque
technique;
.1 Aérer le local;
.2 Interpeller le service après-vente STULZ;
.2 Condenseur d'échange thermique sale;
Nettoyer l'échangeur;
.3 Détournement de l'air
.1 Contrôler que des obstructions ou des obstacles ne provoquent pas le
détournement de l'air en expulsion;
48
.2 Vérifier si les distances minimales d'une paroi, du plafond, d'une armoire
électrique ou d'un autre conditionneur d'air indiquées sur ce manuel sont
respectées;
.2 Déclenchement de la protection thermique du compresseur,
.1 Température de l'air dans l'armoire supérieure à la valeur maximale indiquée
sur la plaque technique de l'unité
.2 Les mêmes causes et remèdes qu'aux points 22.2.2.1.1/2/3;
.3 Le ventilateur intérieur fonctionne, le ventilateur extérieur ne fonctionne pas et le
compresseur fonctionne par intermittence.
.1 Condensateur électrique du ventilateur détraqué;
Remplacer le condensateur électrique;
.2 Ventilateur extérieur détraqué;
Remplacer le ventilateur condenseur.
22.3 FORMATION EXCESSIVE DE BUEE:

.1 Armoire au degré de protection inférieur à IP54
.1 Vérifier si le joint autoadhésif d'étanchéité entre le conditionneur et l'armoire a été
correctement appliqué;
.2 Contrôler le montage correct des panneaux de fermeture du conditionneur;
.3 Contrôler qu'il n'y a pas d'ouvertures dans les armoires.
49
INHALTSVERZEICHNIS
Informationen zu diesem Handbuch Seite 51

1. ENTNAHME AUS DER VERPACKUNG UND KONTROLLE Seite 53
2. KENNZEICHNUNG DES GERÄTS Seite 53
3. Funktionsprinzip Seite 54
4. VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN Seite 54
5. HINWEISE ZUR SICHERHEIT Seite 54
6. VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN BEIM TRANSPORT DES GERÄTS Seite 54
7. INSTALLATION Seite 54
8. VIBRATIONEN Seite 56
9. MECHANISCHE KOMPONENTEN Seite 56
10. KÜHLKOMPONENTEN Seite 56
11. MOTOREN Seite 56
12. SCHALT-, STEUER- UND SICHERHEITSKOMPONENTEN Seite 56
13. ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE Seite 57
14. INBETRIEBNAHME Seite 57
15. TEMPERATUREINSTELLUNG Seite 57
16. ERSTE KONTROLLEN NACH DEM START Seite 57
17. AUSSCHALTEN Seite 57
18.Wartung Seite 57
19. LÄNGERER BETRIEBSSTILLSTAND Seite 58
20. Information über Restrisiken und Notfälle Seite 58
21. Abbau des Geräts Seite 60
22. Störungen, mögliche Ursachen und Abhilfen Seite 61
50
Laut EG-Richtlinien 73/23, 93/68, 89/392 erfolgen folgende Angaben:
NAME UND ANSCHRIFT DES HERSTELLERS:
STULZ SPA - VIA TORRICELLI 3- 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO
INFORMATIONEN ZUM MODELL:
KLIMAGERÄTE FÜR ELEKTROSCHRÄNKE IP54, senkrecht, an der Wand oder waagerecht anzubringen
BAUJAHR: ANGABE AUF DEM TYPENSCHILD DES GERÄTS
ZUR VERWENDUNG DES HANDBUCHS:

Diese Unterlagen bestehen aus 2 Abschnitten: Im ersten Abschnitt sind allgemeine, für alle Modelle gültige
Informationen aufgeführt, im zweiten sind neben der Kennummer des Produkts die Angaben zu den technischen
Aspekten des Geräts enthalten.
Sollte eine Ergänzung des ersten Abschnitts erforderlich sein, werden diesbezügliche Angaben im zweiten Teil
aufgenommen.
DAS HANDBUCH IST BESTIMMT FÜR:
EIGENTÜMER DER ANLAGE
INSTALLATIONSLEITER
LEITER DES PRODUKTBETRIEBS
LEITER DER GEWÖHNLICHEN WARTUNG
LEITER DER ABBAUARBEITEN
ZWECK DER IN DIESEM HANDBUCH ENTHALTENEN INFORMATIONEN:

KORREKTER TRANSPORT durch ungelernte Arbeiter
KORREKTE INSTALLATION durch Facharbeiter
KORREKTER BETRIEB durch Facharbeiter
KORREKTE WARTUNG durch Facharbeiter
KORREKTE ERSATZTEILBESTELLUNG durch Facharbeiter
KORREKTER ABBAU DES PRODUKTS durch Facharbeiter
VERWENDUNGSBESCHRÄNKUNGEN DES HANDBUCHS:

Es bezieht sich auf Arbeiten, die von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal durchzuführen sind.
AUFBEWAHRUNGSORT UND -ART DES HANDBUCHS:

In der Schalttafel oder zusammen mit den anderen Unterlagen der Produktanwendungsmaschine an einem trockenen
und sauberen Ort.
Bei Verlust oder Beschädigung des Handbuchs fordern Sie kostenpflichtig neue Unterlagen unter Angabe des
Modells und der Seriennummer, die auf dem Typenschild aufgeführt sind, an bei:
STULZ SPA - KUNDENDIENST – VIA TORRICELLI 3, 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600 - FAX 045
6331635
STAND DER TECHNIK:

Dieses Handbuch spiegelt den Stand der Technik zum Zeitpunkt der Vermarktung wider und kann nicht als
unangemessen angesehen werden, nur weil es aufgrund von neueren Erkenntnissen dem aktuellen Stand nicht
angepaßt wurde.
AKTUALISIERUNG DER PRODUKTION

Die Firma STULZ SPA behält sich das Recht vor, die Produktion und die betreffenden Unterlagen zu aktualisieren
ohne die Verpflichtung, die vorangehenden Handbücher und Produktionen dem neuesten Stand anpassen zu
müssen, außer in Ausnahmefällen. Zur Anforderung und Zusendung von eventuell aktualisierten Ausgaben oder
Ergänzungen des Handbuchs, die als wesentlicher Teil des Handbuchs anzusehen sind, wenden Sie sich an:
STULZ SPA - KUNDENDIENST - VIA TORRICELLI 3, 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600 - FAX 045
6331635
WEITERE INFORMATIONEN ERHALTEN SIE BEI:

STULZ SPA - KUNDENDIENST – VIA TORRICELLI 3, 37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO - TEL. 045 6331600 - FAX 045
6331635
Hinweise oder Vorschläge von Monteuren oder Anwendern des Produkts, die zur Verbesserung des Produkts oder
des Inhalts der technischen Unterlagen beitragen, nimmt der Hersteller gerne entgegen.
BEIM VERKAUF DES PRODUKTS:
51
Teilen Sie der Firma STULZ SPA die Anschrift des neuen Eigentümers mit, damit eventuell Ergänzungen des
Handbuchs an diese Adresse gesandt werden können, andernfalls sieht sich die Firma STULZ SPA von einer
eventuellen Haftung durch hieraus resultierende Schäden enthoben.
52
1. ENTNAHME AUS DER Zum Schutz der Natur wird darum gebeten, Karton-
und Kunststoffmaterial der Verpackung zu trennen
VERPACKUNG UND KONTROLLE
und beides zu entsorgen.
Die Produkte von STULZ werden ab Werk geliefert.
Alle Geräte werden einzeln in all ihren Bestandteilen 2. KENNZEICHNUNG DES GERÄTS
einschließlich der Verpackung kontrolliert und
sorgfältig in Spezialkartons verpackt. Dieses Gerät kann über das Typenschild einwandfrei
Kontrollieren Sie das Gerät sofort bei Erhalt der Ware. identifiziert werden, das alle Angaben für einen
Wenn das Gerät noch auf dem Transportmittel der ordnungsgemäßen Gebrauch enthält. Das
Spedition steht, überprüfen, ob es sich in der Typenschild befindet sich bei Blick auf die
vorgeschriebenen Transportposition befindet, Kunststoffgitter auf der rechten Seite.
andernfalls ist dies auf dem Lieferschein der Spedition Neben den Kenndaten des Herstellers und der
zu vermerken. Es wird empfohlen, die Ware Warenzeichen des Produkts sind die folgenden
vorbehaltlich der Überprüfung anzunehmen. Angaben aufgeführt:
Überprüfen, ob die Verpackung unbeschädigt und frei
PRODUCTOR
von Ölspuren ist, andernfalls ist dies auf dem
Lieferschein der Spedition zu vermerken. CE
Die Verpackung vor der Entsorgung auf verbliebene
Unterlagen oder Maschinenteile kontrollieren. MODELL: Kennzeichnung der Produktfamilie
SERIE: Kennummer des Produkts
DATUM: Datum der Einsetzung in den Markt und
Beginn des Garantiezeitraums
NENNSPANNUNG: Netzspannung, mit der das Gerät
zu versorgen ist
STEUERSPANNUNG: Betriebsspannung der
Hilfsschaltkreise, falls sie von der Nennspannung
abweicht
PHASE: Spannungsphase
FREQUENZ: Netzfrequenz
INBETRIEBNAHME/BETRIEB: Aufgenommener
Strom bei der Inbetriebnahme des Kompressors /
Aufgenommener Strom bei Betrieb bei max. zulässiger
Betriebstemperatur
NENNLEISTUNG: Kühlfähigkeit des Geräts bei einer
Raumtemperatur von 35°C und einer
Jeder Schaden an der Ware muß dem Frachtführer Schranktemperatur von 35°C, gemäß DIN3168
innerhalb von 8 Tagen ab Erhalt der Ware per AUFGENOMMENE LEISTUNG: Aufgenommene
Einschreiben mitgeteilt werden. Leistung bei einer Schranktemperatur von 35°C und
Für sämtliche Schäden, die beim Transport anfallen, Raumtemperatur von 50°C
haftet der Spediteur. Die Firma STULZ kann nicht für AUTOMATIKSCHALTER TYP C: Wert des
Schäden an der Ware haftbar gemacht werden, die Automatikschalters, der vom Monteur zu installieren
vom Spediteur verursacht wurden; sie trägt aber ihr ist.
Möglichstes bei, um den Kunden unter solchen INNENTEMPERATUR: Schrankinnentemperatur,
Umständen zu unterstützen. zulässige Mindest- und Höchsttemperatur
Dieses Produkt kann nicht ohne schriftliche AUSSENTEMPERATUR: zulässige Mindest- und
Genehmigung der Firma STULZ SPA eingeschickt Höchsttemperatur
werden. GASFÜLLUNG: Kühlmittelmenge im Kühlkreislauf
Bei allen Service-Leistungen wenden Sie sich an: des Geräts
STULZ SPA KÜHLMITTELART: Handelsname des Kühlmittels im
KUNDENDIENST Kühlkreislauf des Geräts
VIA TORRICELLI 3 HÖCHSTDRUCK: Höchstdruck, mit dem der
37067 VALEGGIO SUL MINCIO Kühlkreislauf arbeiten kann
TEL. 045 6331600 - FAX 045 6331635 SCHUTZEINRICHTUNG SCHRANKSEITE:
Schutzgrad IP zum Schrank, an dem das Gerät arbeitet
HINWEIS: Wenn das Produkt nicht sofort SCHUTZEINRICHTUNG RAUMSEITE: Schutzgrad
aufgestellt wird oder noch zu seinem endgültigen IP zum Raum
Bestimmungsort transportiert werden soll, das GEWICHT: Gewicht des leeren Geräts
Gerät nach der Kontrolle wieder in die Verpackung FUNKTIONSWEISE: Arbeitsweise des Geräts
legen und an einem geschützten Ort lagern.
Bei allen Anfragen oder Auskünften über das hier
beschriebene Gerät si t die Kennummer anzugeben.
53
Das Typenschild wird durch Warmpressung auf einen verständigen. Das Gerät nicht in Betrieb nehmen,
Kunststoffträger aufgedruckt. Dadurch wird eine wenn ein Kühlmittelleck festgestellt wurde.
lange Haltbarkeit der Schrift auch bei besonders
ungünstigen Raumbedingungen gewährleistet. 5. HINWEISE ZUR SICHERHEIT
Die Installation und der Betrieb von Klimageräten
3. FUNKTIONSPRINZIP kann gefährlich sein, da es sich um ein unter Druck
Bei den Klimageräten von STULZ handelt es sich um stehendes System mit elektrischen Komponenten
Geräte mit Schutzgrad IP54, die für die Kühlung von handelt.
Elektroschränken entwickelt wurden und für einen Nur Fachpersonal darf die Klimageräte reparieren,
Betrieb in industriell genutzten Räumen geeignet sind. kontrollieren und bedienen.
Ihr Einsatz beseitigt die mit hohen Temperaturen, Ungelerntes Personal darf nur den Filter austauschen.
Schmutz und im Raum befindlicher Feuchtigkeit Alle anderen Arbeiten müssen von qualifiziertem
verbundenen Probleme. Fachpersonal mit Erfahrung bei der Wartung von
Das Gerät, das im wesentlichen aus einem dichten Kühlgeräten ausgeführt werden.
Kühlkreislauf besteht, in dem das Kühlmittel umläuft, Vor Eingriffen an diesem Gerät die Hinweise in diesem
ist in zwei hermetisch getrennte Abschnitte unterteilt, Handbuch beachten, die Angaben auf dem
in denen die Raumluft und die Schrankluft aufbereitet Typenschild überprüfen und alle weiteren
werden, ohne daß diese miteinander in Berührung Vorsichtsmaßnahmen ergreifen, um die größtmögliche
kommen. Sicherheit zu gewährleisten.
Das System arbeitet wie folgt: 6. VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN BEIM
Der Kompressor komprimiert das Kühlgas und bringt
TRANSPORT DES GERÄTS
es auf einen hohen Druck- und Temperaturwert.
Für den Transport des verpackten Geräts einen
Das heiße Gas wird beim Durchlaufen des
Hubwagen oder ein Hubsystem mit Riemen oder
Kondensators gekühlt und verflüssigt; die Hitze wird
Seilen verwenden.
an die Raumluft abgegeben.
Wenn das Gerät nicht verpackt ist, werden 2
Beim Druck durch das Haargefäß oder das
Hubösenschrauben M6 verwendet, die am oberen Teil
thermostatische Ventil erfährt das flüssige Gas einen
des Klimageräts befestigt werden, wo schon die
Druckabfall, der auf die Verdampfung vorbereitet, die
Bohrungen vorgesehen sind.
im Verdampferaustauscher bei Berührung mit der
warmen Luft aus dem Schrank erfolgt, die somit
abgekühlt wird.
MT1 VERDICHTER MT2 ANßENLÜFTER

MT3 INNENLÜFTER TA FROSTSCHUTZTHERMOSTAT
TR REGELTHERMOSTAT HP HOCHDRUCKSCHALTER
C KONDENSATOR E VERDAMPFER
4. VORSICHTSMASSNAHMEN
Die Klimageräte der Serie EVE sind für den Betrieb als 7. INSTALLATION
Wandgeräte und in senkrechter Position angelegt. Die
7.1 Das Gerät aus der Verpackung nehmen. Darauf
Klimageräte der Serie EHE sind für den Betrieb als
achten, daß die hervorstehenden Teile nicht
Deckengeräte in waagerechter Position angelegt. Bei
beschädigt werden. Vor der Entsorgung überprüfen,
beiden Modellen hat sich der Kompressor stets in
ob in der Verpackung Teile oder Unterlagen
senkrechter Position zu befinden. Die Klimageräte
verblieben sind.
dürfen nicht in einer anderen als der für sie gedachten
Überprüfen, ob die vorgeschriebene Netzspannung
Position angewendet oder transportiert werden.
vorliegt.
Wenn das Gerät mit waagerechtem Kompressor auf
7.2 Sicherstellen, daß:
der Seite gelagert wurde, beträgt die Wartezeit vor
a) Genügend Raum für eine einfache Anbringung
dem Einschalten mindestens 8 Stunden. Wenn am
und Wartung sowohl im Schrankinneren als auch
Gerät Ölspuren vorhanden sind, die ein Zeichen für
außen am Schrank vorliegt.
ein Kühlmittelleck innen oder außen sind, die Anlage
b) Der Schrank über einen Schutzgrad von
vor dem Einschalten sorgfältig überprüfen und
mindestens IP54 verfügt.
eventuell die technische Abteilung von STULZ
c) Der Schrank innen sauber ist.
54
d) Der Schrank nicht in der Nähe von Wärmequellen
oder warmen Luftströmen aufgestellt ist.
e) Im Schrankinneren eine angemessene
Luftzirkulation gegeben und ein Rücklauf
ausgeschlossen ist..
Bei den Klimageräten der Serie EVE sind die
folgenden Vorsichtsmaßnahmen zu treffen:
f) Das Klimagerät muß so hoch wie möglich
angebracht werden.
g) Wenn es über einer Tür angebracht wird,
sicherstellen, daß die Scharniere das Gewicht des
Geräts aushalten.
h) Daß das Stromkabel bei geschlossener Tür nicht
reißt oder beschädigt wird.
i) Wenn die Tiefe des Klimageräts die vollständige 7.6 Bei den waagerechten Klimageräten EHE muß der
Türöffnung verhindert, einen Türfeststeller ca. 2 m lange Sicherheitsschlauch zum Ablassen des
anbringen. Kondenswassers ausgerollt werden. Dieser Schlauch
ist nach der Installation des Klimageräts über den
Schrankboden nach außen zu verbringen; einen
gewundenen und ansteigenden Schlauchverlauf
vermeiden.
7.8 Das Klimagerät auf den Schrank auflegen und mit
den entsprechenden Schrauben befestigen.
7.3 Vor Arbeiten am Schrank die Stromversorgung

zum Schrank ausschalten. Bevor Bohrungen oder
Schnitte am Schrank ausgeführt werden, sicherstellen,
daß die Bohrungen, Schrauben, Kabel usw. die schon
installierten Geräte nicht stören.
Schnitte an den Schrankplatten nach der
Bohrschablone vornehmen.
7.4 Nachdem die Bohrungen für die Anbringung
vorgenommen wurden, die Hubösenschrauben zur
Handhabung des Geräts montieren.
7.5 Die Haftdichtung am Rand der am Schrank
vorgenommenen Bohrungen ankleben.
55
8. VIBRATIONEN - Radialgebläse, mit Kunststoff- oder Blechlaufrad, auf
Lagern
Das Klimagerät erzeugt keine besonderen Vibrationen,
Herstellung nach den EN-Normen 60 3351.
da die vibrationserzeugenden Komponenten auf
Behandlung mit Spezialkunststoffen mit
Schwingungsdämpfern installiert sind.
Korrosionsschutz, Isolierungskategorie B und
9. MECHANISCHE KOMPONENTEN Schutzkategorie 1.
Die Motoren verfügen gemäß DIN 40500 über
9.1 GESTELL Schutzgrad IP44. Der Sicherheitsgrad entspricht der
Das Gestell besteht aus pulverbeschichtetem Blech, DIN-Norm 30110.
außer bei abweichenden Angaben, mit Der Geräuschpegel wurde gemäß DIN 45635 erfaßt.
selbsttragenden Platten, die den Zugang zu den
einzelnen Bestandteilen äußerst einfach gestalten. 12. SCHALT-, STEUER- UND
10. KÜHLKOMPONENTEN SICHERHEITSKOMPONENTEN
Alle Geräte werden im Werk überprüft und ausgelegt.
Die Kühlkomponenten sind untereinander durch
Normalerweise sind keine weiteren Einstellungen oder
Kupferrohrleitungen verbunden, die zur
Eingriffe vorgesehen.
Gewährleistung einer größeren Dichtigkeit
Wenn besondere Anforderungen Änderungen an der
miteinander verschweißt sind.
Auslegung der Automatismen erforderlich machen
10.1 KÜHLGAS
sollten, dürfen derartige Eingriffe nur von
Es handelt sich um R134a (Tetrafluoräthan).
Fachpersonal mit Produktspezialisierung nach
Das Gas ist weder giftig oder entzündlich, noch ist es
Benachrichtigung der Firma STULZ SPA
schädlich für die Ozonschicht.
vorgenommen werden.
Bei einigen Modellen, die nicht im Katalog geführt
Das Klimagerät verfügt über eine Reihe von Steuer-
sind, kann das Kühlmittel R22 (HCFC) verwendet
und Schaltkomponenten, die einen einwandfreien
werden.
Betrieb des Geräts garantieren.
10.2 KOMPRESSOR
Das Eingreifen eines jeden der
Es handelt sich um einen dichten Kolbenkompressor.
Sicherheitsautomatismen zeigt eine Störung an, deren
10.3 KONDENSATOR
Ursache unbedingt zu beseitigen ist. Es ist untersagt,
Diese Komponente gestattet den Abbau der Hitze
elektrische Umgehungsleitungen an den
vom Kühlgas zum Raum. Der Kondensator besteht
Sicherheitsgeräten vorzunehmen. Ein solcher Eingriff
aus einem Austauschpaket mit Kupferrohren und
stellt eine Gefahr dar und bewirkt den Verfall der
Aluminiumrippen.
Produktgarantie.
10.4 GASFILTER
12.1 SICHERHEITSDRUCKWÄCHTER BEI
Es handelt sich um einen Filter mit kombinierter,
HOCHDRUCK
mechanisch-chemischer Wirkung, der zur Filtrierung
Dieser Druckwächter stellt den Kompressorbetrieb ab,
des ihn durchlaufenden Kühlmittels dient und
wenn der Innendruck des Kreislaufs über dem
gleichzeitig die Feuchtigkeitspartikel entfernt.
Auslegungswert liegt. Er ist bei Modellen mit
10.5 THERMOSTATVENTIL ODER HAARGEFÄSS
niedriger Leistung nicht vorgesehen.
Diese Komponente bewirkt den Druckabfall des
12.2 DRUCKWÄCHTER BEI NIEDERDRUCK
Kühlmittels auf seinem Weg zum Verdampfer.
Dieser Druckwächter stellt den Kompressorbetrieb ab,
10.6 VERDAMPFER
wenn der
In dieser Komponente erfolgt die Abgabe der in der
Innendruck unter dem Auslegungswert liegt. Er ist
Schrankluft enthaltenen Hitze an das Kühlgas. Der
nur bei den Modellen mit hoher Leistung vorgesehen.
Verdampfer besteht aus Kupferrohren und
12.3 EINSTELLTHERMOSTAT
Aluminiumrippen.
Dieses Thermostat arbeitet mechanisch bei
11. MOTOREN Gasfüllung. Die Thermostatkugel befindet sich am
Eingangspunkt der vom Schrank angesaugten Luft,
11.1 VERDICHTER erfaßt und kontrolliert die Temperatur und gibt dann
Der mit Rotor im Käfig ausgestattete Elektromotor den Kompressorbetrieb frei. Das Thermostat verfügt
befindet sich im Inneren des Kompressors und wird bei den Serienmodellen über fixe Auslegungsgrenzen,
vom kalten Gas, das vom Verdampfer zurückläuft, die den Arbeitsbereich des Klimageräts auf die
gekühlt. Er ist auf schwingungsdämpfenden Federn Auslegungswerte beschränken. Bei einigen Modellen
montiert, um die Vibrationen aufzufangen. kann das mechanische Thermostat durch ein
11.2 GEBLÄSE elektronisches Thermostat ersetzt werden, dessen
Die Gebläsetypen sind je nach Modell verschieden. Eigenschaften, sofern im Klimagerät vorhanden, im
Sie unterscheiden sich in: zweiten Abschnitt des Handbuchs erläutert werden.
- Vielflügel-Schraubengebläse, Rotor außen auf 12.4 FROSTSCHUTZTHERMOSTAT
Lagern, dynamisch ausgewuchtet Dieses Thermostat ähnelt in seiner Art dem
- Kompakt-Schraubengebläse, auf Lagern Einstellthermostat. Seine Auslegung vermeidet die
Eisbildung am Verdampferaustauscher. Es kommt zum
56
Einsatz in waagerechten Modellen und in den vorgenommen. Vorher den Strom ausschalten und
Geräten, bei denen die Betriebsprüfungen deren den Deckel des Klimageräts abnehmen.
Notwendigkeit aufgezeigt haben. Die Standardprodukte verfügen über ein Thermostat,
12.5 KONTAKTGLIED das keine Einstellungen unter 25°C oder über 45°C
Das Kontaktglied ist in den Modellen vorhanden, wo gestattet. Bei Temperaturen, die von dem
die Leistung oder die Komponenten dessen Einsatz vorgegebenen Bereich abweichen, wenden Sie sich an
erfordern. Er steuert die Motoren über Arbeiten des unsere technische Abteilung.
Hilfsschaltkreises. Die Kontaktglieder entsprechen Das Thermostat hat eine Hysterese von 4°C. Daher
der IEC-Norm 947-4-1. erfolgt der Kompressorstart bei einer Temperatur, die
12.6 TRANSFORMATOR etwa 4°C über der Temperatur bei der
Bei Modellen mit hoher Leistung wird der Betriebsunterbrechung liegt.
Transformator für die Umformung der Netzspannung Nach der Einstellung den Deckel schließen und den
in die Spannung der Hilfsschaltkreise verwendet. Strom einschalten.
12.7 SPARTRANSFORMATOR
Dieser Transformator ist in den Modellen vorhanden,
die mit einer von der Standardspannung
abweichenden Spannung arbeiten. Sie sind nach den
Normen EN60742 und CE114-6 konstruiert.
13. ELEKTRISCHE ANSCHLÜSSE

13.1 Die Netzspannung überprüfen.
13.2 Vor Eingriffen am System den Strom ausschalten.
13.3 Für die Anschlüsse die mit dem Gerät gelieferten
Kabel verwenden. Der Netzanschluß muß mit einem
Allpol-Trennschalter oder einem
Motorschutzschalter, der vom Monteur zu installieren
ist, mit einem Abstand von mindestens 3 mm
zwischen den offenen Kontakten ausgeführt werden.
13.4 Überprüfen, daß bei einem Austausch der
mitgelieferten Kabel die Anschlußleitungen über
einen der Leistung und dem Abstand zum Klimagerät
geeigneten Querschnitt verfügen, siehe EN60204.
13.5 Überprüfen, daß der Stromkreis des Klimageräts
16. ERSTE KONTROLLEN NACH DEM
beim Öffnen der Schranktüren unterbrochen wird. START
Überprüfen, daß die aus dem Kondensator
14. INBETRIEBNAHME austretende Luft regelmäßig abfließt, ohne daß sie
Das Klimagerät unter Spannung setzen. erneut vom Klimagerät angesaugt wird.
Wenn die Schranktemperatur unter der auf dem
Thermostat eingestellten Temperatur liegt, schaltet
17. AUSSCHALTEN
sich das Kondensatorgebläse für den Rücklauf der Zum Ausschalten des Geräts die Stromzufuhr
Schrankluft ein und arbeitet fortwährend. unterbrechen.
Wenn die Schranktemperatur über der auf dem
Thermostat eingestellten Temperatur liegt, schaltet 18. WARTUNG
sich der Kompressor und das Außengebläse Für dieses Gerät, das für den Betrieb in industriell
(Kondensator) ein. Sie arbeiten so lange, bis die genutzten Räumen geeignet ist, ist ein geringer
Schranktemperatur einen Wert unter der auf dem Wartungsgrad erforderlich. Die wenigen
Thermostat eingestellten Temperatur erreicht hat. Wartungsarbeiten müssen jedoch ausgeführt werden.
Achtung! Eine nicht erfolgte Wartung beeinträchtigt den
Betriebsunterbrechungen und sofortige Neustarts Betrieb der Maschine und führt zum Verfall der
vermeiden. Zwischen der Betriebsunterbrechung und Garantie von STULZ.
dem nächsten Einschalten müssen mindestens 3 ACHTUNG! Vor sämtlichen Wartungsarbeiten an
Minuten vergehen. der Maschine sicherstellen, daß sie nicht unter
15. TEMPERATUREINSTELLUNG Strom steht.
Hinweis: 18.1 INSTANDHALTUNGS -INTERVALLE
Zu niedrige Schranktemperaturen können schwere 18.1.1 Alle 2 Monate
Probleme an den Schrankkomponenten hervorrufen Kontrollieren, daß der Kondenswasserabfluß des
und erfordern einen höheren Energieverbrauch und Geräts völlig frei ist und einwandfrei funktioniert.
eine größere Kühlleistung. 18.1.2 Jedes Jahr
Die Einstellung wird von Fachpersonal mit einem Überprüfen, daß die Gebläse keine Anzeichen von
Schraubenschlüssel am Thermostatzapfen Überhitzung oder anormalen Vibrationen geben.
57
Überprüfen, daß die Austauscher leistungsfähig und Die Oberleiter müssen in konstantem Kontakt mit den
nicht verschmutzt sind. Überprüfern stehen.
18.1.3 Nach jeder gewöhnlichen oder Durchgangsbereiche, Türen und Treppen in der Nähe
außergewöhnlichen Wartung des Geräts müssen frei sein.
Die volle Leistungsfähigkeit des Die Notausgänge müssen stets frei sein.
Kondenswasserabflusses überprüfen. Glatte Bereiche, die eine potentielle Gefahr für das
Personal darstellen, müssen mit rutschfestem Material
18.2 INTERVALLE ZWISCHEN ausgelegt werden.
AUSSERGEWÖHNLICHEN WARTUNGEN Für jede spezifische Tätigkeit müssen spezielle
Alle 3 Jahre oder alle 10.000 Betriebsstunden muß eine Werkzeuge und Vorgehensweisen angewendet
Generalinspektion des Geräts im Werk von STULZ werden.
oder in den Vertragswerkstätten des Herstellers Die Werkzeuge und die Prüfgeräte müssen in gutem
durchgeführt werden. Die Kosten hierfür trägt der Zustand gehalten werden.
Kunde. Diese Wartung ist auch in bezug auf die Das Personal muß eingehende Kenntnisse über
Bestimmung zur Haftung bei defekten Produkten Methoden und Vorgehen im Brandfall besitzen
erforderlich. (Feuerlöscher in Reichweite aufstellen).
18.3 VORGEHEN BEI REINIGUNGSARBEITEN Beim Entstehen eines Brandherds die folgenden
Zur Reinigung sämtlicher Teile des Klimageräts keine Maßnahmen treffen:
säurehaltigen oder ätzenden Stoffe verwenden. - Die Stromzufuhr zur brennenden Komponente
Die Reinigung des Filters hat nach der Entfernung des unterbrechen.
Klimageräts zu erfolgen. Sollte der Filter ausgetauscht - Die Gebläseleistung erhöhen, um die
werden müssen, muß der Ersatzfilter dieselben Verbrennungsgase abzuleiten.
Eigenschaften in bezug auf Dicke und Dichte wie der - Die verantwortliche Abteilung informieren.
Originalfilter aufweisen. 20.2 GEFAHREN DURCH DIE BERÜHRUNG DES
Ein Satz Ersatzfilter kann beim Kundendienst von PRODUKTS MIT GEGENSTÄNDEN ODER
STULZ angefordert werden. PERSONEN
Die Innenkomponenten des Klimageräts an der Raum- Gefahren dieser Art bestehen nicht.
oder Schrankseite werden bei auf dem Boden 20.3 GEFAHREN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE
abgestellten Gerät mit einer Reinigungsflüssigkeit PROBLEME
oder mit Druckluft bei einem Druck von nicht über 4 20.3.1 SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN FÜR
bar gereinigt. ELEKTRISCHE ANLAGEN - EINLEITUNG
19. LÄNGERER Die Ursachen von elektrischen Risiken sind wohl

BETRIEBSSTILLSTAND bekannt. Sie können unschwer verhütet werden,
sofern man konstante Vorsicht walten läßt.
Vor einem längeren Betriebsstillstand des Geräts
Zur Reduzierung dieser Risiken muß das zuständige
eventuelle Kondenswasserrückstände
Personal über die potentiellen Gefahren informiert und
ablassen und eine Generalreinigung vornehmen.
in die Anwendung der Sicherheitsmaßnahmen
20. INFORMATION ÜBER unterwiesen werden.
20.3.2 AUFGABEN DER VERANTWORTLICHEN
RESTRISIKEN UND NOTFÄLLE LEITER
Bei der Entwicklung dieses Geräts wurden die Die Leiter müssen über die im System vorhandenen
Gefahrensituationen so weit als möglich ausgegrenzt. potentiellen Risiken informiert sein und das für die
Situationen dieser Art entstehen hauptsächlich durch elektrischen Anlagen zuständige Personal
einen uneigentlichen Gebrauch des Produkts und die überwachen. Diese Überwachungstätigkeit besteht in
Nichteinhaltung der Installations-, Betriebs- und der Auffindung von möglichen Gefahrensituationen
Wartungsbestimmungen. und in der Untersuchung der vom Personal während
Das gesamte Bedienungspersonal, das an dieser der Wartungsarbeiten angetroffenen Probleme.
Komponente oder in deren Nähe arbeitet, hat diese Jeder defekte Bestandteil muß umgehend repariert
Informationen zu kennen und muß mit ihnen vertraut oder ausgetauscht werden.
sein. Der Leiter muß auf der Anwendung der
20.1ALLGEMEINE SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN Sicherheitsmaßnahmen bestehen, ohne
Das Personal, das mit der Abnahmeprüfung, der Abweichungen zu tolerieren oder zu akzeptieren, da
Bedienung und der Wartung der Komponente betraut dies zu Personenschäden oder zu Schäden an den
ist, muß die folgenden Sicherheitsvorschriften Geräten führen kann.
kennen: 20.3.3 HOCHSPANNUNG
Die Warnschilder müssen in den möglichen Die Berührung von Schaltkreisen, die unter
Gefahrenbereichen gut sichtbar angebracht sein. Hochspannung stehen, kann Verbrennungen,
In den Gefahrenzonen muß ein Überwachungsdienst Schockzustände und Bewußtlosigkeit verursachen
eingesetzt werden. und auch zum Tod durch Stromschlag der betroffenen
58
Personen führen. Dies kann bei einer unzureichenden - Überprüfung des Eingriffsvorgehens vor Beginn der
Kenntnis der mit dem Gebrauch von elektrischen Arbeit durch Kontrolle des Schaltplans und geistige
Anlagen verbundenen Gefahren geschehen. Vorstellung des Systemaufbaus
Der Schaden, den der menschliche Körper in Während der elektrischen Wartung:
derartigen Fällen erleidet, ist abhängig von der - Der Techniker muß wissen, welche Schaltkreise
Strommenge, der Dauer und dem Stromverlauf m i unter Hochspannung stehen
Körper. - Kein Anlegen von Widerständen in unter Spannung
20.3.4 SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN BEI stehenden Schaltkreisen
AUSGESCHALTETEM GERÄT - Bei Maßnahmen an unter Spannung stehenden
Vor Eingriffen am Gerät die Stromzufuhr zu den Schaltkreisen nur mit einer Hand arbeiten
Schaltkreisen unterbrechen. - Erdung der Instrumentenendverschlüsse vor
Sicherstellen, daß in den Schaltkreisen keine Maßnahmen an unter Spannung stehenden
Spannung vorliegt. Schaltkreisen
Den Arbeitsbereich reinigen und abtrocknen. - Sorgfältige Beachtung der oben stehenden
Steckerstifte, Ringe, Haltebügel und alle anderen Teile Hinweise.
entfernen, die bei der Arbeit stören oder zu Die Wartung kann als beendet angesehen werden,
potentiellen elektrischen Leitern werden könnten. wenn alle Bestandteile wieder eingebaut und das
Die Endverschlüsse der Kondensatoren, die an dem Produkt wieder sein ursprüngliches Aussehen
ausgeschalteten Schaltkreis angeschlossen sind, angenommen hat.
nach Masse durchschlagen oder kurzschließen. 20.4 SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN BEI
Die Sicherungen erst entfernen, wenn der Schaltkreis EINGRIFFEN AM KÜHLKREISLAUF
ausgeschaltet wurde. Das für dieses Gerät verwendete Kühlmittel kann bei
20.3.5 SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN BEI unkorrektem Gebrauch gefährlich sein, daher müssen
WARTUNG AN UNTER SPANNUNG STEHENDEN beim Umgang mit dieser Substanz einige
GERÄTEN Vorsichtsmaßnahmen getroffen werden:
Zu den Anweisungen unter Punkt 2, 3 und 4 - Kühlmittel nicht in der Nähe von offenen Flammen
zusätzlich die folgenden Bestimmungen beachten: ablassen, lagern oder verwenden.
Das Wartungspersonal darf nicht alleine arbeiten. Das Kühlmittel ist nicht giftig, aber in Verbindung mit
Wenn möglich, nur mit einer Hand arbeiten. offenen Flammen entwickelt die Verbrennung
Die Instrumente und die Leitungsdrähte regelmäßig korrosive, toxische Gase.
kontrollieren. - Das Kühlmittel nicht mit den Augen in Berührung
Bei der Umgehung von Sperren (Interlocks) bringen, da es Temperaturen von bis zu -40°C
ausschließlich das genehmigte Vorgehen befolgen. erreichen kann.
Vor dem Eingriff sicherstellen, daß das abgestellte - Das Kühlmittel nicht mit der Haut in Berührung
Personal mit den Bestandteilen des Geräts und dem bringen. Sollte dieser Fall eintreten, muß die
Vorgehen bei der Wartung vollständig vertraut ist. Verletzung mit dem gleichen Vorgehen wie bei
Schutzhandschuhe tragen. Erfrierungen behandelt werden.
Vor der Messung der Widerstandswerte sämtliche - Hohe Kühlmittelkonzentrationen vermeiden, da
Kontakte öffnen, die das Gerät mit Strom versorgen. dadurch Erstickungserscheinungen verursacht
Überprüfen, daß in den Schaltkreisen mit werden können. In einem solchen Fall muß die Person
Niederspannung kein Hochstrom vorliegt. aus dem kühlmittelgesättigten Bereich gebracht und
In der Nähe von starken magnetischen Felder keine künstlich beatmet werden.
magnetischen Werkzeuge verwenden. - Nicht löten oder schweißen, falls Kühlmitteldämpfe
20.3.6 BEIM EINGRIFF ANZUWENDENDE in der Luft vorhanden sind. Keine Ga s-Heizgeräte
SICHERHEITSVORSCHRIFTEN oder elektrische Heizkörper an den Stellen aufstellen,
Wenn kein Dauerbetrieb erforderlich ist, muß das an denen Kühlgasdämpfe in der Luft vorhanden sein
System ausgeschaltet werden. könnten.
Vor Beginn der Arbeit ist folgende Vorbereitung - Nicht rauchen, falls Kühlmitteldämpfe in der Luft
nötig: vorhanden sind.
- Kontrolle am technischen Warter, der keine - Die Gasflaschen nicht überhitzen. Die auf dem
Gegenstände bei sich haben darf, die als Leiter Typenschild angegebene Füllgrenze mit Kühlgas
fungieren könnten nicht überschreiten.
- Überprüfung des Arbeitsbereichs und des Bodens, - Das Öl der Kühlanlage muß vorsichtig gehandhabt
der sauber und trocken sein muß werden, da es Säuren durch ein Brennen des Motors
- Kontrolle der Arbeitsgeräte: Sie müssen für den enthalten kann. Daher Schutzhandschuhe,
Eingriff geeignet sein und sich in gutem Zustand Schutzbrille und Schutzkleidung tragen.
befinden, um den Eingriff unter - Vor Löt- oder Schweißarbeiten den Druck aus der
Sicherheitsbedingungen ausführen zu können gesamten Kühlanlage ablassen. Ein Schweißen bei
- Die Messungsinstrumente müssen regelmäßig unter Druck stehendem Kreislauf ist äußerst
geeicht werden gefährlich durch die Gefahr eines Rohrbruchs und
59
eines Hochschleuderns von geschmolzenem Material schnell austretendem Kühlmittel festgestellt werden,
durch den Druck des Kühlmittels. ist das Bedienungspersonal zu entfernen und der
20.5 GEFAHREN IM BRANDFALL Raum zu lüften.
Keine direkte Gefahr. 20.7 GEFÄHRLICHE FLÜSSIGKEITEN
Das Kühlgas entwickelt beim Vorhandensein von Im Gerät gibt es keine Flüssigkeiten, die für Personen
Flammen giftige und korrosive Stoffe. Aufgrund der gefährlich sind.
relativ geringen Gasmengen im Klimagerät wird es zur Während der Arbeit produziert das Klimagerät
Verhütung dieser Gefahr in Räumen mit ausreichender Kondenswasser, das an die Umgebung abgegeben
Lüftung aufgestellt. wird, sofern es nicht durch den Ableiter abgeleitet
20.6 GIFTIGE STOFFE wird. Diese Flüssigkeit sollte angemessen befördert
Das in diesem Gerät enthaltene Gas ist werden, um mögliche Gefahren bei der Bewegung von
umweltverträglich und lautet auf die Bezeichnung Personen zu vermeiden.
R134a (Tetrafluoräthan). Es ist in geringer Menge
vorhanden und der Kühlkreislauf ist völlig dicht. 21. ABBAU DES GERÄTS
Während der Abnahme werden alle Lecks mit über 15 Dieses Gerät muß von berechtigten Stellen abgebaut
Gramm/Jahr überprüft und beseitigt. werden.
Der Hersteller des Kühlgases erklärt, daß Die Firma STULZ SPA verfügt über Anlagen für die
Gaskonzentrationen von unter 1/1000 unschädlich Wiederverwertung der Flüssigkeiten aus dem
sind. Kühlkreislauf und für den weiteren Abbau und die
Sollte das Gerät nicht in gelüfteten oder ausreichend Wiederverwertung der Produktbestandteile.
großen Räumen installiert sein und ein Leck mit
60
22. STÖRUNGEN - URSACHEN - ABHILFE
22.1 KEINE KÜHLUNG

.1 Kein Bestandteil funktioniert
.1 Das Gerät hat keinen Strom
.1 Überprüfen, ob Türen und Schalter geschlossen sind.
.2 Kompressor, Kondensatorgebläse und Verdampfergebläse funktionieren
.1 Kühlanlage Gasablaß
.1 Den Kühltechniker oder den technischen Servicedienst von STULZ verständigen.
.2 Mechanischer Defekt am Kompressor
.1 Den Kühltechniker oder den technischen Servicedienst von STULZ verständigen.
.3 Kompressor und Außengebläse funktionieren, Innengebläse funktioniert nicht
.1 Elektrischer Kondensator des Gebläses defekt
.1 Elektrischen Kondensator des Gebläses austauschen.
.2 Verdampfergebläse defekt
.1 Gebläse austauschen.
.4 Außengebläse und Innengebläse funktionieren, Kompressor funktioniert nicht
.1 Defekt am Kompressorschutz mit thermischem Strommesser, falls vorhanden
.1 Schutz mit thermischem Strommesser auswechseln und die Leistungsfähigkeit der elektrischen
Kompressorkomponenten überprüfen
.2 Defekt am Relais oder PTC zur Kompressoreinschaltung
.1 Relais oder PTC zur Kompressoreinschaltung auswechseln
.3 Defekt am Startkondensator des Kompressors, falls vorhanden
.1 Den Startkondensator auswechseln
.4 Kompressormotor defekt
.1 Den Kühltechniker oder den technischen Servicedienst von STULZ verständigen
.5 Hochdruckwächter defekt
.6 Kompressorfernschalter defekt, falls vorhanden
.1 Fernschalter auswechseln
.5 Innen- und Außengebläse und Kompressor funktionieren
.1 Einstellthermostat defekt oder auf eine Temperatur ausgelegt, die über der Schranktemperatur liegt
.2 Frostschutzthermostat defekt, falls vorhanden
22.2 KÜHLUNG UNZUREICHEND

.1 Innengebläse funktioniert, Kompressor und Außengebläse funktioniert mit Unterbrechungen
.1 Eingreifen des Frostschutzthermostats
.1 Verdampfer reinigen
.2 Eventuelle äußere Gründe feststellen, die den Luftfluß im Innenkreislauf einschränken können
.2 Eingreifen des Niederdruckwächters, falls vorhanden
.1 Gasfüllung im Kühlkreislauf unzureichend
.2 Defekt am Solenoidventil, falls vorhanden
.1 Spule des Solenoidventils auswechseln
.2 Kondensatorgebläse und Verdampfergebläse funktionieren, Kompressor funktioniert mit
Unterbrechungen
.1 Eingreifen des Hochdruckwächters, falls vorhanden
.1 Raumtemperatur über dem zulässigen Höchstwert des Typenschilds
.1 Raum lüften
.2 Den technischen Servicedienst von STULZ verständigen
.2 Luftfilter verschmutzt
.1 Den verschmutzten Luftfilter reinigen oder, falls erforderlich, auswechseln
.3 Luftumlauf
.1 Überprüfen, daß keine Verstopfungen oder Hindernisse den Umlauf der auszustoßenden
Luft verursachen
.2 Überprüfen, daß die in dieser Betriebsanleitung aufgeführten Mindestabstände zur Wand,
zur Decke, zum Elektroschrank oder zu einem anderen Klimagerät vorliegen
.2 Eingreifen des Kompressorwärmeschutzes
.1 Lufttemperatur im Schrank über dem auf dem Typenschild des Geräts aufgeführten Höchstwert
61
.2 Dieselben Ursachen und Abhilfen, die unter Punkt 22.2.2.1.1./2/3 aufgeführt sind
.3 Innengebläse funktioniert, Außengebläse funktioniert nicht, Kompressor funktioniert mit
Unterbrechungen
.1 Elektrischer Kondensator des Gebläses defekt
.1 Elektrischen Kondensator auswechseln
.2 Außengebläse defekt
.1 Kondensatorgebläse auswechseln
22.3 ÜBERMÄSSIGE KONDENSWASSERBILDUNG

.1 Schrank mit Schutzgrad unter IP54
.1 Kontrollieren, ob die selbsthaftende Dichtung zwischen dem Klimagerät und dem Schrank
korrekt angebracht wurde
.2 Die korrekte Montage der Verschlußplatten des Klimagerätes kontrollieren
.3 Kontrollieren, daß keine Öffnungen an den Schränken vorliegen.
62
SCHEDE TECNICHE – TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS – TECHNISCHE DATEN – FICHE
TECHNIQUE – DATOS TÉCNICOS
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EHE0300220 EHE0300203
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-50/60 110/115-1-
Volts/phase/fréquence – Voltaje/Fase/Frecuencia 50/60
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 180x476x324 180x476x324
/ Depth – Altura / Ancho / Profundidad
Capacità di raffreddamento L35L35 - Cooling capacity L35L35 - Kühlleistung L35L35 - Capacité W 330 330
refroidissement L35L35 – Potenzia Refrigeraci n L35L35 (DIN 3168)
Potenza assorbita L35L50 - Power absorbed L35L50 - Leistungsaufnahme L35L50 - Puissance absorbé W 240 240
L35L50 – Potencia absorbida L35L50 (DIN 3168)
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 1,4 2,8
Corrente assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 5 10
Corriente absorbida al arranque
Portata aria ventilatore condensatore - Condenser fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Kondensatorenlüfter - Débit mc/h
d’air ventilateur condenseur – Caudal aire ventilador lado armario 325 307
Portata aria ventilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h
d’air ventilateur evaporateur – Caudal aire ventilador lado ambiente 164 164
Limiti funzionamento temper. amb. - Working limits ambient temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 20-55 20-55
Umgebungstemperatur– Limites de fonctionnement, température ambiante, – L mites temperatura lato
armario MIN/MAX
Limiti funzionamento temper. armadio - Working limits cabinet temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 25-45 25-45
Schrankinnentemperatur - Limites de fonctionnement, température armoire -Lmites temperatura lato
ambiente MIN/MAX
Protezione lato armadio - Side cabinet protection degree - Schutzeinrichtung Schrankseite - Protection IP 54 54
cote armoire – Protecci n lado armario
Rumorosità ca - Noise level ca. - Geräuschemission ca. - Bruit approx – Nivel de ruido dB(A) 60 60
Funzionamento - Duty cycle - Funktiosweise - Fonctionnement - Funcionamiento % 100 100
Allacciamento – Electric connections - Anschluß – Branchement – Conexión Electrica Cavo 3m/Cable 3m/Kabel 3m/Câble
3m/ Cable 3m
Peso - Weight - Gewicht - Poids - Peso kg 17 19
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EHE04U0220 EHE04U0203

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-60 115-1-60
Volts/phase/fréquence – Voltaje/Fase/Frecuencia
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 1.8 4
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
63
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EHE06S0220 EHE09S0220
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-50/60 230-1-50/60
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m

Corrente Assorbita – Current ab sorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 5 2,9
Corrente assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 17 9,8
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
64
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/ Frequenz - V ph Hz 115-1-60 230-1-60
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 350x604x446 350x604x 446
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 8.9 4.3
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
Rumorosità ca - Noise level ca. - Geräuschemission ca. - Bruit approx – N i v el de ruido dB(A) 65 65
3m/ Cable 3m

Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 12 6,6
d’air ventilateur evaporateur – Caudal aire ventilador lado am biente 860 860
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
65
Volts/phase/fréquence – Voltaje/Fase/Frec uencia 50/60
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 5 5
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m

Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hau teur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 487x804x480 487x804x480
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
66
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EHE28U0201 EHE4100220
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-60 230-1-50/60
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 8,8 9
d’air ven tilateur condenseur – Caudal aire ventilador lado armario 2440 3410
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EHE4100221 EHE41U0201

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 400-3-50/60 230-1-60
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
67
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EHE6000221
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 400-3-50/60
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 488x908x554
Capacità di raffreddamento L35L35 - Cooling capacity L35L35 - Kühlleistung L35L35 - Capacité W 5200
Potenza assorbita L35L50 - Power absorbed L35L50 - Leistungsaufnahme L35L50 - Puissance absorbé W 3300
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 4,8
Corrente assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 25
d’air ventilateur condenseur – Caudal aire ventilador lado armario 3410
d’air ventilateur evaporateur – Caudal aire ventilador lado ambiente 1450
Limiti funzionamento temper. amb. - Working limits ambient temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 25-45
armario MIN/MAX
Limiti funzionamento temper. armadio - Working limits cabinet temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 20-50
ambiente MIN/MAX
Protezione lato armadio - Side cabinet protection degree - Schutzeinrichtung Schrankseite - Protection IP 54
Rumorosità ca - Noise level ca. - Geräuschemission ca. - Bruit approx – Nivel de ruido dB(A) 75
Funzionamento - Duty cycle - Funktiosweise - Fonctionnement - Funcionamiento % 100
3m/ Cable 3m
Peso - Weight - Gewicht - Poids - Peso kg 17
68
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EVE0300220 EVE0300203
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Hei ght / Width mm 436x320x180 436x320x180
Limiti funzionamento temper. amb. - Working limits ambient temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 20/55 20/50
armario MIN/MAX
Limiti funzionamento temper. armadio - Working limits cabinet temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 25/45 25/45
ambiente MIN/MAX
Rumoros ità ca - Noise level ca. - Geräuschemission ca. - Bruit approx – Nivel de ruido dB(A) 60 60
3m/ Cable 3m
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EVE0400220 EVE04U0220

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-50/60 230-1-60
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
69
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EVE04U0203 EVE0800220
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 115-1-60 230-1-50/60
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 634x308x 221 634x308x221
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
Peso - Wei ght - Gewicht - Poids - Peso kg 23 26
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EVE08U0220 EVE08U0203

d’air ventilateur evaporateur – Caudal aire ventilador lado ambient e 325 325
armario MIN/MAX
Limiti funzionament o temper. armadio - Working limits cabinet temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 25/45 25/45
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
70
Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-50/60 230/1/50-60
Corrente assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 14,5 16
Portata aria ventilatore condensatore - Condenser fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Kondensatorenlüfter - Débit mc/h 860
Portata aria ventilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h 575
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230/1/50-60 400/440-1-
Portata aria ventilatore condensatore - Condenser fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Kondensatorenlüfter - Débit mc/h 860 860
d’air ventilateur condenseur – Caudal aire ventilador lado armario
Portata aria ventilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h 575 575
d’air ventilateur evaporateur – Caudal aire ventilador lado ambiente
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
71
Corrent e assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 32 17
Portata aria ventilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h 575
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230/1/50-60 400-3-50/60
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 934x406x244 1004/406/244
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 4,8 2
Portat a aria ventilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h 860 860
armario MIN/MAX
Schrankinnentem peratur - Limites de fonctionnement, température armoire -Lmites temperatura lato
ambiente MIN/MAX
Allacciamento – Electric connections - Anschluß – Branch ement – Conexión Electrica Cavo 3m/Cable 3m/Kabel 3m/Câble
3m/ Cable 3m
72
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230/1/50-60 400-3-50/60
L35L50 – Potencia abs orbida L35L50 (DIN 3168)
Portata aria ventilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h 860 860
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
73
Capac ità di raffreddamento L35L50 - Cooling capacity L35L50 - Kühlleistung L35L50 - Capacité W 2900 2900
Corrente assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 46,5 18
Portata aria v entilatore evaporatore - Evaporator fan air flow - Luftdurchsatz Verdampferlüfter - Débit mc/h 1450
Limiti funzionamento temper. amb. - Working limits ambient temperature - Betriebs grenzwerte °C 20/50 20/50
armario MIN/MAX
ambiente MIN/MAX
3m/ Cable 3m
Codice- Code - Kodex - Code - Còdego EVE41U0201

Tensione/Fase/Frequenza -Voltage /Phase/Frequency - Zulässige Variation Spannung/Frequenz - V ph Hz 230-1-60
Höhe / Breite / Tiefe - Hauteur / Largeur / Profondeur - Altezza / Larghezza / Profondita’ - Height / Width mm 1234x508x375
Potenza assorbita L35L50 - Power absorbed L35L50 - Leistungsaufnahme L35L50 - Puissance absorbé W 1780
Corrente Assorbita – Current absorbed -Nennstrom - Courant absorbé – Corriente absorbida A 9,2
Corrente assorbita avvio - Current absorbed start - Anlaufstrom - Courant absorbé en démarrage - A 46,5
Portata aria ventilatore condensatore - Condenser fan air flow - Luf tdurchsatz Kondensatorenlüfter - Débit mc/h
Limiti funzionamento temper. amb. - Working limits ambient temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 20/50
armario MIN/MAX
Limiti funzionamento temper. armadio - Working limits cabinet temperature - Betriebsgrenzwerte °C 25/45
ambiente MIN/MAX
Protezione lato armadio - Side cabinet protection degree - Schutzeinrichtung Schrankseite - Protection IP 54
Rumorosità ca - Noise level ca. - Geräuschemission ca. - Bruit approx – Nivel de ruido dB(A) 70
Funzionamento - Duty cycle - Funktiosweise - Fonctionnement - Funcionamiento % 100
3m/ Cable 3m
Peso - Weight - Gewicht - Poids - Peso kg 83
74
Schema Elettrico/Electrical scheme/ Elektrisch
schema/Electrique plan/Esquema electrico
Legenda: Caption: Legende: Légende: Explicaci n:

MT1: Ventilatore MT1: Evaporator fan MT1: MT1: Ventilateur MT1: Ventilador
evaporatore MT2: Compressor Verdampfersventilatoren Evaporateur evaporador
MT2: Compressore MT3: Condenser fan MT2: Kompressor MT2: Compresseur MT2: Compresor
MT3: Ventilatore ATF: Autotransformer MT3: MT3: Ventilateur MT3: Ventilador
condensatore TR: Regulating Kondensatorsventilator Condensateur condensador
ATF: Autotrasformatore thermostat en ATF: ATF: Autotransformador
TR: Termostato di HP: High pressure ATF: Autotrasformator Autotransformateur TR: Termostato de
regolazione switch TR: Regelthermostat TR: Regulating de regulacion
HP: Pressostato di alta TA: Antifreeze HP: Hockdruckwchter reglage HP:
pressione thermostat TA: HP: Manostat haute TA:
TA: Termostato antigelo K2: Compressor Frostshutzthermostat pression K2:
K2: Contattore contactor K2: Kompressor TA: Thermostat antigel CVC-E: Condensador
compressore CVC-E: Fan condenser Kontaktgeber K2: Contacteur ventilador
CVC-E: Condensatore CVC-E: compresseur
ventilatore Kondensatorsventilator CVC-E: Condensateur
en ventilateur
75
Schema Elettrico/Electrical scheme/ Elektrisch
schema/Electrique plan/Esquema electrico
Legenda: Caption: Legende: Légende: Explicaci n:

MT1: Ventilatore MT1: Evaporator fan MT1: MT1: Ventilateur MT1: Ventilador
evaporatore MT2: Compressor Verdampfersventilator Evaporateur evaporador
MT2: Compressore MT3: Condenser fan en MT2: Compresseur MT2: Compresor
MT3: Ventilatore ATF: Autotransformer MT2: Kompressor MT3: Ventilateur MT3: Ventilador
condensatore TR: Regulating MT3: Condensateur condensador
ATF: thermostat Kondensatorsventilat ATF: ATF:
Autotrasformatore HP: High pressure oren Autotransformateur Autotransformador
TR: Termostato di switch ATF: Autotrasformator TR: Regulating de TR: Termostato de
regolazione TA: Antifreeze TR: Regelthermostat reglage regulacion
HP: Pressostato di thermostat HP: HP: Manostat haute HP:
alta pressione K2: Compressor Hockdruckwchter pression TA:
TA: Termostato contactor TA: TA: Thermostat K2:
antigelo CVC-E: Fan condenser Frostshutzthermostat antigel CVC-E: Condensador
K2: Contattore K2: Kompressor K2: Contacteur ventilador
compressore Kontaktgeber compresseur
CVC-E: Condensatore CVC-E: CVC-E: Condensateur
ventilatore Kondensatorsventilat ventilateur
oren
76
CONNESSIONE ELETTRICA
Se l’unità è predisposta per due tensioni di alimentazione (ExExx230): 440V/50-60Hz, 400V/50-60Hz

Il condizionatore viene collegato in fabbrica per una tensione di alimentazione di 440V
Per alimentare il condizionatore a 400Vprocedere come segue:
• Svitare le 4 viti di fissaggio del pannello
• Togliere il pannello facendo attenzione al cavo di massa collegato tramite fast-on
• Spostare il filo collegato al morsetto 440 e collegarlo al morsetto 400 dell’autotrasformatore
• Riposizionare il pannello
• Avvitare le 4 viti di fissaggio
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
If the unit is designed for two supply voltages (ExExx230): 440V/50-60, 400V/50-60Hz
The air conditioner is factory set up a 440V supply voltage.
To power it at 400V proceed as follow:
• Unscrew the 4 screw that fasten the front panel
• Lift the panel, using care not to detach the ground cable wich is connected with fast-on coupling s
• Move the wire connected to terminal 440 to 400 (autotransformer)
• Put the panel pack in place
• Screw the 4 fastening screw
CONNEXION ELECTRIQUE
Si l’unité est prédisposée pour deux tension d’alimentation (ExExx230): 440V/50-60Hz 400V/50-60Hz.
Le conditionneur est connecté en usine pour une tension d’alimentation de 440V.
Pour alimenter le conditionneur à 400V, il faut procéder comme suit :
• Dévisser les 4 vis qui fixent le panneau
• Enlever le panneau, faisant attention au câble de masse connecté par fast-on
• Déplacer le fil connecté à la borne 440 et le connecter à la borne 400 de l’autotransformateur
• Reposer le panneau
• Visser les 4 vis de fixation
ELEKTRISCHER ANSCHLUSS
Falls das Geraet fuer doppelte Spannung vorgesehen ist (ExExx230): 440V/50-60Hz 400V/50-60Hz.
Das Geraet fwird werkseit fuer die Spannung 440V angeschlossen.
Fuer die Spannung 400V ist folgendes zu tun:
• Abschrauben die 4 Schrauben vom Paneel
• Herausnehemn das Paneel, Vorischt mit dem Erdkabel (mit fast-on befestigt)
• Beseitigen das Kabel von Klemme 440 auf Klemme 400 des Trafos
• Fortlegen das Paneel
CONEXION ELECTRICA
Si la unidad es predisponida para dos tensiones de alimentacion (ExExx230):

440V/50-60Hz,400V/50-60Hz
El condicionador es predisponilo para una tension de alimentacion de 440V.
Para alimentar el condicionador a 400V procedar come sigue.
• Destornillar los 4 tornillos que fijian el cuarteron
• Desenclavar el cuarteron ponendo atencion al cable de masa enlazarlo a la grapa 400 de el “auto-transformador”
• Poner nuovamente el cuarteron
• Tornillar los 4 trornillos que fijian el cuarteron.
77
WARRANTY
STULZ SPA guarantees that the product is free from any quality defects.
The Company guarantees for:
1 YEAR - ALL THE UNIT’S PARTS AS OF THE DATE IT IS PLACED ON THE MARKET, PROVIDED IT
OPERATES UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:
1) With cabinet TEMPERATURES not higher or lower than its rated temperatures;
2) IN CIRCUITS not requiring cooling power exceeding the power indicated in the appropriate data plate;
3) IN ENVIRONMENTS with temperatures not higher or lower than those indicated in the appropriate data
plate;
4) ON CABINETS having a minimum IP54 protection level;
5) When THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS MANUAL ARE COMPLETELY AND FULLY MET.
THIS WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER ANY DAMAGE TO THE UNIT CAUSED BY:
a) Introducing into the cooling circuit any gases which differ, from a quantity or quality point of view, from
those indicated in the appropriate data plate;
b) Operating the unit in acid or corrosive environments.
Should any parts be found to be defective during the period of this warranty STULZ SPA shall, at its full
discretion, repair or replace free of charge such defective parts in its works or in any other authorised
site.
Any other charges arising from the removal, handling and installation of the unit shall not be refunded by
STULZ SPA.
Any servicing required by the costumer to be carried out at its site, even during the warranty period, shall be
invoiced in accordance with the ANIMA fee schedule.
For the purpose of the terms of this warranty, any repair or replacement of products, shall not modify the
commencement and termination dates of this warranty.
STULZ SPA shall not bear any other liability, other than repair and replace any products which be may be
found to be defective and deliver them to a designated port (at the customer’s expense).
This warranty shall become forthwith null and void, as soon as the product is altered or modified in its
structure or in its circuits.
THE CUSTOMER is fully responsible for earthing, installing and connecting the unit in accordance with all
current standards.
In the event of any liability arising from damages resulting from a defective product, the EEC85.374 standard
shall apply; in respect of such a liability, STULZ SPA is covered by appropriate insurance policy. To all
legal effects, we advise that the date of the placement on the market is the date shown on the technical
DATA plate on the unit.
78
GARANZIA
La STULZ SPA garantisce che il prodotto è esente da difetti di qualità.
Garantisce per:
3 anni tutti i componenti dell’unità, a partire dalla data di immissione sul mercato, quando opera nelle
seguenti condizioni:
1) Con temperature dell’armadio non superiori e non inferiori alle temperature di targa;
2) In circuiti che non richiedano potenze di raffreddamento superiori alla potenza indicata sulla targa;
3) In ambienti con temperature non superiori o non inferiori al valore di targa;
4) Su armadi con un grado minimo di protezione IP54;
5) Quando le norme presenti nel manuale sono completamente ed integralmente rispettate.
Questa garanzia non copre i danni causati all’unità dovuti a:

a) Introduzione nel circuito frigorifero di gas diversi, per quantità o qualità, da quello indicato in targa;
b) Funzionamento dell’unità in ambienti con atmosfera acida o corrosiva;
Per ogni parte risultata difettosa, nel periodo di garanzia, la STULZ SPA provvederà, a proprio insindacabile
giudizio, alla riparazione o sostituzione, nei propri stabilimenti o in azienda dalla stessa autorizzate,
senza addebito alcuno, dei componenti risultati difettosi. Tutte le altre spese che sorgessero,
relativamente alla rimozione, movimentazione ed installazione non saranno rimborsate dalla STULZ SPA.
Gli interventi, anche in garanzia, richiesti dal cliente presso la propria sede, saranno fatturati secondo le
tariffe ANIMA.
Ai fini dei termini di garanzia, i prodotti riparati o sostituiti, non modificano i tempi di inizio e di cessazione
della garanzia stessa.
La STULZ SPA non si assume alcuna responsabilità, oltre a quella di riparare o sostituire i prodotti risultati
difettosi e di riconsegnarli in Porto Assegnato (spese a carico del cliente).
La garanzia decade, con effetto immediato, quando il prodotto viene alterato o modificato nella sua struttura
o nei suoi circuiti.
E’ a carico del cliente, che se ne assume tutte le responsabilità, la corretta messa a terra, l’installazione e
l’allacciamento dell’unità in conformità delle normative vigenti.
Per eventuali responsabilità per danni risultanti da prodotto difettoso si fa riferimento alla direttiva
CEE85/374; Per tale responsabilità la STULZ SPA gode di relativa polizza assicurativa. Ai fini della
stessa legge si informa che la data di immissione sul mercato è la data rilevabile sulla targa tecnica
dell’unità.
79
GARANTIA
La empresa STULZ SPA garantiza que el producto está libre de defectos de calidad.
La misma garantiza todos los componentes de la unidad, durante 1 año, contado desde la fecha de introducción en el
mercado, con que funcione con arreglo a las condiciones siguientes:
1) Con temperaturas del cuadro que no sean mayores ni menores de las temperaturas indicadas en la placa de datos;
2) En circuitos que no requieren unas potencias de enfriamiento mayores de la potencia indicada en la placa de datos;
3) En lugares con temperaturas que no sean mayores ni menores del valor indicado en la placa de datos;
4) En cuadros con un grado mínimo de protección IP54;
5) Cumpliendo por completo y integralmente con las normas contenidas en este manual.
Esta garantía no cubre los daños causados a la unidad por:

a) La introducción en el circuito frigorífico de gases distintos, por cantidad o calidad, de aquel que está indicado en la
placa de datos;
b) El funcionamiento de la unidad en lugares donde haya atmósfera ácida o corrosiva.
Para cada parte que haya resultado defectuosa dentro del plazo de garantía, la empresa STULZ SPA, a su juicio
inapelable, realizará la reparación o la sustitución, en su fábrica o en una empresa que ella misma haya autorizado,
sin pago alguno, de los componentes resultados defectuosos. Todos los demás gastos causados eventualmente
por la remoción, el movimiento y la instalación, no serán reembolsados por STULZ SPA.
Las intervenciones, aunque sean en el plazo de garantía, que el cliente haya pedido, se le facturarán según las tarifas
de ANIMA.
Respecto al plazo de garantía, los productos reparados o sustituidos no modifican los tiempos del comienzo y de la
finalización de la garantía misma.
STULZ SPA, no toma a su cargo ninguna otra responsabilidad, aparte de aquella de reparar o sustituir los productos
resultados defectuosos y de volver a entregarlos con porte debido (gastos a cargo del cliente).
La garantía se pierde, con efecto inmediato, cuando el producto es alterado o modificado en su estructura o en sus
circuitos.
Queda a cargo del cliente, quien asume todas las responsabilidades correspondientes, la correcta puesta a tierra, la
instalación y la conexión de la unidad con arreglo a la reglamentación vigente.
Para las eventuales responsabilidades para daños causados por un producto defectuoso hay que referirse a la
directiva CEE 85/374. Para dicha responsabilidad STULZ SPA disfruta de una póliza de seguro al efecto. Para los
fines previstos por la misma ley se informa que la fecha de introducción en el mercado es la fecha que aparece en
la placa técnica de la unidad.
80
GARANTIE
STULZ SPA garantit que son produit est sans défauts de qualité.
Elle garantit pendant troi années tous les composants de l'unité, à compter de la date d'introduction sur le marché,
lorsqu'elle travaille dans les conditions suivantes:
1) à des températures de l'armoire non supérieures et non inférieures aux températures de plaque;
2) dans des circuits qui n'exigent pas des puissances de refroidissement supérieures à la puissance indiquée sur la plaque;
3) dans des locaux où les températures ne sont pas supérieures ou inférieures aux valeurs de plaque;
4) sur des armoires ayant un degré minimum de protection IP54;
5) lorsque les normes indiquées dans ce manuel sont complètement et entièrement observées.
Cette garantie ne couvre pas les dommages causés à l'unité par:
a) l'introduction dans le circuit frigorifique de gaz différents, par quantité ou qualité, du gaz de plaque;
b) le fonctionnement de l'unité dans des milieux où l'atmosphère est acide ou corrosive.
Pour toute pièce résultée défectueuse dans la période de garantie, STULZ SPA effectuera, à son avis incontestable, le
dépannage ou le remplacement dans ses usines ou dans l'entreprise qu'elle autorisera, sans aucune charge. Tous les
autres frais découlant de la dépose, de la manutention et de la mise en place ne seront pas remboursés par STULZ
SPA.
Les interventions, même sous garantie, demandées par le client chez lui seront facturées suivant le barème ANIMA.
Aux effets des termes de la garantie, les produits réparés ou remplacés ne modifient pas les délais de commencement
et de cessation de la garantie.
STULZ SPA ne s'assume aucune responsabilité, outre celle de réparer ou de remplacer les produits qui se sont avérés
défectueux et de les rendre en port dû (frais à la charge du client).
La garantie déchoit immédiatement lorsque le produit est fraudé ou modifié dans sa structure ou ses circuits.
La mise à la terre, la mise en place et le branchement corrects de l'unité conformément à la réglementation actuellement
en vigueur incombent au client, qui s'assume toutes les responsabilités.
Pour les responsabilités éventuellement issues de dommages causés par un produit défectueux, on se rapporte à la
directive CEE 85/374. Pour cette responsabilité, STULZ SPA bénéficie d'une police d'assurance. Aux termes de la
même loi, on informe que la date d'introduction sur le marché est la date qui peut être lue sur la plaque technique de
l'unité.
81
GARANTIE
Die Firma STULZ SPA garantiert, daß das Produkt frei von Qualitätsfehlern ist.
Die Garantie gilt:
1 Jahr auf alle Komponenten des Geräts ab seiner Einsetzung auf den Markt bei Betrieb unter den folgenden
Bedingungen:
1) Bei Schranktemperaturen, die nicht über und unter den auf dem Typenschild angegebenen Temperaturen liegen
2) In Schaltkreisen, die keine höheren Kühlleistungen als die auf dem Typenschild angegebene Leistung erfordern
3) In Räumen mit Temperaturen, die nicht über oder unter dem auf dem Typenschild angegebenen Wert liegen
4) An Schränken mit einem Mindestschutzgrad IP54
5) Bei vollständiger und genauer Beachtung der Bestimmungen in der vorliegenden Betriebsanleitung
Folgende Ursachen für Schäden am Gerät werden nicht von dieser Garantie abgedeckt:
a) Einführung in den Kühlkreislauf von Gasen, die mengen- oder qualitätsmäßig von den Angaben auf dem
Typenschild abweichen
b) Betrieb des Geräts in Räumen mit säurehaltiger oder ätzender Luft
Im Garantiezeitraum wird jedes fehlerhafte Teil von der Firma STULZ SPA nach ihrem unanfechtbaren Urteil in ihrem
Werk oder in ihren Vertragswerkstätten ohne jegliche Kostenanrechnung repariert oder ersetzt. Alle weiteren
Kosten, die beim Abbau, Transport und der Installation entstehen sollten, werden von STULZ SPA nicht
erstattet.
Angeforderte Leistungen im Hause des Kunden - auch im Garantiezeitraum - werden nach den ANIMA-Tarifen
berechnet.
Beginn und Ende des Garantiezeitraums bleiben auch bei Reparatur oder Austausch von Teilen unverändert.
Die Firma STULZ SPA übernimmt keine Haftung, die über die Reparatur oder den Austausch der als fehlerhaft
anerkannten Teile und über deren unfreie Rückgabe (auf Kosten des Kunden) hinausgeht.
Die Garantie verfällt mit unmittelbarer Wirkung, wenn das Produkt in seiner Struktur oder seinen Kreisläufen
verändert oder manipuliert wird.
Der Kunde trägt die Kosten und die Haftung für die korrekte Erdung, Installation und den Anschluß des Geräts in
Übereinstimmung mit den geltenden Bestimmungen.
Bei einer eventuellen Haftung für Schäden durch fehlerhafte Produkte wird Bezug genommen auf die EG-Richtlinie
85/374. Für Ansprüche dieser Art ist die Firma STULZ SPA durch eine Produkthaftpflichtversicherung geschützt.
Zu diesem Gesetz erfolgt die Angabe, daß unter dem Datum der Einsetzung in den Markt das Datum auf dem
Typenschild des Geräts zu verstehen ist.
82
ANNEXES F
Anne F
Procedures

A Smith / Schlumberger Company
Mantovani&Vicentini BOWL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE CD600 FH T.P.NO. Page

Italy PROCEDURA DI ASSEMBLAGGIO GRUPPO ---- 1 of 8
BOWL CD600FH
The picture shows the cylindrical drum water side (drawing number 7506).
Clean and check the coupling surface to avoid the presence of any dent.
L’immagine mostra il tamburo cilindrico lato acqua (numero disegno 7506).

Pulire e controllare la superficie di accoppiamento per evitare la presenza di
eventuali ammaccature.
Distribute the grease on the surface through a bristle brush.
Distribuire il grasso sulla superficie con l’aiuto di un pennello a setole.
Join the cylindrical drum muds side (drawing number 7504) to the cylindrical
drum water side (drawing number 7506): pay attention to maintain a horizontal
position. Join the two parts with 24 screws M16x40 inox.
The bowl assembly needs to be in a vertical position.
Unire il tamburo cilindrico lato fanghi (numero disegno 7504) al tamburo

cilindrico lato acqua (numero disegno 7506): prestare attenzione a mantenere
una posizione possibilmente orizzontale. Unire le due parti con 24 viti M16x40
inox.
L’assemblaggio della bowl deve essere eseguito in posizione verticale.
Use a centering pin cone (drawing number 7535-10X40mm) between the two
components.
Utilizzare una spina di centraggio coni (numero disegno 7535-10x40mm) tra i

due componenti.
Rev. Issued Approved Date

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
Use again the centering pin cone (drawing number 7535) fitted on the conical
intermediate drum (drawing number 7505) to unite the cylindrical and conical
section.
Utilizzare nuovamente una spina di centraggio coni (numero di disegno 7535)

inserita nel tamburo conico intermedio (numero di disegno 7505) per unire la
parte cilindrica a quella conica.
Assemble the two parts with 24 screws M16x40 mm.
Assemblare le due parti con 24 viti M16x40mm.
Distribuite the Loctite 270 (as shown in the following picture) on the external
surface of the bushing housing of muds discharge (drawing number 1395/B).
Insert the bushings housing in the proper holes of the conical drum (number
drawing 7508).
Distribuire loctite 270 (come mostrato nella figura di seguito) sulla superficie
esterna della porta boccola per scarico fanghi (numero di disegno 1395/B).
Inserire la porta boccola nell’apposita cavità del tamburo conico (numero di
disegno 7508).

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
Insert the mud unloading bush (number drawing 8538) on the bushing housing:
Weigh the mud unloading bush and place at the opposite position those of the
same weight.
Inserire la boccola scarico fanghi (numero di disegno 8538) nel porta boccola.
Pesare le boccole scarico fanghi e posizionare quelle di peso equivalente in
posizione opposta.
To facilitate the entry of the mud unloading bush on the bushing housing help
yourself with a plastic hammer.
Per facilitare l’ingresso della boccola scarico fanghi nel porta boccola scarico
fanghi aiutarsi con un martello in plastica.
The edge of the muds unloading bush and of the bushing housing doesn’t have
to be discharged from the internal surface of the conical drum.
Lo spigolo della boccola scarico fanghi e del porta boccola non devono
sporgere oltre la superficie interna del tamburo conico.
To correct the position of the muds unloading bush and of the bushing housing
use the plastic hammer.
Per correggere la posizione della boccola scarico fanghi e del porta boccola
usare un martello di plastica.

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
Distribute Loctite 270 on the screws M10x20 mm and on the knife cleaning
muds (drawing number 6550).
Check the surface of the knife cleaning muds and of his housing to avoid the
presence of dent or dirtiness.
Distribuire Loctite 270 sulle viti M10x20 mm e sopra il coltello pulizia fanghi
(numero di disegno 6550). Controllare la superficie del coltello pulizia fanghi e
del suo alloggiamento per evitare la presenza di ammaccature o sporcizia.
Clean the knife cleaning muds housing with compressed air.

Screw the knife cleaning muds with screws M10x20mm
Pulire l’alloggiamento del coltello pulizia fanghi con aria compressa.

Avvitare il coltello pulizia fanghi con viti M10x20mm.
Use a torque wrench applying a value of 35 Nm.
Usare una chiave dinamometrica applicando un valore di 35 Nm.
Use again the centering pin cone (drawing number 7535) to join at the top the
conical drum ,assembled with the muds unloading bushes, to the conical
intermediate drum..
Utilizzare nuovamente la spina di centraggio coni (number drawing 7535) per

unire dall’alto il tamburo conico, assemblato con le boccole scarico fanghi, al
tamburo conico intermedio.

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
Connect the two surfaces maintaining a horizontal position: use a plastic

hammer to facilitated the operation. Screw.
Unire le due superfici mantenendo una posizione orizzontale: usare un martello

di plastica per facilitare l’operazione. Avvitare.
Complete the bowl assembling using a torque wrench with a value applied of
150 Nm as shown in the picture.
Completare l’assemblaggio della bowl utilizzando una chiave dinamometrica

con un valore applicato di 150 Nm come rappresentato in figura.
The pictures shows the structure of the bowl internal surface: the presence of
the shims welded on the internal surface increase the abrasive and cutting
property.
L’immagine mostra la struttura della superficie interna della bowl: la presenza

dei listelli saldati sulla superficie interna incrementa le proprietà abrasive e
taglienti.
The thickness of the shims change going from the cylindrical to the conical
section.
Lo spessore dei listelli cambia passando dalla sezione cilindrica a quella

conica.

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
MUDS SIDE.
Use the centering pin cone and proceed to join, in horizontal position, the small
flange with shaft (drawing number 7503) to the conical drum (number drawing
7508)
LATO FANGHI..
Usare la spina di centraggio coni e procedere a unire la flangia piccola con
albero (numero di disegno 7503) al tamburo conico (numero di disegno 7508)
Proceed to screw using a torque wrench with a value applied of 150 Nm

(screws M16x40mm)
WATER SIDE.
Assemble the main flange with shaft (drawing number 7502) and proceed
following the same procedure of assembling as above described :check the
surface to avoid any dent, use a centering pin cone and screw using a torque
wrench with a value applied of 150 Nm-screws M16x40mm.
LATO ACQUA.
Assemblare la flangia grande con albero (numero di disegno 7502) e procedere
seguendo la stessa procedura di assemblaggio sopra descritta: controllare la
superficie per evitare la presenza di ammaccature, usare la spina di centraggio e
avvitare usando una chiave dinamometria con un valore applicato di 150Nm-
viti M16x40mm.
Fit on the six flanges of water discharge level (number drawing 6601): use
screws M6x20 mm.
The bending radius of the flange of water discharge fitted is 170 mm (the kit
includes also respectively 180mm and 160 mm as bending radius).
Assemblare le sei flange di livello per scarico acqua (numero di disegno 6601):
utilizzare viti M6x20mm.
Il raggio di curvatura della flangia di livello scarico acqua montata è di 170 mm
(a corredo sono fornite anche flange di raggio di curvatura rispettivamente di
160mm e 180mm).

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
Distribuite grease and fit the feather UNI 6604-A (dimension 36x20x140) on
the shaft housing.
To proceed on the water side centrifuge assembly spread the main flange shaft
surface with grease and introduce the spacer labyrinths water side (drawing
number 7566)
Distribuire il grasso e introdurre nell’apposito alloggiamento la linguetta UNI

6604-a (dimensioni 36x20x140).
Per procedure con l’assemblaggio della centrifuga lato acqua, distribuire il
grasso sulla superficie dell’albero della flangia grande e introdurre il
distanziale labirinto lato acqua (numero di disegno 7566).
Assemble on the main flange with shaft the reducing flange transmission
(drawing number 7514)..
Assemblare sull’albero della flangia grande la flangia di trasmissione riduttore

(numero di disegno 7514).
Use a blank flange, a tubing (with two holes to screw the tubing with the
reducing flange transmission) and a long threaded screw with a welded nut at
the end, as tools, to proceed in the bowl assembling as shown in the picture.
Usa una flangia chiusa, una porzione di tubolare (con due fori per consentire
l’accoppiamento con la flangia trasmissione riduttore) e una lunga vite filettata
con un dado saldato all’estremità come utensili per consentire l’assemblaggio
della bowl come mostrato in figura.
The picture shows a section of the reducing flange transmission assembled to

the feather and the blank flange used as tool for the bowl
assembling/disassembling.
L’immagine mostra una sezione della flangia trasmissione riduttore accoppiata

alla linguetta e la flangia chiusa usata come utensile per
l’assemblaggio/disassemblaggio della bowl.

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3

BOWL CD600FH
As shown in the picture proceed to assemble muds side centrifuge following

the same sequence of components: insert the feather UNI 6604-A
36x20x125, the spacer for pulley (number drawing 7526) and the pulley 8
grooves SPB
Procedere come mostrato in figura con il montaggio della centrifuga lato

fango seguendo la medesima sequenza dei componenti:la linguetta UNI
6604-A 36x20x125, il distanziale per puleggia (numero di disegno 7526) e
la puleggia 8 gole SPB.
Notice that the presence of the screw M10x25mm is important for the
assembly-line balancing.
Notare che la presenza della vite M10x25 mm è importante per la linea di

bilanciatura.

0 05/09/2005
1
2
3
Mantovani&Vicentini TORQUE LIMITER CALIBRATION T.P.NO. Page

Italy TARATURA DEL TORQUE LIMITER ---- 1 of 5
Unscrew the grain with the suitable key. Rotate the ring.
Svitare il grano con l’apposita chiave. Ruotare l’anello.
Remove the ring. Take the torque limiter body out of the shaft: help yourself with a tool.
Rimuovere l’anello . Estrarre il corpo del limitatore di coppia dall’albero: aiutarsi con un utensile.

0 A.B. 16/01/2006
1
2
3

The pictures above show the torque limiter body and the gear box shaft from which is removed.
Le immagini sopra mostrano il corpo del limitatore di coppia e l’albero del riduttore dal quale viene rimosso.
Unscrew the top of the torque limiter body with a suitable key.
Svitare la parte alta del corpo del limitatore di coppia con una apposite chiave.

0 A.B. 16/01/2006
1
2
3

Try to rotate the ring positioned at the top. Consult the torque limiter use and operating manual in which are
contained information about the type of spring used and the relation between the torque (Nm) you want to
obtain and the number of notches you have to rotate from the beginning you have marked.
Provare a ruotare l’anello posizionato nella parte alta del corpo del limitatore di coppia. Consultare il manuale
di uso del limitatore di coppia ove sono contenute informazioni sul tipo di molla usata e la relazione tra la
coppia (Nm) che si vuole ottenere e il numero di tacche che si devono ruotare a partire dalla prima segnata.
For centrifuge CD600FH choose a spring type M: to obtain 350Nm torque you have to rotate 15 notches (in
the picture above are shown the beginning and ending of the rotation made with a suitable key for a torque
limiter Compomac 55). For Verti-G and CD518/350 centrifuges choose springs type M: for the first to obtain
200 Nm torque (for a Compomac torque limiter 45) you have to rotate 36 notches and for the second to obtain
105Nm torque (for a Compomac torque limiter 35) you have to rotate 32 notches.
0 A.B. 16/01/2006
1
2
3

Per la centrifuga CD600FH seleziona una molla Tipo M: per ottenere una coppia di 350 Nm si deve ruotare di
15 tacche (la figura sopra mostra il punto d’inizio e di fine della rotazione effettuata con una apposita chiave
per un limitatore di coppia Compomac 55).
Per le centrifughe Verti-G e CD518/350 scegliere molle di tipo M: per la prima per ottenere una coppia di 200
Nm (per un limitatore di coppia Compomac 45) si deve ruotare di 36 tacche e per le seconde per ottenere una
coppia di 105 Nm (con un limitatore di coppia Compomac 35) si deve ruotare di 32 tacche.
Assemble the components again: screw and fit on the gear box shaft the torque limiter boby.
Assemblare nuovamente i componenti: avvitare e infilare sull’albero del riduttore il corpo del limitatore di
coppia.
Insert the ring before removed.

Inserire l’anello precedentemente rimosso.

0 A.B. 16/01/2006
1
2
3

Rotate the ring to find the right position of the grain insertion and screw again with the suitable key
Ruotare l’anello per cercare la corretta posizione dell’inserimento del grano e avvita nuovamente con la chiave
corretta.

0 A.B. 16/01/2006
1
2
3
Mantovani&Vicentini PROCEDURE FOR CENTRIFUGE CD600 FH T.P.NO. Page

Italy ASSEMBLING WATER SIDE ---- 1 of 11
PROCEDURA PER ASSEMBLAGGIO
CENTRIFUGA CD600 FH LATO ACQUA
WATER SIDE
THE PROCEDURE STARTS WITH THE HUB WITH GROOVES

(7525) ASSEMBLING INSTRUCTION.
LA PROCEDURA INIZIA DALLE ISTRUZIONI DI

ASSEMBLAGGIO DEL MOZZO CON PROFILI SCANALATI.
INTRODUCE , AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE, FIRST PART OF

THE BEARING 29324 (120X210X54).
INTRODURRE, COME RAPPRESENTATO IN FIGURA, LA

PRIMA PARTE DEL CUSCINETTO 29324 (120X210X54).
PUT INSIDE THE SECOND PART (BEARING BODY).
INSERIRE LA SECONDA PARTE (CORPO DEL CUSCINETTO).

COMPLETE THE BEARING FITTING WITH THE ADDITION
OF HIS THIRD PART AND OF THE FLANGE (7521) .
COMPLETARE L’INSERIMENTO DEL CUSCINETTO CON

L’AGGIUNTA DELLA SUA TERZA PARTE. E DELLA
FLANGIA (7521).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

INTRODUCE THE CLOSURE RING (7523).
INTRODURRE L’ANELLO DI CHIUSURA (7523).
INSERT THE NU226 BEARING (130X230X40) AS SHOWN IN

THE PICTURE.
INTRODURRE IL CUSCINETTO NU226 (130X230X40) COME

MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.
ASSEMBLE ON THE HUB WITH GROOVES (7510) THE
HOLED FLANGE WATER SIDE (7524).
UNIRE AL MOZZO CON PROFILI SCANALATI (7510) LA

FLANGIA FORATA LATO ACQUA (7524).
INSERT ONE AFTER THE OTHER THE SEAL RINGS
170/200/12 IN VITON EXTERNAL PROOF. FIT ON THE HOLED
FLANGE WATER SIDE THE O’RING 4875 (221.8X3.53).
INSERIRE UNO DOPO L’ALTRO I PARAOLII A TENUTA

ESTERNA 170/200/12 IN VITON. INFILARE SULLA FLANGIA
FORATA LATO ACQUA O’RING 4875 (221.8X3.53).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

TO FACILITATE THE SCREWING OF THE HOLED FLANGE

TO THE HUB WITH GOOVES INSIDE THE BOWL USE THREE
LONG THREADED SCREWS M16X200mm WITH HEXAGONAL
NUT.
PER FACILITARE L’AVVITAMENTO TRA LA FLANGIA

FORATA E IL MOZZO CON PROFILI SCANALATI
ALL’INTERNO DELLA BOWL USARE UNA LUNGA VITE
FILETTATA M16X200mm CON DADO ESAGONALE.
JOIN WITH SCREWS M16X60mm WITH WASHERS.
Proceed to screw following a cross.
AVVITARE CON VITI M16X60mm CON RONDELLE.

Procedere avvitando a croce.
USE A TORQUE WRENCH AT APPLIED VALUE OF 150 Nm.
USARE UNA CHIAVE DINAMOMETRICA A UN VALORE

APPLICATO DI 150 Nm.
DISTRIBUTE GREASE ON THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT.
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA

GRANDE.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

INSERT THE O’RING ORM1700-30 (170X3) ON THE

THIGTNESS RING (7522).MADE WITH POLYTHENE.
INSERIRE O’RING ORM1700-30 (170X3) SULL’ANELLO DI

TENUTA IN POLYTHENE (7522).
TO FIT THE THIGTNESS RING ASSEMBLED ON THE MAIN

FLANGE SHAFT HELP YOURSELF WITH A PLASTIC
HAMMER.
PER INSERIRE L’ANELLO DI TENUTA ASSEMBLATO

SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA GRANDE AIUTARSI CON
UN MARTELLO DI PLASTICA.
TO HEAT (MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE REACHED ALMOST 90°C)

THE RING LOCK UTILIZE THE SUITABLE INSTRUMENT AS THE
PICTURE SHOWS.
PER RISCALDARE (MASSIMA TEMPERATURA RAGGIUNTA CIRCA

90°C) IL FERMO AD ANELLO UTILIZZARE L’APPOSITA
APPARECCHIATURA COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.
FIT ON THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT –WATER SIDE THE HOT RING
LOCK. ASSEMBLE THE MAIN FLANGE TO THE BOWL.
INFILARE NELL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA GRANDE –LATO

ACQUA IL FERMO AD ANELLO RISCALDATO. ASSEMBLARE LA
FLANGIA GRANDE ALLA BOWL.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

AS THE PICTURE SHOWS USE A SMALL FLANGE AND A

LONG THREADED SCREW WITH A NUT AS TOOLS TO
PROCEED ON THE COMPONETS FITTING.: THIS
ASSEMBLING WAY AVOIDS THE SCREW CONVEYOR
BACKING.
COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA USARE UNA PICCOLA
FLANGIA, UNA LUNGA VITE FILETTATA CON UN DADO
COME UTENSILI NEL PROCESSO D’INSERIMENTO DEI
COMPONENTI:QUESTA MODALITA’ EVITA
L’ARRETRAMENTO DELLA COCLEA.
COMPLETE THE SCREWING WITH M16X40mm BETWEEN
THE MAIN FLANGE AND THE BOWL.
COMPLETARE L’AVVITAMENTO TRA LA FLANGIA

PRINCIPALE E LA BOWL CON VITI M16X40.
INSERT THE TRANSMISSION SHAFT (7527) AND CHECK THE

ROTATION.
INSERIRE ALBERO DI TRASMISSIONE (7527) E

CONTROLLARE LA ROTAZIONE
AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE CLOSE THE HOLES AT THE
BEARINGS SUPPORT BOTTOM WITH PLUGS.
COME RAPPRESENTATO IN FIGURA CHIUDERE I FORI

ALLA BASE DEL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO CON TAPPI.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

AS INDICATED IN THE PICTURE USE A THREADED CUP

M16X50X1,5 (7548) TO CLOSE THE HOLE. USE LOCTITE ON
THE THREAD.
COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA USARE UN TAPPO

FILETTATO M16X50X1.5 (7548) PER CHIUDERE IL FORO
INSERT THE FIRST NOZZLE GENERATED BY A SCREW
M16X70 (7547).: THE NOZZLE HOLE OF 1 mm OF DIAMETER
PROVIDES OIL LUBRICATION IN THE TWO POINTS
INDICATED. THE NUMBER THREE MARKED ON THE TOP
OF BEARINGS SUPPORT INDICATES THE CORRECT
ASSEMBLING ORIENTATION .
INSERIRE IL PRIMO UGELLO DERIVATO DA VITE M16X70
(7547). ILFORO DEL NOZZLE DI 1 mm DI DIAMETRO
PERMETTE LA LUBRIFICAZIONE NEI DUE PUNTI INDICATI.
IL NUMERO TRE STAMPATO NELLA PARTE SUPERIORE
DEL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO INDICA LA CORRETTA
ORIENTAZIONE DI ASSEMBLAGGIO.
FIT ON BEARING SUPPORT THE FIRST SPACER FOR

SUPPORT (7513) AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE.
INSERIRE NEL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO IL PRIMO

DISTANZIALE PER SUPPORTO (7513) COME MOSTRATO IN
FIGURA.
SPREAD GREASE WITH A BRUSH AROUND THE INTERNAL
SURFACE OF THE BEARINGS SUPPORT.
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO CON UN PENNELLO ENTRO LA

SUPERFICIE INTERNA DEL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

INSERT NU2230 C3 BEARING (150X270X73) INSIDE THE

BEARINGS SUPPORT.
INSERIRE DENTRO AL SUPPORTO IL CUSCINETTO NU2230

C3 (150X270X73).
ADD THE SECOND SPACER FOR SUPPORT (7513). TO

FACILITATE THE INSERTION OF THE COMPONENT USE A
PLASTIC HAMMER.
AGGIUNGERE IL SECONDO DISTANZIALE PER SUPPORTO

(7513). PER FACILITARE L’INSERIMENTO DEL
COMPONENTE USARE UN MARTELLO DI PLASTICA.
USE TWO PLUGS TO CLOSE THE OPPOSITE HAND OF THE

BEARINGS SUPPORT AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE.
USARE DUE TAPPI PER CHIUDERE LA PARTE OPPOSTA DEL

SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.
FIT ON THE LONG FLANGE WITH GROOVES FOR
RECOVERY OIL (7551) THE O’RING 41050 (266.7X3.53). PUT
ON THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT THE COMPONENT
ASSEMBLED.
INSERIRE SULLA FLANGIA LUNGA CON GOLE PER

RECUPERO OLIO (7551) O’RING 41050 (266.7X3.53). INSERIRE
SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA PRINCIPALE IL
COMPONENTE ASSEMBLATO.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

FIT ON THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT THE BEARINGS

SUPPORT ASSEMBED .JOIN (M12X30) THE BEARING
SUPPORT TO THE LONG FLANGE WITH GROOVES (7551).
INSERIRE SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA GRANDE IL

SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO ASSEMBLATO. UNIRE CON VITI
M12X30 IL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO ALLA FLANGIA LUNGA
CON GOLE. (7551)
SPREAD GREASE ON THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT AND

POSITION IN THE SUITABLE HOUSING THE FEATHER UNI
6604-A (36X20X140). ADD THE GROOVED BUSH-GEAR BOX
SIDE (7577). INSERT, AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE, TWO FEY
LAMINAR RINGS “FK6 ASD 210.0/9.0X 2.4 (4.8”) INSIDE
EACH GROOVE.
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA

GRANDE E POSIZIONARE NELLA APPOSITA SEDE LA
LINGUETTA UNI6604-A (36X20X140). AGGIUNGERE LA
BOCCOLA SCANALATA LATO RIDUTTORE (7577).
INSERIRE, COME MOSTARTO IN FIGURA, UNA COPPIA DI
ANELLI LAMINARI FEY PER CIASCUNA GOLA.
INSERT THE GROOVED BUSH-GEAR BOX SIDE (7577) ON
THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT, AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE.
SCREW THE FLANGE WITH GROOVE FOR RECOVERY OIL
(7511) TO THE BEARINGS SUPPORT (USE SCREWS M12X30).
REMOVE THE TRASMISSION SHAFT (7527).
INSERIRE LA BOCCOLA SCANALATA LATO RIDUTTORE

(7577) SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA PRINCIPALE, COME
MOSTARTO IN FIGURA.
AVVITARE LA FLANGIA CON GOLE PER RECUPERO OLIO
(7511)AL SUPORTO CUSCINETTO (USARE VITI M12X30).
RIMUOVERE L’ALBERO DI TRASMISSIONE (7527).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

UTILIZE AS TOOL A FLANGE JOINED TO THE MAIN

FLANGE SHAFT AS THE PICTURE SHOWS WITH SCREWS
M12X30X1,5 mm. IN THE KIT ARE ALSO INCLUDED THE
LONG SCREW M18X250mm WITH HEXAGONAL NUT AND A
LEVER.
UTILIZZARE COME UTENSILI UNA FLANGIA CONNESSA

ALL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA GRANDE CON VITI
M12X30X1,5 mm COME MOSTARTO NELL’IMMAGINE. NEL
CORREDO SONO ANCHE INCLUSI LA LUNGA VITE
M18X250mm CON DADO ESAGONALE E UNA BARRA.
JOIN THE LEVER TO THE REDUCING FLANGE
TRASMISSION (7514) WITH TWO SCREWS M24X50mm.
UNIRE LA BARRA ALLA FLANGIA TRASMISSIONE

RIDUTTORE (7514) CON DUE VITI M24X50mm.
FIT ON THE MAIN FLANGE SHAFT THE REDUCING FLANGE
TRASMISSION AND INSERT THE LONG SCREW IN THE
MIDDLE HOLE OF THE LEVER.
INSERIRE SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA GRANDE LA

FLANGIA TRASMISSIONE RIDUTTORE (7514) E INFILARE
LA LUNGA VITE NEL FORO MEDIO DELLA BARRA.
TO INSERT THE REDUCING FLANGE TRASMISSION SCREW
THE NUT, AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE.
PER INSERIRE LA FLANGIA TRASMISSIONE RIDUTTORE

AVVITARE IL DADO COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

REMOVE ALL THE TOOLS.OF THE KIT.
RIMUOVERE TUTTI GLI UTENSILI DEL CORREDO.
FIT ON THE CLAMPING DISC (7516) AND JOIN WITH

SCREWS M12X40X1,25mm.
INSERIRE IL DISCO DI FISSAGGIO FLANGIA TRASMISSIONE

RIDUTTORE UTILIZZANDO VITI M12X40X1,25mm.
INSERT THE TRANSMISSION SHAFT (7527).
INSERIRE L’ALBERO DI TRASMISSIONE (7527).
DISTRIBUTE GREASE ON THE TRASMISSION SHAFT. (7527)
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO SULL’ALBERO DI TRASMISSIONE

(7527).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

UNITE TO THE CENTRIFUGE ASSEMBLED THE GEAR BOX

SUMITOMO ZS621 (7529).
UNIRE ALL CENTRIFUGA ASSIEMATA IL RIDUTTORE

SUMITOMO ZS621 (7529).
JOIN WITH SCREWS M24X50mm. PROCEED TO SCREW

FOLLOWING A CROSS.
UNIRE I DUE COMPONENTI CON VITI M24X50mm.

PROCEDERE AD AVVITARE SEGUENDO UNA CROCE.
USE A TORQUE WRENCH AT A VALUE APPLYED OF 150Nm.
USARE UNA CHIAVE DINAMOMETRICA CON UN VALORE

APPLICATO DI 150Nm.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

Italy ASSEMBLING MUDS SIDE ---- 1 of 11
PROCEDURA DI ASSEMBLAGGIO
CENTRIFUGA CD600 FH LATO FANGHI
MUD SIDE
INSERT INSIDE THE BOWL THE SHAFT OF SCREW CONVEYOR

SUPPORT (7531) AND ON END THE PIPE WITH FLANGE (7519). PUT
ON THE PIPE WITH FLANGE THE O’RING 208 (DIAMETER 5 mm).
INSERITO ALL’INTERNO DELLA BOWL L’ALBERO SUPPORTO

COCLEA (7531) E IN SEQUENZA IL TUBO CON FLANGIA (7519).
INFILARE SOPRA IL TUBO CON FLANGIA O’RING 208 (DIAMETRO
5 mm).
INTRODUCE THE SPACER (7518). HELP YOURSEF WITH A PLASTIC

HAMMER TO COUPLE THE COMPONENTS. INSERT THE BUSH
(7557) AND SUCCESSIVELY THE SEEGER 125 UNI 7435 AND THE
SPACER RING (7517).
INTRODURRE IL DISTANZIALE (7518). AIUTARSI CON UN

MARTELLO IN PLASTICA PER COMPATTARE I COMPONENTI.
INSERIRE LA BOCCOLA (7557) E IN SUCCESSIONE IL SEEGER 125
UNI 7435 E L’ANELLO DISTANZIALE (7517).
AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE USE TWO PIN UNI-ISO 8734 10X38) TO
FIND THE STROKE.
COME MOSTRATO NELL’IMMAGINE USO DUE SPINE (UNI –ISO

8734 10X38) PER CERCARE LA FASE.
ASSEMBLE THE BEARING NU 226 (130X230X40). HELP YOURSELF

WITH A PLASTIC HAMMER AND DISTRIBUTE GREASE ON THE
COUPLING SURFACES TO FACILITATE THE FITTING.
INTRODURRE IL CUSCINETTO NU 226 (130X230X40). AIUTARSI

CON UN MARTELLO E DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO NELLE SUPERFICI
DI ACCOPPIAMENTO PER FACILITARE L’ASSMBLAGGIO.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

DISTRIBUTE GREASE WITH A BRUSH ON THE INTERNAL

OUTLINE OF THE HOLED FLANGE , MUDS SIDE (7512).INSERT ON
THE OPPOSITE FACE THE SUITABLE O’RING 4875 (221.8X3.53).
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO NELLA SUPERFICIE INTERNA DELLA

FLANGIA FORATA LATO FANGO (7512). INSERIRE O’RING
APPROPRIATO 4875 (221.8X3.53) DALLA PARTE OPPOSTA.
INSERT INSIDE THE HOLED FLANGE MUDS SIDE (7512) THE FIRST
SEAL RING 170/200/12 MADE WITH VITON.
INSERIRE ALL’INTERNO DELLA FLANGIA FORATA LATO FANGO

(7512) IL PRIMO PARAOLIO IN VITON 170/200/12.
PROCEED TO INTRODUCE THE SECOND SEAL RING 170/200/12

EXTERNAL PROOF. HELP YOURSELF WITH A PLASTIC HAMMER
TO FACILITATE THE ENTRY.
PROCEDERE CON L’INTRODUZIONE DEL SECONDO PARAOLIO

170/200/12 A TENUTA ESTERNA. AIUTARSI CON UN MARTELLO DI
PLASTICA PER FACILITARE L’INGRESSO.
DISTRIBUITE GREASE WITH A BRUSH ON THE COUPLING
SURFACE OF THE HOLED FLANGE MUDS SIDE (7512).
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO CON UN PENNELLO SULLA SUPERFICIE DI

ACCOPPIAMENTO DELLA FLANGIA FORATA LATO FANGO (7512).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

JOIN THE TWO COMPONENTS WITH SCREWS M10X35 mm. USE A

LONG THREADED BAR WITH A WELDED NUT AT THE END TO
FACILITATE THE COUPLING.
UNIRE I DUE COMPONENTI CON VITI M10X35mm. USARE UNA

LUNGA BARRA FILETTATA CON UN DADO SALDATO
ALL’ESTREMITA’ PER FACILITARE L’ASSEMBLAGGIO.
USE SCREWS M10X35 mm TO UNITE THE TWO COMPONENTS.
UTILIZZARE VITI M10X35mm PER UNIRE I DUE COMPONENTI.
COMPLETE THE SCREWING AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE.
COMPLETARE L’AVVITAMENTO COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.
SPREAD GREASE ON THE SHAFT OF THE SMALL FLANGE MUDS

SIDE.
SPALMARE GRASSO SOPRA L’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA

PICCOLA LATO FANGO.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

INSERT THE O’RING ORM 1700-30 (170X3) INSIDE THE TIGHNESS

RING (7522) MADE WITH POLYTHENE. SLIP THE TWO
COMPONENTS ASSEMBLED ON THE SHAFT OF THE SMALL
FLANGE MUDS SIDE.
INSERIRE O’RING 1700-30 (170X3) ALL’INTERNO DELL’ANELLO DI

TENUTA IN POLITENE (7522). INFILARE I DUE COMPONENTI
ASSEMBLATI SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA PICCOLA LATO
FANGO.
TO FACITATE THE ENTRY OF THE TIGHNESS RING (7522) HELP

YOURSELF WITH A PLASTIC HAMMER.
PER FACILITARE L’INGRESSO DELL’ANELLO DI TENUTA (7522)

AIUTARSI CON UN MARTELLO DI PLASTICA.
THE PICTURE SHOWS THE CORRECT POSITIONING OF THE

TIGHNESS RING (7522) FITTED ON THE SMALL FLANGE –MUDS
SIDE.
LA FIGURA MOSTRA IL CORRETTO POSIZIONAMENTO

DELL’ANELLO DI TENUTA (7522) INSERITO SULL’ALBERO DELLA
FLANGIA PICCOLA LATO FANGHI
TO HEAT (MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE REACHED ALMOST 90°C)

THE BEARING NU226 (130X230X240) UTILIZE THE SUITABLE
INSTRUMENT AS THE PICTURE SHOWS.
PER RISCALDARE (MASSIMA TEMPERATURA RAGGIUNTA CIRCA

90°C) IL CUSCINETTO NU226 (130X230X240) UTILIZZARE
L’APPOSITA APPARECCHIATURA COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

FIT ON THE SMALL FLANGE SHAFT -MUDS SIDE THE HOT

BEARING NU 226 (130X230X40).
INFILARE NELL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA PICCOLA –LATO

FANGHI IL CUSCINETTO NU 226 (130X230X40) RISCALDATO.
INSERT, AS SHOWN IN THE PICTURE THE SEEGER 125 UNI 7435.

HELP YOURSELF WITH A SUITABLE TOOL.
INSERIRE, COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA, L’ANELLO ELASTICO DI

SICUREZZA PER ALBERI 125 UNI 7435.
AIUTARSI CON L’APPOSITO UTENSILE.
CHECK THE FUNCTIONING OF ALL GREASING POINTS.
CONTROLLARE IL FUNZIONAMENTO DI TUTTI I PUNTI

D’INGRASSAGGIO.
JOIN THE SMALL FLANGE MUDS SIDE ASSEMBLED WITH ALL

COMPONENTS TO THE BOWL. DISTRIBUTE GREASE INSIDE
BEFORE THE CLOSING. JOIN WITH SCREWS M16X40mm
THROUGH A TORQUE WRENCH AT 150 Nm APPLIED.
UNIRE LA PICCOLA FLANGIA LATO FANGHI ASSEMBLATA CON

TUTTI I COMPONENTI ALLA BOWL.
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO ALL’INTERNO PRIMA DELL CHIUSURA
UNIRE CON VITI M16X40mm CON L’UTILIZZO DI UNA CHIAVE
DINAMOMETRICA APPLICANDO 150Nm.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

DISTRIBUITE GREASE ON THE SMALL FLANGE SHAFT SURFACE

AND FIT ON THE SUITABLE HOUSING THE FEATHER UNI 6604-A
36X20X125.
SPALMARE GRASSO SULLA SUPERFICIE DELL’ALBERO DELLA

FLANGIA PICCOLA-E INSERIRE NELLA SEDE LA LINGUETTA UNI
6604-A 36X20X125.
THE PICTURE SHOWS THE GROOVED BUSH INTRODUCED

THROUGH THE HEATING OF HIS SURFACE. PUT ON THE SHAFT
BEFORE THE O’RING 1730 ORM (170X3mm).
L’IMAGINE RAPPRESENTA L’INTRODUZIONE DELLA BOCCOLA

SCANALATA (7510) CON IL RISCALDAMENTO DELLA SUA
SUPERFICIE. INFILARE PRIMA SULL’ALBERO O’RING 1730 ORM
(170X3mm).
FIT ON THE BEARING HOUSING SUPPORT THE SPACER FOR

SAPPORT (7596) IN THE POSITION 1 (AT THE TOP OF THE
BEARING SUPPORT IS MARKET A NUMBER TO RECOGNIZE THE
CORRECT POSITIONING.
INSERIRE SUL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO IL DISTANZIALE PER

SUPPORTO (7596) IN CORRISPONDENZA DELLA POSIZIONE 1
(NELLA PARTE ALTA DEL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTI è STAMPATO
UN NUMERO PER RICONOSCERE IL CORRETTO
POSIZIONAMENTO.
FIT ON THE SUPPORT BEARINGS AT THE LEFT AND RIGHT SIDE
HAND OF THE ANTERIOR VIEW THE NOZZLES GENERATED BY
M16X70mm (7547) WITH A DIMENSION HOLE OF 1 mm AS
INDICATED ON THE PICTURE. USE TWO WASHERS TO INSERT
THE NOZZLE.
UNIRE AL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTI NELLA PARTE DESTRA E

SINISTRA DELLA VISTA ANTERIORE GLI UGELLI DERIVATI DA
VITE M16X70mm (7547) CON UNA DIMENSIONE DEL FORO DI 1
mm COME INDICATO NELLA FIGURA.
USARE DUE RONDELLE PER INSERIRE L’UGELLO.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

FIT ON THE SUPPORT BEARINGS AT THE LEFT AND RIGHT SIDE

HAND OF THE BACK VIEW TWO PLUGS CLOSED.
INSERIRE DALLA PARTE DESTRA E SINISTRA DEL SUPPORTO

CUSCINETTI NELLA VISTA POSTERIORE DUE TAPPI CHIUSI.
INSERT THE BEARING 22230-W33 (150X270X45) AND ON END A

RING SPACER FOR SUPPORT (7596). HELP YOURSELF WITH A
PLASTIC HAMMER AND GREASE.
INSERIRE IL CUSCINETTO 22230-W33 (150X270X45) E DI SEGUITO

L’ ANELLO DISTANZIALE PER SUPPORTO (7596) . AIUTARSI CON
UN MARTELLO DI PLASTICA E GRASSO.
ADD THE OTHER SPACER FOR SUPPORT (7596).
AGGIUNGERE L’ALTRO DISTANZIALE PER SUPPORTO (7596).
USE PLUGS FOR THE HOLES INDICATED ON THE PICTURE.
UTILIZARE TAPPI PER CHIUDERE I FORI INDICATI IN FIGURA.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

USE PLUGS FOR THE HOLES INDICATED ON THE PICTURE.
UTILIZZARE TAPPI PER CHIUDERE I FORI INDICATI IN FIGURA.
DISTRIBUTE GREASE THROUGH A BRUSH ON THE EXTERNAL

OUTLINE OF THE SUPPORT BEARINGS.
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO CON UN PENNELLO SUL PROFILO

ESTERNO DEL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTI..
PUT ON THE SMALL FLANGE SHAFT THE LONG FLANGE WITH

GROOVES FOR OIL RECOVERY (7551). CHECK THE PRESENCE OF
THE DISCARGE OIL HOLE ON THE FOUR FLANGES COUPLED TO
THE SUPPORT BEARINGS. AS INDICATED ON THE PICTURE.
INTRODUCE A COUPLE OF FEY LAMINAR RINGS INSIDE EACH
GROOVES OF THE GROOVED BUSH (7575), AS SHOWN IN THE
PICTURE.
INSERIRE SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA PICCOLA LA FLANGIA

LUNGA CON GOLE PER IL RECUPERO OLIO (7551).
CONTROLLARE LA PRESENZA NELLE QUATTRO FLANGE DI
ACCOPPIAMENTO AL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTI DEL FORO PER LO
SCARICO OLIO COME INDICATO IN FIGURA. INSERIRE UNA
COPPIA LAMINARE DI ANELLY FEY ALL’INTERNO DI CIASCUNA
GOLA DELLA BOCCOLA SCANALATA (7575), COME MOSTARTO
IN FIGURA.
FIT ON THE SMALL FLANGE SHAFT MUDS SIDE THE SUPPORT
BEARINGS ASSEMBLED. INTRODUCE AFTER THE GROOVED
BUSH (7575) ASSEMBLED.
MONTARE SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA PICCOLA-LATO

FANGHI IL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTI ASSIEMATO. INTRODURRE
SUCCESSIVAMENTE LA BOCCOLA SCANALATA (7575)
ASSIEMATA

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

JOIN THE LONG FLANGE WITH GROOVES TO THE SUPPORT

BEARING WITH SCREWS M12X30mm. USE A TORQUE WRENCH
APPLYING 75 Nm AS VALUE.
UNIRE LA FLANGIA LUNGA CON GOLE AL SUPPORTO

CUSCINETTI CON VITI M12X30mm. USARE UNA CHIAVE
DINAMOMETRICA APPLICANDO UN VALORE DI 75 Nm.
INSERT SPACER FOR BEARING (7593) AND AFTER SPACER FOR

BEARING (7594).
UTILIZE THE FLANGE WITH GROOVES FOR OIL RECOVERY
(7511). INSERT THE O’RING 41050 (266.7X3.53).
INSERIRE IL DISTANZIALE PER CUSCINETTO MAGGIORE (7593) E

SUCCESSIVAMENTE IL DISTANZIALE PER CUSCINETTO MINORE
(7594).
UTILIZZARE LA FLANGIA CON GOLE PER IL RECUPERO OLIO
(7511). INSERIRE O’RING 41050 (266.7X3.53).
ASSEMBLE BEFORE THE FLANGE WITH GROOVES AND AFTER

THE SPACER FOR PULLEY (7526) AS THE PICTURE SHOWS.
ASSEMBLARE PRIMA LA FLANGIA CON GOLE PER RECUPERO

OLIO E SUCCESSIVAMENTE IL DISTANZIALE PER PULEGGIA
(7526). COME MOSTRATO IN FIGURA.
JOIN THE FLANGE WITH GROOVES (7511) TO THE SUPPORT
BEARING WITH SCREWS M12X30mm. USE A TORQUE WRENCH
APPLYING 75 Nm AS VALUE.
INSERT THE SPACER FOR PULLEY (7526).
UNIRE LA FLANGIA CON GOLE (7511) AL SUPPORTO CUSCINETTI

CON VITI M12X30mm. USARE UNA CHIAVE DINAMOMETRICA
APPLICANDO UN VALORE DI 75 Nm.
INSERIRE IL DISTANZIALE PER PULEGGIA (7526).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

DISTRIBUTE GREASE ON THE INTERNAL SURFACE OF THE

CENTRIFUGE PULLEY 8 GROOVES SPB (7528).
DISTRIBUIRE GRASSO SULLA SUPERFICIE INTERNA DELLA

PULEGGIA SPB 8 GOLE PER CENTRIFUGA (7528).
INSERT THE PULLEY ON THE SMALL FLAGE SHAFT.
INSERIRE LA PULEGGIA SULL’ALBERO DELLA FLANGIA

PICCOLA.
TO FACILITATE THE ASSEMBLING HELP YOURSELF WITH A

PLASTIC HAMMER.
PER FACILITARE L’ASSEMBLAGGIO AIUTARSI CON UN

MARTELLO IN PLASTICA.
ADD THE PULLEY LOCK (7554).
AGGIUGERE IL FERMO PER PULEGGIA (7554).

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3

SPREAD EVERY TIME GREASE ON THE THREAD OF SCREWS.
USARE TUTTE LE VOLTE GRASSO SUL FILETTO DELLE VITI.
JOIN THE PULLEY LOCK WITH SCREWS M12X1,25X40.
AVVITARE IL FERMO PER PULEGGIA CON VITI M12X1,25X40.
THE PICTURE SHOWS THE PLUG USED AT THE TOP OF THE

SUPPORT BEARINGS M16X16mm.
L’IMMAGINE MOSTRA IL TAPPO M16X16mm USATO IN CIMA AL

SUPPORTO CUSCINETTO.

0 16/01/2006
1
2
3
Mantovani&Vicentini DISASSEMBLY CENTRIFUGE CD600FH T.P.NO. Page

Italy WATER/MUDS SIDE ---- 1 of 10
SMONTAGGIO CENTRIFUGA CD600 FH
LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
WATER SIDE
Remove the transmission shaft (7527) and the gear box Sumitomo ZS621 (7529). Unscrew the clamping disc (7516).The
picture shows the screws removed M12x40x1,25mm.
Rimuovere l’albero di trasmissione (7527) e il riduttore Sumitomo ZS621 (7529). Svitare il disco di fissaggio flangia
trasmissione riduttore (7516). L’immagine mostra le viti rimosse M12x40x1,25mm.
Remove the camping disc (7516). Utilize a blank flange, as a tool, to take off the reducing flange transmission
(7514) from centrifuge assembled on the main flange shaft.
Togliere il disco di fissaggio flangia riduttore (7516). Utilizzare una flangia cieca, come utensile per sfilare la
flangia trasmissione riduttore (7514) dalla centrifuga assemblata sull’albero della flangia grande.

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
To disassemble the centrifuge utilize also a lever fixed to the reducing flange transmission with to screws
M24x50mm and two nuts respectively. Insert a long threaded bar which has a welded nut at one end used to
screw and the opposite end positioning fixed from the blank flange. Lever, blank flange and threaded bar, used
as tools, are supplied in the kit.
Per smontare la centrifuga utilizzare pure una barra fissata alla flangia trasmissione riduttore con due viti
M24x50mm e rispettivamente due dadi. Inserire una lunga barra filettata che presenta ad un estremo un dado
saldato utilizzato per avvitare e l’estremo opposto bloccato dalla presenza della flangia cieca. La barra, la
flangia cieca e la barra filettata, usati come utensili, sono forniti a corredo.
Remove the reducing flange transmission (7514) and proceed to unscrew the flange with grooves for recovery
oil (7511).
Rimuovere la flangia di trasmissione riduttore (7514) e procedere a svitare la flangia con gole per recupero
olio (7511).

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
Remove the spacer with labyrinths (7566). Help yourself with special tools.
Rimuovere il distanziale labirinto lato acqua (7566). Aiutarsi con appositi utensili.
Remove the feather UNI 6604-A 36x20x140 fitted on the main flange shaft water side. Proceed to unscrew the
long flange with grooves for recovery oil (7551).
Rimuovere la linguetta UNI 6604-A 36x20x140 posizionata sull’albero della flangia grande lato acqua.
Procedere a svitare la flangia lunga con gole per recupero olio (7551).

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
Remove screws M12x30mm positioned on the long flange with grooves for recovery oil(7551).and the
housing bearings bracket assembled (7507).
Rimuovere le viti M12x30mm posizionate sulla flangia lunga con gole per recupero olio (7551) e il supporto
cuscinetti assemblato (7507)
As shown in the pictures above, nozzles generated by screws M16x70 mm (7547) positioned on the right side
of the housing bearings bracket own a hole of 1 mm to permit lubrication; the other nozzles located on the
opposite side are closed.
Come mostrato nelle immagini sopra, gli ugelli derivati da viti M16x70mm (7547) posizionati dalla parte
destra del supporto cuscinetti presentano un foro di 1 mm per consentire la lubrificazione; gli ugelli collocati
dalla parte opposta sono chiusi.
0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
To disassemble the housing bearings (7507) bracket unscrew the first nozzle, positioned in the front side. At
the opposite site remove the screw M16x50x1.5mm.
Per smontare il supporto cuscinetto (7507) si deve svitare il primo ugello forato, posizionato dalla parte
anteriore. Rimuovere dalla parte opposta la vite M16x50x1.5mm.
Remove the first spacer for support (7596) and after the bearing 22230-W33 (150x270x73) helping yourself with
the extractor ES040. Remove the second spacer for support.
Togliere il primo distanziale per supporto (7596) e successivamente il cuscinetto 22230-W33 (150x270x73)
aiutandosi con l'estrattore ES040. Togliere il secondo distanziale per supporto.

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
MUD SIDE
Unscrew M12x40x1,25mm with special key and remove the pulley lock (7554).
Svitare viti M12x40x1,25mm con chiave speciale e rimuovere il fermo per puleggia (7554)
Take out the centrifuge pulley 8 grooves SPB: help yourself with a special tool.
Estrarre la puleggia per centrifuga 8 gole: aiutarsi con un apposito utensile.

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
Remove the feather UNI6604-A (36x20x125) from the small flange shaft. Unscrew the flange with grooves
for recovery oil (7511) with special key and take out screws M12x30mm
Rimuovere la linguetta UNI6604-A (36x20x125) dall’albero della flangia piccola. Svitare la flangia con gole
per recupero olio (7511) con una chiave speciale e togliere le viti M12x30mm.
Take out the spacer for pulley (7526) and the ring spacer for bearing NUP230E-muds side.
Estrarre il distanziale per puleggia (7526) e il distanziale ad anello per il cuscinetto NUP230E.

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
Remove the ring spacer which belongs to the NUP230E bearing and proceed to unscrew the long flange with
grooves for recovery oil (7511). Take out the screws M12x30mm and the housing bearings bracket muds side
(7507).
Estrarre l’anello spaziatore che appartiene al cuscinetto NUP230E e procedere a svitare la flangia lunga con
gole per recupero olio (7511). Togliere le viti M12x30mm e sfilare il supporto cuscinetto lato fanghi (7507)
To disassemble the housing bearings bracket (7507) unscrew the two nozzles positioned in the anterior side-
right and left hand- as the picture shows: these are drilled (1mm hole diameter) to permit lubrication. Nozzles
(7547) located at the posterior side, right and left hand respectively, are closed
Per smontare il supporto cuscinetti (7507) svitare i due ugelli posizionati nella parte anteriore –destra e
sinistra- come indicato in figura: questi sono forati (diametro del foro 1mm) per consentire la lubrificazione.
Gli ugelli (7547) posizionati nella parte posteriore, destra e sinistra rispettivamente, sono chiusi.

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
The picture above shows a nozzle fitted on bearings side to lubricate ( 1 mm hole diameter).
Remove the first spacer for support (7513) and subsequently the NU2230 bearing: help yourself with a plastic
hammer.
L’immagine sopra mostra un ugello, montato nella sede dei cuscinetti, per consentire la lubrificazione
(diametro del foro 1 mm).
Rimuovere il primo distanziale per supporto (7513) e il cuscinetto NU2230: aiutarsi con un martello di
plastica.
In the pictures are showed the components, spacer for support and NU2230 bearings, removed.
In figura sono rappresentati i due componenti, distanziale per supporto e cuscinetto NU2230, rimossi.

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3

LATO ACQUA/FANGHI
Unscrew the two nozzles closed and take out the second spacer for support (7513).
Svitare i due ugelli chiusi e rimuovere il secondo distanziale per supporto (7513).

0 18/01/2006
1
2
3
Mantovani&Vicentini GENERAL ALIGNMENT PROCEDURE T.P.NO. Page

Italy ---- 1 of 3
Clean the coupling surfaces (gear box surface and reducing flange transmission) with detergent and check to
avoid the presence of some blastings.
Pulire la superficie di accoppiamento (superficie del riduttore e flangia di trasmissione del riduttore) con
detergente e controllare per evitare la presenza di alcune abrasioni.
Distribute grease on the reducing flange transmission surface and on the transmission shaft.
Distribuire grasso sulla superficie della flangia di trasmissione riduttore e sopra l’albero di trasmissione.

0 12/09/2005
1
2
3

Italy ---- 2 of 3
Join the two surfaces and screw with the correct screw (the type of the screw is different for each machine-
check the correct drawing to fit on the exact screw).
Unire le due superfici e avvitare con la vite corretta (il tipo di vite è differente per ciascuna macchina-
controllare il disegno corretto per utilizzare la vite esatta).
Screw with the suitable key. Furnish yourself with a comparator unit. as shown in the picture. The instrument
is composed of two parts: one is sensitive to the non-alignment of the gear box shaft and the other provide us
the measure of the discrepancy from the alignment in radial direction.
It is acceptable a measure provided by the instrument inside the range 0-0,05.
It isn’t acceptable a measure provided by the instrument superior 0,2.
In case of non-alignment ,inside the acceptable range, read the maximum shifting value and mark the
corresponding position of non-alignment on the flange transmission (position of the screws).
Avvitare con la chiave appropriata. Munirsi di una unità comparativa come mostrato in photo. Lo strumento è
composto di due parti: una è sensibile al disallineamento dell’albero del riduttore e l’altra fornisce visualizza
la discrepanza dall’allineamento in senso radiale.
E’ accettabile una misura rilevata dallo strumento entro il range 0-0,05.
Non è accettabile una misura rilevata dallo strumento superiore a 0,2.
Nel caso di non allineamento ,entro il range di accettabilità, leggere il massimo valore di scostamento e
segnare la corrispondente posizione di disallineamento sulla flangia di trasmissione (in corrispondenza delle
viti)

0 12/09/2005
1
2
3

Italy ---- 3 of 3
Divide the maximum non-alignment value in two and use the equivalent thickness of the metal sheet (as the
picture shows). Cut out a piece of metal sheet keeping the outline screw.
Dividere il valore di massimo di disallineamento in due e usare un foglio di metallo (come mostrato
nell’immagine) di pari spessore. Ritagliare un pezzo di foglio metallico seguendo il profilo della vite
Insert, as shown in the picture, the piece of metal sheet cut out in the position marked as above described.
Inserire, come mostrato nell’immagine, il pezzo di foglio metallico ritagliato nella posizione segnata come
descritto sopra.

0 12/09/2005
1
2
3
Mantovani&Vicentini Procedura montaggio limitatore di coppia per CD600 FH/EL IO TP3118 Page
Italy Torque limiter group assembling procedure for CD600 FH/EL 1 of 10
Procedura montaggio limitatore di coppia per CD600 FH/EL

Torque limiter group assembling procedure for CD 600 FH/EL
Indicazioni generali:
General recommendations:
La seguente procedura è valida sia per CD 600 Full Hydraulic (FH) che Electric (EL). I componenti della EL che differiscono dalla FH verranno indicati tra
parentesi quadre.
The following procedure is valid for both the CD 600 Full Hydraulic (FH) and Electric (EL). The components of EL version that differs from the FH
version, will be indicated in square brackets.
Prima di effettuare qualsiasi accoppiamento pulire accuratamente le superfici interessate con straccio e detergente e verificare l’assenza di ammaccature.
Before performing any coupling operation, clean the surfaces involved with a cloth and detergent and check that there are no dents.
Nel movimentare e appoggiare i componenti, porre particolare attenzione a non danneggiare (ammaccature, graffi, ecc.) le superfici di accoppiamento.
While moving and positioning the components, take special care not to damage (dents, scratches etc.) the coupling surfaces.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
Picture Assembling/Manufacturing task Q HS E

Recomme Recommendations Recommen
ndations dations
1.
Inserire una rondella di rame da 3/8”x1.5 sul tubo di fissaggio,
(PN 10A43F7633.06) [PN 10A43F7582.00 ] del giunto Rotoflux,
usando una piccola quantità di Loctite 577 sulla rosetta e sul Usare i DPI in dotazione
filetto, come in figura. in particolare scarpe
antinfortunistiche e
Insert a copper washer 3/8”x1.5 on the Rotoflux fixing tube, (PN guanti.
10A43F7633.06)[PN 10A43F5782.00], using a small quantity of
Loctite 577 both on the washer and the thread, as per figure. Use the IPDs provided,
in particular protective
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
2.
Avvitare il tubo sul riduttore Sumitomo ZSPN 621/190-87 (PN
10A33C727.222) usando le chiavi come in foto (chiave da 22 e
chiave a catena). Usare i DPI in dotazione
in particolare scarpe
Screw the tube on the Sumitomo gearbox ZSPN 621/190-87 (PN antinfortunistiche e
10A33C727.222) using the spanners as shown in picture (wrench guanti.
22 and chain wrench). Use the IPDs provided,
shoes and gloves.
3.
Ingrassare l’albero del riduttore.
Grease the gearbox shaft. Usare i DPI in dotazione

guanti.
Use the IPDs provided,
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
4.
Inserire il limitatore di coppia Compomac (PN 10A55F5045.03)
[PN 10A33C7581.00] nella puleggia della motorizzazione
secondaria (PN 10A55F5045.04) [PN 10A47F7580.00], e inserire Usare i DPI in dotazione
l’assieme ottenuto sul riduttore, portandolo fino in battuta col in particolare scarpe
martello di gomma. antinfortunistiche e
guanti.
Insert the torque limiter Compomac (PN 10A55F5045.03) [PN Use the IPDs provided,
10A33C7581.00] in the secondary drive pulley (PN in particular protective
10A55F5045.04) [PN 10A47F7580.00], and insert the resulting shoes and gloves.
ass’y on the gearbox, placing in its seat with the rubber hammer.
5.
Inserire 2 o-ring (PN 00A07C002.050) [PN 00A07C002.047]
nelle sedi del tappo di chiusura (PN 10A55F5045.06) [PN
10A55F7583.00] del limitatore di coppia. Usare i DPI in dotazione
Mount 2 o-ring (PN 0007C002.050) [PN 00A07C002.047] in the antinfortunistiche e
appropriate seats of the closure plug (PN 10A55F5045.06) [PN guanti.
10A55F7583.00] of the torque limiter. Use the IPDs provided,
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
6.
Inserire il perno (PN 10A47F7568.01) nel tappo, ingrassare la
superficie esterna del tappo stesso ed inserirlo nel limitatore di
coppia. Porre attenzione a far coincidere il perno del tappo col foro Usare i DPI in dotazione
nel limitatore. in particolare scarpe
Insert the pin (PN 10A47F7568.01) in the plug, grease the guanti.
external surface of this one, insert it in the torque limiter. Take
attention to align the pin of the plug with the hole in the torque Use the IPDs provided,
limiter. in particular protective
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
7.
Inserire la rosetta di sicurezza MB6 (PN 00A06C040.020) dopo
aver piegato un dente nella direzione opposta a quella originaria.
Far quindi coincidere il dente con il foro nel tappo appena Usare i DPI in dotazione
montato. in particolare scarpe
Wrap one tooth of the lock washer MB6 (PN 00A06C040.020) in guanti.
the opposite direction than the original. Insert the washer on the
plug, pushing the deformed tooth in the hole in the plug. Use the IPDs provided,
shoes and gloves.
8.
Ingrassare il filetto del tubo e inserire la ghiera di bloccaggio KM6
(PN 00A06C037.006) con lo smusso verso l’interno.
Usare i DPI in dotazione
Grease the thread of the tube and insert the lock nut KM6 (PN in particolare scarpe
00A06C037.006) by the chamfered side. antinfortunistiche e
guanti.

shoes and gloves.
0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
9.
Serrare bene la ghiera con la chiave a settori da 45 (fornita nel
toolbox PN 00AMVKEY.0112). Ruotarla finché la scanalatura
coincide con uno dei denti della rondella di sicurezza e ripiegarla Usare i DPI in dotazione
come in foto. in particolare scarpe
Tighten the lock nut with the hook wrench 45 (supplied with the guanti.
tool box PN 00AMVKEY.0112). Rotate the lock nut until the
groove is aligned with one of the tooth of the washer, then wrap it Use the IPDs provided,
as per figure. in particular protective
shoes and gloves.
10.
Inserire una rondella di rame da 3/4” (PN 10A07C.RON.64) sul
giunto Rotoflux F10-300-01R 07/07 F (PN 10A33C303.303) e
applicare della Loctite 577 sul filetto. Usare i DPI in dotazione
Insert a copper washer 3/4” (PN 10A07C.RON.64) in the joint antinfortunistiche e
Rotoflux F10-300-01R 07/07 F (PN 10A33C303.303) and pour a guanti.
small quantity of Loctite 577 on the thread. Use the IPDs provided,
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
11.
Avvitare il giunto Rotoflux sul tubo di fissaggio e serrarlo con due
chiavi (chiavi da 27 e 17), come in foto.
Screw the Rotoflux joint on the fixing tube and tighten it with 2 in particolare scarpe
wrenches (wrench 27 on the fixing tube and wrench 17 on the antinfortunistiche e
Rotoflux joint ), as per figure. guanti.
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
12.
Forare leggermente (circa 2 mm) il gambo del Rotoflux attraverso
il foro nel tubo di fissaggio, usando una punta da Ø4.2.
Drill 2mm deep hole on the base of the Rotoflux by the means of in particolare scarpe
Ø4.2mm diameter drill, using the hole in the fixing tube as guide antinfortunistiche e
for the drill. guanti.

shoes and gloves.
13.
Avvitare un grano M5x10 a punta, nel foro, dopo averlo cosparso
di Loctite 270.
Use Loctite 270 on a socket screw M5x10 and screw it in the hole . in particolare scarpe
guanti.
Use the IPDs provided, in

particular protective
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
14.
Avvitare un dado M5 normale sul grano e serrarlo con la chiave.
In questo modo si previene ogni possibile svitamento indesiderato
del giunto Rotoflux. Usare i DPI in dotazione
Screw a M5 nut on the socket screw and tight it with the wrench. antinfortunistiche e
In this way any possible self-unthread of the Rotoflux coupling is guanti.
prevented. Use the IPDs provided, in
particular protective
shoes and gloves.

0 FDS LG 11/09/2008
1
2
3
G ANNEXES
Anne G
Troubleshooting

Luca Rosa DWM Global Tech. Service Engineer M&V Systems EH Tel.+39 0532 831010 Fax. +39 0532 831650 Mobile. +39 348 9108160 E-mail: rluca@miswaco.com
M&V CD600 Prototype Software tests
Date: January 2005 – May 2006
Location: Berra
Report written by: Luca Rosa
Object: Troubleshooting
File name: Cd600
Date of Issue Written By Revision

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
1. Touch Screen

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 2

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 3

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 4

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 5

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 6

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 7

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 8

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 9

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 10

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 11

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 12

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 13

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 14

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 15

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 16

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 17
System control

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 18

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 19

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 20

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 21

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 22

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 23

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 24

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 25

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 26

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 27

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 28

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 29

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 30

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 31

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 32

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 33

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 34

20/06/2006 Luca Rosa 0
Page 35
Via Bellaria, 228
44033 Berra (FE) ITALY
Tel: +39 0532 831010
Fax: +39 0532 831650

CD 600 VFD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CD 600 VFD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CD 600 VFD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MW008

Use and maintenance manual

MANUAL PART 00AMV13002.00

CHAPTER 1 - General information................................................................................................................................ 9

CHAPTER 2 - Description of the machine and technical data ................................................................................. 15

CHAPTER 3 - General safety information .................................................................................................................. 35

3.3 Safety devices ........................................................................................................................................................................... 37

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 3

CHAPTER 4 - Instruction for installation.................................................................................................................... 47

CHAPTER 5 - Controls and devices............................................................................................................................ 69

CHAPTER 6 - Operations prior to use ........................................................................................................................ 71

6.2 Checking the protection devices ............................................................................................................................................... 71

CHAPTER 7 - Use of the machine ............................................................................................................................... 73

CHAPTER 8 - Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 75

4 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 5

file: CD 600 NATOC.fm - ver. July 11, 2006 3:05 pm

6 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

NOTICE ON THE OWNERSHIP OF THE INFORMATION

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 7

Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

file: Pr.fm - ver. July 5, 2006 3:48 pm

8 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

1.1 Using the manual

•the correct instruction of the operators on problems of safety;

•the correct installation of the machine;the in-depth knowledge of the machine

1.2 Keeping the manual

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 9

1.2.1 Pictograms used in the manual

10 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

STATE OF THE MACHINERY MEANS:

1.2.3 Receivers of the manual

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 11

In particular, they are not allowed to:

1.covers of terminal boards

the replacement of fuses;

Name: Mantovani & Vicentini S.r.l.

12 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Fig. 1.1 - Position of the machine data plate

1.2.3.2 Electrical board identification data

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 13

Fig. 1.2 - Position of the electrical board data plate

1.2.4 Information on the authorised service centres

unsure about the use of the machine.

14 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

2.1 General description of Apparatus

2.1.1 Description of the working cycle of the machine.

discard or eliminate potential decanter plugging

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 15

2.1.1.1 Fully variable speed Back Drive and Main Drive

2.1.1.2 PLC control

16 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Fig. 2.1 - Mobile electric panel

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 17

2.2 CENTRIFUGE COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION

18 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY 19

20 Mantovani & Vicentini - Berra (FE) - ITALY

2.2.3 GEAR BOX

2.2.4 ACCELERATOR SUPPORT